Мануал для дукати диавель

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ducati Manuals
  4. Motorcycle
  5. Diavel
  6. Workshop manual
  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Related Manuals for Ducati Diavel

Summary of Contents for Ducati Diavel

  • Page 2: Table Of Contents

    Diavel identification data 3 Section 3 03 — Technical data 1.1 — Technical specifications General 3 Colours 4 Transmission 4 Timing system/valves 5 Crankshaft 5 Cylinder/Piston 6 Gearbox 6 Cooling system 7 Front wheel 7 Front suspension (Diavel ABS) 7…

  • Page 3
    1 — General Front suspension (Diavel Carbon ABS) 7 Rear wheel 7 Rear suspension (Diavel ABS) 8 Rear suspension (Diavel Carbon ABS) 8 Hydraulic brakes 8 Charging system/alternator 9 Injection-ignition system 9 Fuel system 9 Injection system 9 Lights/instrument panel 10 1.2 — Dimensions…
  • Page 4
    1 — General Adjusting the throttle cable 41 Adjusting the clutch lever and front brake lever 43 Adjusting the position of the gear change and rear brake pedals 44 Adjusting the front fork 45 Adjusting the rear shock absorber 47 Section 5 05 — Fairings 1 — Rear-view mirrors…
  • Page 5
    1 — General Table D 15 Table E 17 Table F 19 Table G 20 Table H 21 Table J 23 Table K 24 Table L 25 Table M 26 Table N 27 Table O 29 Table P 31 Table Q 32 Table R 33 Table S 38 Table T 39…
  • Page 6
    Dashboard diagnosis 111 “Setting” menu 113 “Riding Mode” customisation 115 DTC (Ducati Traction Control) setting function 117 Tips on how to select the sensitivity level 118 ENGINE setting function (Engine Power Control) 119 DEFAULT function (Resetting Ducati default parameters) 120…
  • Page 7
    1 — General Recovery procedure in the event of electric steering lock fault 145 Recovery procedure in the event of Hands Free system fault 146 Start procedure with PIN code (no keys) 146 How to enable engine start with PIN code 147 How to enable the PIN code 147 How to reset the PIN code 147 Wiring diagram of the Hands Free system 148…
  • Page 8
    1 — General High beam flash not working — start/stop lap function not working 244 Number plate light not working 245 Running lights not working 246 Dashboard menu option scrolling not possible 247 Resetting turn indicators not possible — accessing dashboard menu not possible 248 Gear indicator display on dashboard shows dashes, engaged gear not displayed correctly, idle speed irregular with gearbox in neutral.
  • Page 9
    1 — General 4 — Rear brake Removing of the rear brake control 32 Disassembly of the rear brake control 34 Refitting the rear brake control 35 Removal of the rear brake calliper 39 Removal of the rear brake disc 40 Refitting the rear brake calliper 41 5 — ABS system information Operating principle 42…
  • Page 10
    1 — General Steering angle adjustment 109 Removal of the steering head components 110 Refitting the steering head components 114 12 — Rear shock absorber assembly Rear suspension system 121 Removal of the rear shock absorber 122 Overhauling the rear shock absorber 123 Disassembly of rear shock absorber — rocker arm — linkage assembly 123 Reassembly of rear shock absorber — rocker arm — linkage assembly 124 Refitting the rear suspension 128…
  • Page 11
    1 — General Section 8 08 — Fuel/Exhaust System 2 — Fuel tank Removal of the fuel tank 4 Removal of the fuel tank filler cap 6 Refitting the filler cap 7 Replacing the tank flange and fuel sensor. 8 Refitting the fuel tank flange 9 Refitting the fuel tank 9 6 — Airbox –…
  • Page 12
    1 — General Refitting the expansion tank 25 Removal of the cooling system hoses and unions 30 Refitting the cooling system hoses and unions 33 3.2 — Cooling system: water radiators Removing the water radiators 47 Disassembling the water radiator unit 50 Renewal of the cooling fan 52 Reassembling the water radiator unit 53 Refitting the radiator 58…
  • Page 13
    1 — General Checking and overhauling the components 154 Reassembling the clutch 156 6.2 — Clutch assembly: clutch cover Removal of the clutch-side crankcase cover 161 Disassembly of the clutch cover 162 Reassembly of the clutch-side crankcase cover 163 Refitting the clutch-side crankcase cover 164 6.3 — Clutch assembly: primary drive gears Removal of the primary drive gear 166 Refitting the primary drive gears and checking backlash 168…
  • Page 14: General

    1 — General Refitting the crankshaft/connecting rod assembly 274…

  • Page 15
    1 — Impianto elettri-co 01 — Impianto elettrico 1 — How to use this manual How to use this manual 3 Layout of the manual 4 2 — Symbols — Abbreviations — References Product specifications 6 3 — Hazardous Products — Warnings General safety rules 8 General maintenance indications 10…
  • Page 16: How To Use This Manual

    This manual also describes the essential checks to be carried out prior to delivery of the motorcycle. Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. declines all liability for any technical errors or omissions in this manual and reserves the right to make changes made necessary by the technical evolution of its products without prior notice.

  • Page 17
    Important The structure of the manual has been designed so that all the models types of the DUCATI MOTOR HOLDING products can be included. To facilitate consultation of the manual, the table of contents is identical for all motorcycle models.
  • Page 18: Symbols — Abbreviations — References

    Symbols — Abbreviations — References 2 -Symbols — Abbreviations — References To allow quick and easy consultation, this manual uses graphic symbols to highlight situations in which maximum care is required, as well as practical advice or information. Pay attention to the meaning of the symbols since they serve to avoid repeating technical concepts or safety warnings throughout the text.

  • Page 19
    Medium-strength threadlocker Loctite 401 LOCK 12 Instant adhesive gel offering tensile/shear strength. Loctite 454 gel DUCATI fluid gasket. 942470014 Exhaust pipe paste. Self-sealing paste, hardens when Holts Firegum heated; resists temperatures exceeding 1000 °C. Spray used to protect electric systems.
  • Page 20
    Symbols — Abbreviations — References Emulsion for lubrication of rubber. P 80…
  • Page 21: Hazardous Products — Warnings

    Hazardous Products — Warnings 3 -Hazardous Products — Warnings General safety rules Carbon monoxide When a maintenance operation must be performed with the engine running, maker sure that the working area is well- ventilated. Never run the engine in an enclosed space. Warning Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, which is a poisonous gas that can cause unconsciousness or even death if inhaled.

  • Page 22: General Maintenance Indications

    General maintenance indications Useful tips Ducati recommends that you follow the instructions below in order to prevent problems and obtain the best end result: — when diagnosing faults, primary consideration should always be given to what the customer reports about motorcycle operation since this information can highlight anomalies;…

  • Page 23: Identification Data

    2 — Impianto elettrico 02 — Impianto elettrico 1 — Identification data Diavel identification data 3…

  • Page 24: Diavel Identification Data

    Identification data 1 -Identification data Diavel identification data Each Ducati motorcycle has two identification numbers -the frame number and the engine number- and an EC nameplate (A) (NOT PRESENT ON THE US VERSION). Note Please quote these numbers, which identify the motorcycle model, when ordering spare parts.

  • Page 25
    Identification data 1 Manufacturer: Ducati Motor Holding 2 Type — same for all Diavel / Diavel Carbon models 3 Variant 4 Version: AA = Diavel / Diavel Carbon AB = Diavel ABS / Diavel Carbon ABS 5 Year of manufacture:…
  • Page 26
    3 Variant – Numeric or X (Check digit) 4 Model year (A=2011) 5 Manufacturing facility 6 Progressive serial No. Data stamped on engine Europe version 1 Manufacturer: Ducati Motor Holding 2 Engine type 3 Progressive production No. Data stamped on engine US version 1 Engine type 2 Model year (B=2011) 3 Progressive production No.
  • Page 27
    Cylinder/Piston 6 Gearbox 6 Cooling system 7 Front wheel 7 Front suspension (Diavel ABS) 7 Front suspension (Diavel Carbon ABS) 7 Rear wheel 7 Rear suspension (Diavel ABS) 8 Rear suspension (Diavel Carbon ABS) 8 Hydraulic brakes 8 Charging system/alternator 9…
  • Page 28: Technical Specifications

    Rear wheel travel: 120 mm Shock absorber stroke: 50 mm Front wheel rim (Diavel ABS) Light alloy with 14 spokes. Front wheel rim (Diavel Carbon ABS) Forged in light alloy with 9 spokes. Front wheel size MT 3.50×17” Front tyre size…

  • Page 29: Colours

    57E22714 (AKZO) Enamel 54M22705 (AKZO); Clear lacquer 228.880 (PPG) Racing Black frame and black wheel rims. Diavel Carbon ABS Red and Mat Carbon Ducati red enamel 54D234015 (AKZO) Red frame and black rims. Glossy and Matt Carbon; Pearl White Silk enamel 53E23102 (AKZO);…

  • Page 30: Crankshaft

    Technical specifications Closing rocker arm — intake 0.05-0.10 mm 0.05 to 0.15 mm Closing rocker arm — exhaust 0.05-0.10 mm 0.05 to 0.15 mm Reference Adjusting clearance Reset value (new belt) (used belt) 110±5 Hz (horizontal) 80±5 Hz (horizontal) Belt tensioning when cold 110±5 Hz (vertical) 80±5 Hz (vertical) Limit minimum value with cold…

  • Page 31: Cooling System

    Fork leg Ø 50 mm Travel along leg axis 120 mm Oil charge per fork leg 720 cm 2 (per leg) Front suspension (Diavel Carbon ABS) Reference Technical specifications MARZOCCHI: Type Upside-down fork with DLC coating, adjustable compression, rebound and spring preload.

  • Page 32: Rear Suspension (Diavel Abs)

    Rear wheel travel: 120 mm Shock absorber stroke: 50 mm Stroke 50 mm Shock absorber Rear suspension (Diavel Carbon ABS) Reference Technical specifications SACHS: Type The rear suspension system uses a hydraulic monoshock absorber with rebound, compression and spring preload adjustment.

  • Page 33: Charging System/Alternator

    Technical specifications Calliper cylinder diameter 30 mm / 32 mm Pad friction material TT2182 FF Type PS13 Cylinder Master cylinder diameter 13 mm Charging system/alternator Reference Technical specifications Voltage 12 V Battery Capacity 10 Ah Type Sealed, maintenance free Capacity 12 V — 430 W Generator Injection-ignition system…

  • Page 34
    Technical specifications ABS 2 25 A ABS 1 30 A Fans 10 A Diagnosis / Recharge 7.5 A…
  • Page 35: Dimensions

    Dimensions 1.2 -Dimensions…

  • Page 36: Fuel, Lubricants And Other Fluids

    Fuel, lubricants and other fluids 2 -Fuel, lubricants and other fluids Fuel, lubricants and other fluids Type Quantity (litres) Unleaded fuel with 95 fuel octane rating Fuel tank, including a reserve of 4 dm 17 dm (litres) (at least) 16 dm (litres) (USA) Lubrication circuit…

  • Page 37: Torque Settings

    Torque settings 3 -Torque settings Frame torque settings Part Thread (mm) Nm ±10% Note Tolerance Top fairing Right rear-view mirror retaining screw M8x1.25 Left rear-view mirror retaining screw M8x1.25 Stand Side stand plate retaining screw on shock absorber M10x1.5 support Stand sensor screw M6x1 Front sprocket…

  • Page 38
    Torque settings retaining screw Electrical components cover — electrical components M6x1 solid threadlocker on support retaining screw screw Horn to battery support retaining screw M8x1.25 Voltage regulator to clip on electrical components M6x1 support retaining screw Hands free switch retaining screw M6x1 LOCK 2 Hands free switch retaining nut…
  • Page 39
    Torque settings Shock absorber to rocker arm retaining screw M10x1.25 Rocker arm to swingarm retaining screw M10x1.25 Front mudguard Mudguard to fork calliper retaining screw M6x1 solid threadlocker on screw Front brake pipe clip on mudguard retaining screw AF3.5 0.35 Fluid cooling Fan to fan support retaining screw M4x0.7…
  • Page 40
    Torque settings underside) Rear wheel cush drive bush retaining nut M10x1 LOCK 2 Phonic wheel to disc fixing screw M5x0.8 solid threadlocker on screw Brake disc to pin fixing screw M8x1 Fuel tank Tank to frame retaining screw M6x1 Bitron flange to tank retaining screw M5x0.8 Solid threadlocker on screw…
  • Page 41: Engine Torque Settings

    Torque settings Air intake oil breather Wiring protection on airbox lower half-housing M5x0.8 Oval intake funnel on airbox lower half-housing M5x0.8 retaining screw Conveyors to airbox retaining screw M5x0.8 Map sensor bracket to airbox upper half housing M6x1 retaining screw Air temperature sensor to LH conveyor retaining screw M4x0.7 Map sensor on bracket retaining screw M6x1…

  • Page 42
    Torque settings Preload torque Tightening torque 22.5 Coil retaining screw M6x1 Pulley flange retaining screws M6x1 Cylinder head cover screw M6x1 Exhaust manifold stud M6x1 LOCK 5 Vacuum gauge connection screw on cylinder M6x1 LOCK 2 or TB1324 head (EU only) Evaporative emissions canister fitting on M6x1 LOCK 2 or TB1324…
  • Page 43
    Torque settings Selector claw locator nut M6x1 Selector claw screw M6x1 LOCK 2 or TB1324 Idler and tensioner pulley bolts M20x1 LOCK 2 or TB1324 Timing belt driveshaft pulley retaining nut M15x1 GREASE A Timing belt driveshaft gear nut M14x1 GREASE A Fixed tensioner bearing locking screw M14X2…
  • Page 44: Service Tools

    Diavel_Carbon_11_3_4.13.1.html 4 -Service tools Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS WORKSHOP SERVICE TOOLS Diavel ABS WORKSHOP SERVICE TOOLS Diavel Carbon WORKSHOP SERVICE TOOLS Diavel Carbon WORKSHOP SERVICE TOOLS Specific tools for the engine Code no. Description 88713.2011 Tool to lock crankshaft at Top Dead Centre 88713.2676 Wrench for tightening cylinder head nuts…

  • Page 45
    Diavel_Carbon_11_3_4.13.1.html 88713.3521 Gearbox output shaft oil seal installer 88713.1806 Holding tool for pulley tightening 97900.0215 DDS (Ducati Diagnosis System) + cylinder vacuum meter kit 88765.1518 Valve lift gauge 88713.2878 Fork-type feeler gauge 0.2 mm, 0.3 mm 88713.3367 Flywheel tool 88713.1920 Tool for installing O-rings on crankcase studs…
  • Page 46
    Diavel_Carbon_11_3_4.13.1.html 88713.3334 Plate for gear selector fork positioning 88713.2442 Tool for installation of sealing ring on valve-guide 88713.1749 Puller for drive pulley and cover 88713.1832 Engine repair bench 88713.3408 Wet FCC clutch drum holding tool 88765.1623 Distribution pulley timing tool 88713.1886 Engine cover sheet 88713.1010 Exhaust gases pick-up connector…
  • Page 47
    Diavel_Carbon_11_3_4.13.1.html 88713.1805 Tool for tightening timing belt driveshaft pulley 88765.2090 Top Dead Centre test gauge 88713.3219 Holding tool for pulley tightening 88713.0869 Water pump front seal installer 88713.0870 Installation tool for counter plate for water pump front seal 88700.5749 Crankcase half assembly cap 88713.2877 Spark plug wrench 88713.1980 Punch for installing caps on shafts…
  • Page 48
    Diavel_Carbon_11_3_4.13.1.html 88713.3497 Timing belt tensioner pulley wrench 88765.1298 Spacer lower register control valve 88713.2870 Connecting rod guide tool 88713.3394 Punch to install circlip on the camshaft 88713.3406 Wrench for tightening primary sprocket nut 88713.2906 Oil filter cartridge wrench 88713.3417 Torque wrench for tightening front sprocket nut 88713.3407 Bush (gear position sensor)
  • Page 49: Specific Tools For The Frame

    88713.0944 Oil filter cartridge wrench 88713.2834 Circlip fitting punch 88713.1994 Rocker arm shaft puller 88713.3734 Timing belt tensioner pulley wrench Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS WORKSHOP SERVICE TOOLS Diavel Carbon WORKSHOP SERVICE TOOLS Specific tools for the frame Code no.

  • Page 50
    Diavel_Carbon_11_3_4.13.1.html 88713.2562 Chain assembly tool 88713.1058 Wrench for steering shaft nut 88713.1062 Tool for installing steering head bearings 88713.2951 Rear wheel balancing tool 88713.3211 Wrench for adjustment of the eccentric hub 88713.3204 MARZOCCHI fork service tool — Sealing ring fitting 88713.3203 Pull bar for MARZOCCHI fork service…
  • Page 51
    88713.2409 Swingarm ball bearing installation tool 88713.3526 Frame plates assembling wrench 88713.3396 Engine repair bench 8000.70139 Front wheel shaft wrench 88713.1515 Engine/frame support Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS DDS TESTER Diavel ABS WORKSHOP SERVICE TOOLS Diavel Carbon DDS TESTER Diavel Carbon…
  • Page 52: Appropriate Diagnosis Tools

    Diavel_Carbon_11_3_4.13.1.html WORKSHOP SERVICE TOOLS Appropriate diagnosis tools Code no. Description 97900.0211 DDS (Ducati Diagnosis System) without cables 97900.0227 Power cable and diagnosis 97900.0222 Power cable and diagnosis 1060838 (Measurement Module) 97900.0218 Vacuum sensor 552.1.039.1A Pressure sensor 97900.0220 Pressure/vacuum tube 97900.0221 Union…

  • Page 53
    Diavel_Carbon_11_3_4.13.1.html 97900.0228 Battery socket adapter 814.1.114.1A Oil pressure coupling 514.1.032.1A Auxiliary test cable 552.1.038.1A Cylinder compression cable M10 fitting 875.1.065.1A Oil pressure tube 97900.0230 Feeder 97900.0224 Feeder 88765.1371 Belt tensioning sensor…
  • Page 54
    Diavel_Carbon_11_3_4.13.1.html 88765.1374 Belt tensioning sensor bracket 590.1.189.1A Fuel pressure tube 88765.1126 Clamp-type amperemeter 97900.0227S CAN network diagnosis cable…
  • Page 55: Maintenance Operations

    4 — Impianto elettrico 04 — Impianto elettrico 1 — Vehicle pre-delivery 2 — Scheduled maintenance chart Operations to be carried out by the dealer 4 List of operations to be performed at 1000 km 4 Operations to be carried out by the dealer 5 List of operations to be performed every 12000 km / year (first limit reached) 5 Operations to be carried out by the customer 5 List of operations to be performed every 1000 km 5…

  • Page 56: Vehicle Pre-Delivery

    Vehicle pre-delivery 1 -Vehicle pre-delivery 1 Transport packaging integrity check (if required); 2 Removal from the transport packaging (if required); 3 Motorcycle integrity check; 4 Check of the supplied kit completeness (refer to the parts list supplied together with the bike packaging); 5 Only if the bike is supplied in a crate: handlebar and controls assembly;…

  • Page 57: Scheduled Maintenance Chart

    Scheduled maintenance chart 2 -Scheduled maintenance chart Operations to be carried out by the dealer List of operations to be performed at 1000 km Reading of the error memory with DDS on the engine control units, vehicle and ABS Change the engine oil Change the engine oil filter Check the indicators and lighting Check the safety devices (side stand switch, clutch lever switch, right switch engine stop switch and gear…

  • Page 58: Operations To Be Carried Out By The Customer

    Scheduled maintenance chart Replace the air filter (only every 24000 km) Replace the front fork oil (only every 24000 km) Replace the coolant (only every 24000 km) Check the indicators and lighting Check the safety devices (side stand switch, clutch lever switch, right switch engine stop switch and gear position sensor) Check the battery charge level Checking the coolant level…

  • Page 59: Maintenance Operations

    Maintenance operations 3 -Maintenance operations Reading of the error memory with DDS on the engine control units, vehicle and ABS Check if there are errors by following the procedure described in the paragraph “Guided diagnosis” (Sect. 6 — 11). Check engine oil level Check the engine oil level through the sight glass (1) on the right-hand side of the oil sump.

  • Page 60
    Maintenance operations Tighten the exhaust plug (3) to a torque of 20 Nm (Min. 18 Nm — Max. 22 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings). Remove the oil sump filter cartridge (4) using service tool 88713.2906. Important Dispose of the used cartridge, do not attempt to reutilise it. Fit a new cartridge (4), using the tool 88713.2906 making sure to lubricate the gasket with engine oil.
  • Page 61
    Maintenance operations Remove the filtering element (7) and check the O-rings (8) and (9), replace them if necessary. Clean the filter with petrol and compressed air. Take care not to damage the gauze. Place the O-ring (9) on the crankcase and the (8) one on the mesh filter (7).
  • Page 62
    Maintenance operations Refit the mesh filter (7). Apply a bead of fluid gasket to the cap (6) as shown in the figure. Remove the filler plug (2) and carry out refilling with the specified oil type (Sect. 3 — 2, Fuel, lubricants and other fluids) up to reaching the notch that identifies the MAX level in the sight glass (1).
  • Page 63: Checking Valve Clearances

    Maintenance operations Checking valve clearances To check the valves clearance, it is necessary to have access to the cylinder head covers and then remove the components listed below. Operations Section reference Remove the saddles 5 — 3, Removal of the seat Remove air conveyor covers 8 — 7, Removal of the air filters…

  • Page 64
    Maintenance operations Opening rocker arm INTAKE: Operation 0.13 to 0.18 mm Checking clearance 0.10 to 0.25 mm EXHAUST: Operation 0.13 to 0.18 mm Checking clearance 0.10 to 0.25 mm With the valve in the rest position, slide a feeler gauge between closing rocker arm (C) and the highest side of the cam (D) to measure the clearance.
  • Page 65
    Maintenance operations If detected values exceed the specified limits, replace opening and/or closing shims, as described in paragraph “Removing valves” (Sect. 9 — 4.5), with an adequate height to obtain the specified clearance. Note Opening rocker arm shims measuring from 1.8 to 3.45 mm and closing rocker arm shims measuring from 2.2 to 4.5 are available as spare parts.
  • Page 66: Change Timing Belts

    Maintenance operations Refit the cylinder head cover 9 — 4.4, Refitting the camshafts Refit the coils 6 — 9, Ignition coils Refit the exhaust unit 8 — 8, Refitting the exhaust system Fasten the timing belt covers 9 — 4.2, Refitting the timing covers Reassemble the water radiators on 9 — 3.2,…

  • Page 67
    Maintenance operations Remove the tank covers 5 — 2, Removal of the fuel tank fairings Remove the fuel tank 8 — 2, Removal of the fuel tank Remove the coil-spark plugs wires (1), loosening the screws (2) of both spark plugs. Using the appropriate tool 88713.2877 to replace the spark plugs.
  • Page 68
    Maintenance operations Changing and cleaning the air filters The air filter must be replaced at the intervals described in the “Scheduled maintenance chart” (Sect. 4 — 2). Operations Section reference Refit the seat 5 — 3, Refitting the seat Remove the tank covers 5 — 2, Removal of the fuel tank fairings…
  • Page 69
    Maintenance operations tab (B) of the gasket (6) matches with slot (C) of the RH conveyor (2) as shown in the figure. Note Check for no abnormal wrinkles during gasket fitting. Start the screws (1) and screw (3) with washer (4). Tighten the screws (1) to a torque of 3.5 Nm ±…
  • Page 70
    Maintenance operations Loosen the screws (11) fixing the horizontal belt timing cover (7) and remove it from the horizontal cylinder assembly. Loosen the screws (12) and remove the filter (10). Apply the recommended threadlocker to the screws (8) and (11). Once the check has been carried out refit filter (10), screw without tightening the screws (12) and refit the horizontal timing belt cover (7) on the horizontal cylinder assembly by tightening the screws (11) to a torque of 10 Nm (Min.
  • Page 71
    Maintenance operations For optimal operating conditions (coolant mixture starting to freeze at -20 °C), the recommended fluid antifreeze should be mixed with water in the following percentages: ANTIFREEZE: 35 to 40% of the volume; WATER: 65 to 60% of the volume. Important Very hard water with a high mineral salt content can damage the engine.
  • Page 72
    Maintenance operations Loosen the cap (4) of the fluid exhaust hole placed on the pump cover. Allow the coolant to drain off completely. Screw plug (4) with a seal again in the fluid drain hole, and recover the new seal (5). Tighten the plug (4) to a torque of 20 Nm (Min.
  • Page 73
    Maintenance operations Important Check the cooling circuit for possible leaks. Top up the coolant through the expansion reservoir filler to bring the level up to the MAX. mark. Tighten the cap (1) of the expansion reservoir. Operations Section reference Reassemble the RH intake duct 8 — 7, Refitting the air filters Reassemble the RH front half-…
  • Page 74
    Maintenance operations Once that all pistons of both callipers are fully moved back and that all the fluid in the tank has been aspirated, connect to the bleed valve (5) a transparent tube by immersing the end in a container placed on the floor. Fill the reservoir (2) with new brake fluid up to the MAX.
  • Page 75
    Maintenance operations Tighten the bleed valve (5) to a torque of 23 Nm ±10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings) then release the lever. Repeat the operation described above until the old fluid flows completely. Then, with the bleed valve definitely closed to the specified torque actuate repeatedly the lever until a pressure is detected in the brake system.
  • Page 76
    Maintenance operations Unscrew the cap (6) of the rear brake fluid reservoir (7). Siphon off the fluid from the reservoir (7). Fill the reservoir (7) with new brake fluid up to the MAX. mark. Press the pedal to allow the circuit to go under pressure. Keep the pedal pressed to the bottom.
  • Page 77
    Maintenance operations Apply the recommended threadlocker on the screw (C). Refit pipe grommet (B) and tighten the screw (C) to a torque of 4 Nm ±10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Lock the rear brake hose, the tail light wiring and the speed sensor by means of the new ties (A). Fit the rear brake calliper (10) over the brake disc, aligning it with the holes in the calliper mounting bracket.
  • Page 78
    Maintenance operations placed on the floor. Open the bleed valve (4) to allow fluid to escape. Warning During the filling operation, always keep the oil level above the MIN mark to prevent the formation of air bubbles in the circuit. Allow the fluid to flow from the bleed valve (4) until it changes colour.
  • Page 79
    Maintenance operations Unscrew the bleed valve by a 1/4 turn. Operate the clutch lever until all the fluid has been expelled. To completely empty the circuit it is advisable to remove the cap of clutch recover. Undo the screws (5) and slide out the clutch slave cylinder (6). Push in the internal piston (A) to force out all the fluid from inside the cap.
  • Page 80
    Maintenance operations Turn the clutch pushrod (7) counter clockwise until the hole axis of the anti-rotation pin (8) is aligned with the centreline of the casing cover machined surface (D), as shown in the figure. Insert the clutch actuator (6) into the pushrod (7) and bring it fully home on the anti-rotation insert (9). Note Upon insertion of the clutch actuator (6), make sure that the tab (C) of insert (9) matches with the actuator slot (E).
  • Page 81
    Maintenance operations Fill the tank with specified oil (Sect. 3 — 2, Fuel, lubricants and other fluids) taken from an intact container. Important During the following operation, the fluid level must remain topped up at all times. The end of the transparent plastic tubing must remain immersed in the discharged fluid at all times.
  • Page 82
    Maintenance operations Top up the fluid level to approximately 3 mm above the MIN mark of the tank. Reassemble cover (1) and membrane from the clutch fluid reservoir (2) by tightening the screws (3). Adjusting the steering head bearings Excessive handlebar play or shaking forks in the steering head indicate that the play in the steering head bearings requires adjustment.
  • Page 83
    Maintenance operations Adjusting the chain tension Make the rear wheel turn until you find the position where chain is tightest. Set the vehicle on the side stand. Push down the chain at the point of measurement and release. Measure the distance between the “aperture” upper profile and pin centre.
  • Page 84
    Maintenance operations Checking brake pad wear and changing brake pads Warning Brake fluid is corrosive and will damage paintwork. Avoid contact with eyes and skin. In the case of accidental contact, wash the affected area thoroughly with plenty of running water. Important On handing over the motorcycle after changing the brake pads, inform the customer that the front brake must be used gently for the first 100 km to allow the pads to bed in completely.
  • Page 85
    Maintenance operations Top-up with specified fluid (Sect. 3 — 2, Fuel, lubricants and other fluids) until reaching the MAX notch. Hold the lever pulled towards the handgrip and simultaneously tighten the calliper screws (1) to a torque of 43 Nm ±10%(Sect.
  • Page 86
    Maintenance operations Force the brake pads apart to push the calliper pistons into their housings. Release the worn pads (5) from the spring (6). Insert the new pads (5) and the clip (6). Slide in the pad retaining pin (3) and secure it in position with the safety cotter pin (2). Force the pads apart to push the calliper pistons into their housings.
  • Page 87
    Maintenance operations Operate the brake pedal repeatedly so that the pads are bedded in against the disc by the force of the brake fluid. Check that the brake fluid level in the tank is between the MIN and MAX. marks. If this is not the case, act on to the top- up after unscrewing the tank cap (6).
  • Page 88
    Maintenance operations Adjuster (1) adjusts the throttle opening control, while adjuster (2) adjusts the throttle closing control. Note The throttle cables are distinguished by the writings in different colours on them: — on the throttle opening cable (1) is a white writing; — on the throttle closure cable (2) is a yellow writing.
  • Page 89
    Maintenance operations Place the covers (5) and (6) in the reference hole of the handlebar. Fix covers (5) and (6) by tightening the screws (7) to a torque of 10 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Adjusting the clutch lever and front brake lever The clutch lever (1) is fitted with a span adjuster (2) which serves to alter the distance of the lever from the handlebar.
  • Page 90
    Maintenance operations Adjusting the position of the gear change and rear brake pedals The position of the gear change and rear brake pedals in relation to the footrests can be adjusted to suit the preferred riding position. To modify the gear change pedal position act in the following mode: hold the linkage (1) and slacken the counter nuts (2) and (3).
  • Page 91
    Maintenance operations 3) compression damping. Park the motorcycle in a stable position on its side stand. Turn the adjuster (1) on fork leg top with a flat screwdriver to adjust rebound damping. On the Carbon model, adjustment is done using the knob (B) on the fork leg, without a screwdriver. Turn the adjuster (3) on fork leg bottom with a flat screwdriver to adjust compression damping.
  • Page 92
    Maintenance operations Turn the adjuster (1) clockwise to increase damping H; or counter clockwise to reduce damping S. STANDARD setting from the fully closed position (clockwise): — unscrew adjuster (1) by 8 clicks. Spring preload: 15 mm. The two nuts (2) on the upper part of the shock absorber serve to adjust the preload on the external spring. To change spring preload, slacken the upper locking ring nut.
  • Page 93
    Maintenance operations If the motorcycle is to be ridden with a pillion rider and luggage, we recommend setting the rear shock absorber spring preload to the maximum to ensure the best handling and proper ground clearance at all times. It may also be necessary to adjust the rebound damping accordingly.
  • Page 94
    5 — Impianto elettrico 05 — Impianto elettrico 1 — Rear-view mirrors Removal of the rear-view mirrors 4 Refitting the rear-view mirrors 4 2 — Fairings Removal of the fuel tank fairings 6 Disassembly of the front half-fairings 9 Reassembly of the front half-fairings 10 Refitting the fuel tank fairings 12 3 — Seat Removal of the seat 20…
  • Page 95: Rear-View Mirrors

    1 Rear-view mirror 2 Screw 3 U-bolt 4 Spring washer Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS HANDLEBAR AND CONTROLS Diavel Carbon HANDLEBAR AND CONTROLS Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 96: Refitting The Rear-View Mirrors

    Rear-view mirrors Refitting the rear-view mirrors Start the screws (2) in their thread on the rear-view mirrors (1), inserting the washers (4) as shown in the picture. Insert the rear-view mirrors (1) in the U-bolts (3). Tighten the screws (2) to a torque of 25 Nm ±10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).

  • Page 97: Fairings

    14 Screw 15 Nylon washer 16 Special screw 17 Washer 18 Spacer 19 Spring 20 Rubber pad 21 RH tank fairing 22 Tank fairing 23 Tank plug cover 24 Spacer 25 Screw Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS FAIRING Diavel Carbon FAIRING…

  • Page 98: Removal Of The Fuel Tank Fairings

    Fairings Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram. Removal of the fuel tank fairings Operations Section reference Remove the seat Sect.

  • Page 99
    Fairings Loosen the screws (16) and (25) securing the tank plug cover (23) but do not remove it. Lift the tank plug cover (23) up in order to reach the wiring (E) of the dashboard (F). Disconnect the wiring (E) from the dashboard (F).
  • Page 100
    Fairings Remove the tank plug cover (23) from the vehicle recovering the screws (25) and spacers (24). Remove the LH tank fairing (21) by loosening screws (16) and (14); recover the washers (17) and (15). Remove the RH tank fairing (13) by loosening screws (16) and (14); recover the washers (17) and (15). Remove the tank fairing (22) by loosening the screws (14);…
  • Page 101: Disassembly Of The Front Half-Fairings

    Fairings Disassembly of the front half-fairings Undo the screws (5) and separate the RH support (4) from the front right half-fairing (1). Follow the same procedure to disassemble the LH half-fairing (12). Reassembly of the front half-fairings Fit the clips (2) on the front RH half-fairing (1). Join the RH support (4) and the front RH half-fairing (1) and keep them in position by starting the screws (5).

  • Page 102: Refitting The Fuel Tank Fairings

    Fairings Tighten the screws (5) to a torque of 5 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Fit the clips (10) on the front RH half-fairing (1). Follow the same procedure to reassemble the LH half-fairing (12). Refitting the fuel tank fairings Make sure that the following components are fitted on the tank fairing (22): — spacers (18);…

  • Page 103
    Fairings Apply threadlocker to the screws (14). Place the tank fairing (22) on the tank and keep it in position by starting the screws (14) together with the relevant nylon washers (15). Tighten to torque of 2 Nm ±10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings) the screws (14).
  • Page 104
    Fairings Fit the tank RH fairing (13) and keep it in position by starting the screws (16) together with the relevant washers (17). Apply some threadlocker on the screw (14), fit the nylon washer (15) and start the screw. Tighten the screw (14) to a torque of 2 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings) and the screws (16) to a torque of 0.33 Nm ±10% (Sect.
  • Page 105
    Fairings Place the tank plug cover (23) on the vehicle and connect connector (E) to the dashboard (F); push connector until an audible click indicates proper engagement. Apply threadlocker to the screws (25). Fit the tank plug cover (23), fit spacers (24), and start screws (25) and screws (16). Tighten the screws (25) to a torque of 2 Nm ±…
  • Page 106
    Fairings Lubricate the seals (D) of the central tank cover (22) using lubricant specific for rubber. Position the front RH half-fairing (1) by inserting the tabs (C) into the seals (D) pushing downwards (blue arrows); after that, slide the half-fairing completely to the rear side of the motorcycle (red arrows). Block the front RH half-fairing (1) by forcing pin (A) into the receptacle (B) in the RH water radiator.
  • Page 107
    Fairings Fix the front RH half-fairing (1) by tightening the screw (3) to a torque of 0.33 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Follow the same procedure to reassemble the LH half-fairing (12). Apply threadlocker to the screws (9). Fit the RH air inlet (7) and fix it to the tank plug cover (23) by starting the screws (6) and (9).
  • Page 108
    Fairings Operations Section reference Reassemble the handlebar Sect. 6 — 7, Dashboard dashboard Refit the seat Sect. 5 — 3, Refitting the seat…
  • Page 109: Seat

    3 Rubber mounting 4 Special screw 5 Plate 6 Latch Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS SEAT Diavel Carbon SEAT Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 110: Disassembly Of The Seat

    Seat Disassembly of the seat Remove the seat and turn it upside down. Loosen the special screws (4), turn the plates (5) and open the seat cover (2) lateral sides to slide it out. Reassembly of the seat Place the seat cover (2) on the seat and fix it (on the lower side) by starting screws (4) on plates (5). Tighten the screws (4) to a torque of 4 Nm ±…

  • Page 111: Refitting The Seat

    Seat Refitting the seat Note Apply recommended grease to the hole (A) of latch (6). Fit the seat (1) as follows: insert the tabs (B) (on the front side) under the rubber pads (C) of the gloves compartment; then push the seat rear side until hearing the lock latch click.

  • Page 112
    Seat…
  • Page 113: Front And Rear Mudguard

    2 Washer 3 Rivet 4 Clip 5 Screw 6 Spacer 7 Screw 8 Rear mudguard 9 Screw Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS REAR SWINGARM Diavel ABS BELLY FAIRING Diavel Carbon REAR SWINGARM Diavel Carbon BELLY FAIRING Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 114
    Front and rear mudguard Undo and remove the special retaining screws (5): keep the spacers (6). Remove the front mudguard (1). Warning The version provided with carbon mudguards features nylon washers instead of the spacers (6). Note On USA versions, a reflector is mounted on the front mudguard (1). Note The hose grommet (4) is fastened to front mudguard (1) by means of a shear rivet (3) with two washers (2) in-between.
  • Page 115: Refitting The Front Mudguard

    Front and rear mudguard Refitting the front mudguard Warning Do not use the motorcycle without the front mudguard fitted to avoid the risk of the brake pipes fouling the wheel on braking. Insert the screws (5) in spacers (6) with recommended threadlocker, as shown in the figure. Position the front mudguard (1) and start the special screws (5).

  • Page 116: Removing The Rear Mudguard

    Front and rear mudguard Place the hose grommet (A) of the front brake hose and the speed sensor cable inside clip (4) as shown in the figure. Frame torque settings). Close the clip (4) and tighten the screw (7) to a torque of 0.35 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Removing the rear mudguard Undo the screws (9) and remove the rear mudguard (8) from the swingarm.

  • Page 117
    Front and rear mudguard…
  • Page 118: Belly Fairing

    11 Clip 12 Screw 13 Bracket 14 Screw Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS BELLY FAIRING Diavel Carbon BELLY FAIRING Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 119
    Belly fairing Remove the LH belly fairing (2) by loosening the screws (3) with relevant washers (4) and the screws (12). Follow the same procedure to remove the RH belly fairing (1).
  • Page 120
    Belly fairing Loosen the screws (14) and remove the bracket (13 from the electrical components support. Remove the oil cooler shield (7) from the electrical components support (S) by releasing the tab (A) from the slit (B) and tab (C) from retainers (D).
  • Page 121: Reassembly Of Belly Fairing

    Belly fairing Reassembly of belly fairing Position the oil cooler shield (7) inserting the tab (A) into the slit (B) in the electrical components support (S). Note On refitting, make sure that the tab (C) remains positioned under the retainers (D) of the shield (7).

  • Page 122
    Belly fairing Fit clips (11) on bracket (13) and orient them as shown in the figure. Apply rubber lubricant to the pin (E) of the bracket (13). Insert pin (E) in the vibration damping pad (F) of the oil cooler. Fit the bracket (13) on the electrical components support, and tighten the screws (8) to a torque of 4 Nm ±…
  • Page 123
    Belly fairing Fit clips (9) on LH belly fairing (2) and orient them as shown in the figure. Put the LH belly fairing (2) in position by engaging slot (E) in the electrical components support, as shown in the figure. Apply recommended threadlocker on screws (3) and (12).
  • Page 124
    Belly fairing Apply recommended threadlocker to the screws (5) and (8). Fix the LH belly fairing (2) to the oil cooler shield (7) by starting the screw (8) on the lower side, and the screw (5) on the front side. Fit the clips (9) on the RH belly fairing (1) orienting it as shown in the figure;…
  • Page 125
    Belly fairing Tighten to a torque of 4 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings) the screws (3), (5), (8) and (12) to fix the belly fairings (1) and (2) and the oil cooler shield (7).
  • Page 126
    Belly fairing…
  • Page 127: Electrical Components Support

    Electrical components support 6 -Electrical components support 1 Clip 2 Screw 3 Voltage regulator 4 Battery fixing bracket 5 Battery support 6 Vibration damper mount 7 Hose clip 8 Vibration damper mount 9 Clip 10 Washer 11 Screw 12 Cover 13 Cable grommet 14 Battery 15 Battery mat…

  • Page 128: Removing The Electrical Components Support

    Electrical components support Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS BATTERY SUPPORT Diavel Carbon BATTERY SUPPORT Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 129: Reassembling The Electrical Components Support

    Electrical components support Reassembling the electrical components support Check the presence of clips (1), (9) and (24) on the support (5). Check the presence of rubber pads (6) and (8) and of cable grommet (7).

  • Page 130
    Electrical components support Check that the voltage regulator (3) and the solenoid starter (18) are in place on the support (5) with their wiring as shown. The horn (22) must be fixed to the support (5) tightening the screw (25) to 18 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).
  • Page 131
    Electrical components support Check the presence of the grommet (13) on the cover (12). Fit cover (12) on the support (5) by tightening the screw (23) to a torque of 4 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).
  • Page 132
    Electrical components support Reassemble the following elements located inside the electrical components support: — the battery (14) as specified under Section 6 — 2,Battery; — the voltage regulator (3) as specified under Section 6 — 2,Rectifier-regulator; — the solenoid starter (18) as specified under Section 6 — 3,Solenoid starter;…
  • Page 133
    6 — Impianto elettrico 06 — Impianto elettrico 1 — Wiring diagram Key to wiring diagram 7 Wiring diagram colour codes 8 Rear left fuse box (1) key 8 Rear right fuse box (2) key 8 Routing of wiring on frame 9 Table A 11 Table B 13 Table C 14…
  • Page 134
    Dashboard diagnosis 111 “Setting” menu 113 “Riding Mode” customisation 115 DTC (Ducati Traction Control) setting function 117 Tips on how to select the sensitivity level 118 ENGINE setting function (Engine Power Control) 119 DEFAULT function (Resetting Ducati default parameters) 120…
  • Page 135
    6 — Impianto elettrico How to start the engine 140 How to start the motorcycle if the active key is not working 141 How to start the motorcycle without keys 141 How to turn the motorcycle off 142 Recovery and emergency procedures 144 Recovery procedure with no key 144 Recovery in the event of flat active key battery 145 Recovery procedure in the event of electric steering lock fault 145…
  • Page 136
    6 — Impianto elettrico High beam lights not working 236 Low beam lights not working 238 Horn not working 240 Turn indicators not working 242 High beam flash not working — start/stop lap function not working 244 Number plate light not working 245 Running lights not working 246 Dashboard menu option scrolling not possible 247 Resetting turn indicators not possible — accessing dashboard menu not possible 248…
  • Page 137: Wiring Diagram

    Wiring diagram 1 -Wiring diagram DIAVEL ABS WIRING DIAGRAM DIAVEL CARBON ABS WIRING DIAGRAM…

  • Page 138: Key To Wiring Diagram

    Wiring diagram Key to wiring diagram 1 Right-hand handlebar switch 2 Immobilizer…

  • Page 139: Wiring Diagram Colour Codes

    Wiring diagram 3 Hands Free relay 4 Hands free 5 Front fuse box 6 Right fan 7 Left fan 8 Fan relay 9 Fuel pump relay 10 Ride-by-wire relay (ETV) 11 Injection control unit (EMS) 12 Rear fuse box 13 Data Acquisition/Diagnosis 14 Starter motor 15 Fused solenoid 16 Battery…

  • Page 140: Rear Left Fuse Box (1) Key

    Wiring diagram Rear left fuse box (1) key Pos. Consumer Rating Dashboard 10 A Key-sense 15 A Injection relay 20 A Throttle opening starter motor relay (ETV) 10 A Rear right fuse box (2) key Pos. Consumer Rating Black Box System (BBS) 7.5 A Navigator/Alarm 7.5 A…

  • Page 141
    Wiring diagram Table F Left fan cooler connector Table G High/Low beam connector Table G Parking light connector Table H Handlebar dashboard connector Table J Connector 1 Injection control unit Table J Connector 2 Injection control unit Table J ABS ECU connector Table J Hands free connector Table K…
  • Page 142
    Wiring diagram Table W Regulator connector Table W Horizontal lambda sensor Table W Oil pressure switch Table X Solenoid starter wiring Table X Solenoid starter cable — starter motor Table X Solenoid starter — battery positive wire Table X ABS Positive wire Table X/Table W Ground cable — battery negative Table X…
  • Page 143
    Table A Table A…
  • Page 144
    Table A Table B…
  • Page 145
    Table A Table C Table D…
  • Page 146
    Table A…
  • Page 147
    Table A Table E…
  • Page 148
    Table A Table F…
  • Page 149
    Table A Table G Table H…
  • Page 150
    Table A…
  • Page 151
    Table A Table J Table K…
  • Page 152
    Table A Table L…
  • Page 153
    Table A Table M…
  • Page 154
    Table A Table N…
  • Page 155
    Table A…
  • Page 156
    Table A Table O…
  • Page 157
    Table A…
  • Page 158
    Table A Table P…
  • Page 159
    Table A Table Q Table R…
  • Page 160
    Table A…
  • Page 161
    Table A…
  • Page 162
    Table A…
  • Page 163
    Table A…
  • Page 164
    Table A Table S Table T…
  • Page 165
    Table A…
  • Page 166
    Table A…
  • Page 167
    Table A Table U…
  • Page 168
    Table A Table V…
  • Page 169
    Table A Table W…
  • Page 170
    Table A…
  • Page 171
    Table A Table X…
  • Page 172
    Table A…
  • Page 173
    Table A…
  • Page 174: Battery Charging System

    Battery charging system 2 -Battery charging system Checking the battery charging system To check the current flow of the recharging circuit, use the “DDS” diagnosis instrument, which is equipped with an inductive clamp-type amperemeter: refer to chapter “Testing the battery charging system”, Sect.

  • Page 175: Topping Up The Electrolyte

    Battery charging system Always check the condition of the battery before recharging and 1 to 2 hours afterwards. Important Pay careful attention to recharging times. Stop charging immediately if the battery becomes too hot to the touch. Leave to cool before resuming charging. Use only constant-voltage battery chargers.

  • Page 176
    Battery charging system Important Keep the cap strip (3) to hand because it will be used later as plugs for the battery cells. Warning Do not peel or perforate the sealed areas. Place the electrolyte container (2) upside down. Align the six sealed elements with the six filler holes on the battery. Push the container (2) downwards with sufficient force to break the seals and allow the liquid to flow out.
  • Page 177: Battery

    Battery charging system Important Never move the container away from the battery. Do not cut or puncture the liquid container. Make sure that all the electrolyte has flowed out. Carefully extract the container (2) from the battery. Fit the cap bar (3) -previously removed from the electrolyte container (2)- to the battery, ensure the caps plug off all filler holes.

  • Page 178
    Battery charging system Press firmly downwards with both hands until the caps are firmly in place (do not use a hammer). Battery Battery safety rules Warning Before carrying out any operations on the battery, keep in mind the safety standards (Sect. 1 — 3, General safety rules).
  • Page 179
    Battery charging system Removal of the battery Operations Section reference Remove the left belly fairing 5 — 5, Removal of belly fairing Undo the screws (1) and remove the battery retaining bracket (2). Slide out the battery (3) from its housing and, always starting from the negative terminal (-), loosen the screws (4). Remove the positive cable (5), the ABS positive cable (6) from the positive terminal, and the negative cable (7) from the negative terminal.
  • Page 180
    Battery charging system Refitting the battery Position the battery drift (6) on the battery support (7). Place the battery (3) in its compartment by connecting first cable (7) to the negative terminal with the screw (4). Connect the positive cable (5) and then the ABS positive cable (6) to the positive terminal with the screw (4). Tighten the terminal screws (4) to a torque of 10 Nm ±…
  • Page 181: Alternator

    Battery charging system Place the battery (3) on its support, then position the retaining bracket (2) and tighten the screws (1) to a torque of 10 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Operations Section reference Reassemble the left belly fairing 5 — 5, Reassembly of belly fairing Alternator It is equipped with a 12 V, 430 W generator, consisting of a fixed element (stator, A) located on the generator cover and…

  • Page 182
    Battery charging system Engine speed 1500 2500 V effective (idle speed) 25.9 V effective (nominal) 28.3 46.7 V effective (maximum) 30.3 50.0 Values significantly lower than those indicated above can be due to: — partially demagnetised rotor; — short-circuited windings. In the above cases the whole alternator assembly (rotor and stator) should be renewed.
  • Page 183: Rectifier-Regulator

    Battery charging system Operations Section reference Refit the water pump-radiator hose 9 — 3.3, Refitting the water pump Refit the pump-cylinder hoses 9 — 5, Refitting the cylinder/piston assembly Refill the cooling system 4 — 3, Changing the coolant Refit the clutch control piston 7 — 8.2, Refitting the clutch transmission unit…

  • Page 184
    Battery charging system Refitting the regulator Position the regulator (1) on the support. Tighten the screws (1) to a torque of 10 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Important Do not disconnect the battery cables when engine is running because this would cause irreparable damage to the regulator.
  • Page 185
    Battery charging system Important To avoid possible short circuits, replace the fuse in key OFF condition. Warning Never use a fuse with a rating other than the specified value. Failure to observe this rule may damage the electric system or even cause fire. Operations Section reference Reassemble the left belly fairing 5 — 5,…
  • Page 186: Electric Starting System

    Electric starting system 3 -Electric starting system Note The references of the elements listed below are those of the “Wiring diagram”, Sect. 6 -1. Electric starting system The key components of the electric starting system are a solenoid (6) and a starter motor (5) fed by the battery (7). Starter motor Power: 0.7 kW/12 V…

  • Page 187
    Electric starting system Unscrew the fixing screws (3): the lower screw (3) fixes also the ground cable (6). Collect the toothed washer (7) and the washer (8). Note The starter motor retaining screws are assembled with threadlocker. Slide out the starter motor and gasket (5). Refitting the starter motor Inspect the condition of the gasket (5) and renew if necessary.
  • Page 188
    Electric starting system Position the gasket (5) and the starter motor on the crankcase. Start the retaining screws (3) with recommended threadlocker; the lower one (3) with the ground cable (6), the toothed washer (7) and the washer (8). Tighten the retaining screws (3) to a torque of 10 Nm (Min.
  • Page 189: Solenoid Starter

    Electric starting system gears Refit the starter motor idler gear 9 — 9.1, Refitting the starter motor gear Refit the flywheel/alternator 9 — 8, Refitting the flywheel- assembly and the generator cover alternator assembly Refit the water pump-radiator hose 9 — 3.2, Refitting the radiator Refit the pump-cylinder hoses 9 — 5,…

  • Page 190
    Electric starting system Refit the protection cover (A) inserting it on the solenoid starter guides until it engages with the tabs on both sides of the solenoid starter. Operations Section reference Reassemble the left belly fairing 5 — 5, Reassembly of belly fairing…
  • Page 191: Lights And Indicating Devices

    Lights and indicating devices 4 -Lights and indicating devices Renewal of the headlight Disconnect the headlight connectors (A) from the main wiring (refer to the tables of paragraph “Routing of wiring on frame“, Sect. 6 — 1). Loosen nuts (2) that fix the front optical unit to the bottom yoke, and recover the washers (3). Remove the complete front optical unit by sliding it upwards and releasing it from pins (B) of the supporting bracket.

  • Page 192
    Lights and indicating devices Refit the headlight on the front optical unit support, insert the spacers with collars (5) and the screws (4). Apply the recommended threadlocker to the screws (4). Tighten the screws (4) to a torque of 6 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).
  • Page 193
    Lights and indicating devices Fix the front optical applying a torque of 10 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings) to the nuts (2) with washers (3). Reconnect the headlight connectors (A) to the main wiring (refer to the tables of paragraph “Routing of wiring on frame“, Sect.
  • Page 194: Changing Bulbs

    Lights and indicating devices Changing bulbs Changing the headlight bulbs Before replacing a burnt out light bulb, ensure that the replacement bulb has the same voltage and power rating as specified for the lighting device in question (Sect. 3 — 1.1, Lights/instrument panel).

  • Page 195: Headlight Aim

    Lights and indicating devices Refit the connector (3) to the lamp (4), the cover (2) to the headlight, then tighten the screws (1). Low beam (LO) To change the Lo beam headlight bulb (6) see the procedure described above for the Hi beam headlight bulb. Replace the lamp with a new one of the same type and rating (Sect.

  • Page 196
    Lights and indicating devices The vertical alignment of the headlamp can be adjusted manually by turning screw (1). Turn the screw (2) to set beam height.
  • Page 197: Indicating Devices

    Indicating devices 5 -Indicating devices Checking the indicating devices In the event of a fault, the internal connections of the device must be checked in all operating conditions. To do this, it is necessary to disconnect the switch connector from the main wiring harness (Sect. 6 — 1, Routing of wiring on frame).

  • Page 198
    Indicating devices Checking the right-hand handlebar switch To remove the right-hand handlebar switch, undo the retaining screws (1) and disconnect the wiring connector from the electric system. The colours mentioned in the following descriptions refer to the colours of the wires from the switch and not to the colours of the wires of the main electric system.
  • Page 199
    Indicating devices Refit the RH switch inserting the switch pin (U) into the hole (V) in the handlebar and tightening the screws (1) to a torque of 1.3 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).
  • Page 200
    Indicating devices Checking the front and rear brake light switches, neutral light switch, oil pressure switch and clutch switch Brake light switches To check the operation of the front (1) and rear (2) STOP lights use a multimeter to check that when the front or rear brake is pressed, there is electrical continuity (Pos.
  • Page 201
    Indicating devices Switch on the ignition (ignition key set to ON) and remove the electrical terminal from the neutral switch. If the light turns off, the neutral switch should be changed. If the light stays off, switch off the ignition (ignition key set to OFF) and use a multimeter to check whether the section of circuit between neutral switch and engine ECU is earthed.
  • Page 202: Protection And Safety Devices

    Protection and safety devices 6 -Protection and safety devices Checking protection and safety device components Checking the side stand switch Remove the switch (1) from the side stand undoing screw (2) and disconnect the main wiring connector from the switch (see paragraph “Routing of wiring on frame“, Sect.

  • Page 203
    Protection and safety devices Important Switch the ignition key to OFF before replacing a fuse to avoid possible short circuits. Warning Never use a fuse with a rating other than the specified value. Failure to observe this rule may damage the electric system or even cause fire.
  • Page 204: Instruments

    Instruments 7 -Instruments Dashboard Note The dashboard is supplied as a single component; its internal components cannot be renewed separately. Important Whenever the dashboard is renewed, the ignition key programming procedure must be repeated. Loosen the nuts (2) to remove the master dashboard (1) from its seat and disconnect the connector (A) of the main wiring.

  • Page 205: Dashboard System

    Instruments Tighten the nuts (2) to a torque of 3 Nm ±10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Dashboard system The vehicle is equipped with two dashboards: an LCD (1) located on the handlebar containing the key indications (speed, rpm, engine coolant temperature, and clock) and a TFT colour display (2) located in the tank fairing displaying trip information (riding style set, odometer, consumption, average speed, etc.) and the setting menu for activating and setting the various functions.

  • Page 206
    Instruments Indicator lights The following lights are mounted on the handlebar dashboard: 5 NEUTRAL LIGHT N (GREEN): illuminates when the gearbox is in neutral. 6 LOW FUEL LIGHT (AMBER YELLOW): illuminates when there are approximately there are about 4 litres of fuel left in the tank.
  • Page 207: Lcd Unit Functions

    Instruments DTC intervention On — Flashing Note If the Over rev function light and the DTC intervention light should both come on at the same time, the dashboard gives priority to the Over rev function. 12 ABS LIGHT (AMBER YELLOW). This turns on to indicate that ABS is disabled or not functioning.

  • Page 208: Vehicle Speed Indicator

    Instruments Vehicle speed indicator This function displays vehicle speed (Km/h or mph depending on the set measurement system). The dashboard receives information about the actual speed and displays the number increased by 5%. Maximum speed displayed is 299 km/h (186 mph). Over 299 km/h (186 mph) the display will show a series of dashes “- — -“…

  • Page 209: Clock

    Instruments Clock This function shows the time. Time is always displayed as follows: AM from 0:00 to 11:59 PM from 12:00 to 11:59 If battery power is suddenly cut off (Batt-OFF), when battery power is restored and upon next Key-On, the clock is reset and restarts operating from “0:00“.

  • Page 210: Dashboard On Tank

    Instruments The temperature unit of measure can be selected (°C or °F). The reading is indicated as follows: if the reading is between — 39°C and +39°C “LO” is shown flashing on the dashboard (steady); if the reading is between +40°C and +120°C it appears on the dashboard (steady); if reading is +121 °C or higher, “HI“…

  • Page 211: Tft — Parameter Setting/Display

    Instruments TFT — Parameter setting/display Warning Any adjustments to the dashboard must only be carried out when the motorcycle is stationary. Never operate the dashboard controls while riding the motorcycle. At the end of the check, the dashboard always displays as the “main” indication the Odometer (TOT) on the left and the Average Fuel Consumption on the right (unless Menu 2 was disabled).

  • Page 212: Total Distance Covered Indicator: «Odometer

    Instruments Total distance covered indicator: “Odometer“ This function shows the total distance covered by the vehicle (in Km or miles depending on the specific application). At Key-On the system automatically enters this function. The odometer reading is stored permanently and cannot be reset. If the distance travelled exceeds 199999 km (or 199999 miles), the value “199999”…

  • Page 213: Trip 2″ Meter

    Instruments “Trip 2“ meter This function shows the distance travelled since the Trip meter was last reset (in Km or miles depending on the specific application). Press and hold (1) “s“ for 3 seconds while in this function to reset the trip odometer. When the reading exceeds 9999.9, distance travelled is reset and the meter automatically starts counting from 0 again.

  • Page 214: Indicator «Cons. Avg» — Average Fuel Consumption

    Instruments Indicator “CONS. AVG“ — Average fuel consumption This function indicates the “average” fuel consumption. The calculation is made considering the quantity of fuel used and the km travelled since the last Trip 1 reset. When Trip 1 is reset, the value is set to zero and the first available value is shown on the display 10 seconds after the reset. Dashes “- -.-”…

  • Page 215: Indicator «Trip Time» — Trip Time

    Instruments Indicator “TRIP TIME“ — Trip time This function shows the vehicle trip time. The calculation is made considering the time travelled since the last Trip 1 reset. When Trip 1 is reset, the value is set to zero. The active phase calculation occurs when the engine is running and the vehicle is stopped (when the vehicle is not moving and the engine is off the time is automatically stopped and restarts when the counting active phase starts again).

  • Page 216: Engaged Gear Indicator

    The background of the riding mode (SPORT, TOURING or URBAN) is blue (1) if currently set riding mode parameters are the default ones (Ducati factory setting) or yellow (2) if one or more parameters have been modified (customised) by means of the “RIDING MODE” function of the Setting menu.

  • Page 217: Indication If The «Lap» Function Is Active/Not Active

    “Riding Style” function (riding style change) This function changes the motorcycle riding style. Each riding style is associated with a different intervention level of the traction control (DTC — Ducati Traction Control) and different engine power and output. To change the motorcycle riding mode, press the reset button once (3) and the “RIDING MODE“…

  • Page 218: Maintenance Indicator

    Instruments Maintenance indicator This function indicates that the vehicle is about to or has travelled a distance for which an Authorised Ducati Service Centre should be contacted to have the general maintenance or oil change performed. Maintenance table Indicator Mileage travelled…

  • Page 219: First Warning — Oil Service 1000 Km

    Instruments • 72000 • 83000 • 84000 • 95000 • 96000 First warning — OIL SERVICE 1000 Km The first warning is activated at 1000 Km (600 miles) of odometer reading. The (red) warning is activated as a large icon for 10 seconds upon every Key-On (1) then as a small warning that remains displayed (2) until it is reset.

  • Page 220: Warning Indication (Alarms/Signals)

    Instruments Warning indication (Alarms/Signals) The dashboard activates in real-time some warnings / malfunction that are not dangerous for the correct operation of the vehicle. At Key-On (at the end of the check) one or more “warnings” are displayed if they are active. When a “warning”…

  • Page 221: Traction Control (Dtc) Deactivated

    It is activated when the battery voltage is £ 11.0 Volt. Note In this case, Ducati recommends charging the battery as soon as possible with the specific device, as it is possible that the vehicle will not start. Traction Control (DTC) deactivated The activation of this (amber yellow) “warning”…

  • Page 222: Low» Hands Free Key (Hf) Battery Level

    Instruments “Low“ Hands Free key (HF) battery level The activation of this (amber yellow) “warning” indicates that the Hands Free system has detected that the battery that permits the active key (A) to communicate and turn the vehicle on is almost discharged. Note In this case replace as soon as possible the battery as indicated in Sect.

  • Page 223: Steering Release Error — Steering Still Locked

    Instruments Steering release error — Steering still locked The activation of this (amber yellow) “warning” indicates that the Hands Free System was not able to extract the steering lock. Note In this case, we recommend switching the vehicle off and on (Key-Off / Key-On), while holding the handlebar pushed to full lock.

  • Page 224
    Instruments Warning Error message Error light BBS/DTC Black Box / Traction Control control unit GEAR SENSOR Gear sensor FUEL SENSOR Fuel Level Sensor SPEED SENSOR Speed sensor EXVL SYSTEM Exhaust valve starter motor UNKNOWN DEVICE Unknown control unit DEVICE ECU ECU control unit not functioning DEVICE DSB SLAVE Dashboard on handlebar not functioning…
  • Page 225: Setting» Menu

    Instruments Motor relay or Throttle Motor not functioning DEVICE DBS MASTER Dashboard on tank not functioning PRESSURE SENSOR Atmospheric pressure sensor ENGINE TEMP. Engine Temperature Sensor T-AIR SENSOR Air Temperature Sensor FUEL INJECT. Injection relay COIL Coil INJECTOR Injector PICK UP Timing/rpm sensor LAMBDA Lambda sensor…

  • Page 226: Riding Mode» Customisation

    “s” or (2) “t” to select the riding mode to be modified and press reset (3) to confirm. The parameters that can be “customised” are “DTC” (Ducati Traction Control) and ‘”ENGINE”. Any parameter change made is saved in the memory also after a Battery-Off.

  • Page 227: Engine Setting Function (Engine Power Control)

    DTC (Ducati Traction Control) setting function This function allows you to customise the level of DTC intervention (Ducati Traction Control) or disable it for every riding mode. To access the function it is necessary to view the ““Setting”…

  • Page 228
    Instruments To exit the setting function, press the reset button (3) when “EXIT” is highlighted. The DTC intervention increases, passing from level 1 to level 8. The following table indicates the most suitable level of DTC intervention for the various riding types as well as the default settings in the “RIDING MODE“…
  • Page 229
    Instruments If level 8 is selected, the DTC control unit will kick in at the slightest hint that the rear wheel is starting to spin. Between level 8 and level 1 there are a further 6 intermediate levels. The level of DTC intervention decreases in equal steps from level 8 to level 1.
  • Page 230: Default Function (Resetting Ducati Default Parameters)

    Instruments DEFAULT function (Resetting Ducati default parameters) This function resets the parameters set by Ducati for each riding style. To access the function it is necessary to view the ““Setting” menu”, using buttons (1) “s” or (2) “t” select the “RIDING MODE”…

  • Page 231: Menu 2 On/Off Function

    Instruments Menu 2 On/Off function This function turns off and back on the Menu 2. If Menu 2 is disabled, the functions for average fuel consumption (CONS.AVG), instantaneous fuel consumption (CONS.), average speed (SPEED AVG), trip time (TRIP TIME) and air temperature (AIR) will no longer be displayed in the “main screen”.

  • Page 232: Background Setting Function For The Dashboard On Tank — Dashboard 1

    Instruments Background setting function for the dashboard on tank — DASHBOARD 1 This function allows setting the “background“ of the dashboard on tank. To access the function it is necessary to view the ““Setting” menu”, using buttons (1) “s” or (2) “t” select the “BACK LIGHT”…

  • Page 233: Backlighting Setting Function For The Dashboard On Handlebar — Dashboard 2

    Instruments Backlighting setting function for the dashboard on handlebar — DASHBOARD 2 This function allows backlighting setting of the dashboard on handlebar. To access the function it is necessary to view the ““Setting” menu”, using buttons (1) “s” or (2) “t” select the “BACK LIGHT”…

  • Page 234: Lap Activation/Deactivation Function (Lap Time)

    Instruments To access the function it is necessary to view the ““Setting” menu”, using buttons (1) “s” or (2) “t” select the “RPM” function and press the reset button (3) to confirm. The display shows the numerical value of the RPM with a precision of 50 rpm. To exit the setting function, press the reset button (3) when “EXIT”…

  • Page 235: Lap Registration Function

    Instruments LAP registration function This function describes the “LAP“ time registration. If the function is activated (see “LAP activation/deactivation description), the lap time can be registered as follows: pressing the flash headlight button (6) the first time starts the “lap timer” for the first lap, and the dashboard shows the message “LAP-START”…

  • Page 236: Stored Lap Display Function

    Instruments Stored LAP display function This function displays the stored LAPs. To access the function it is necessary to view the ““Setting” menu”, using buttons (1) “s” or (2) “t” select the “LAP” function and press the reset button (3) to enter the following page. Use button (1) “s”…

  • Page 237: Stored Lap Erase Function

    Instruments Stored LAP erase function This function erases the stored LAPs. To access the function it is necessary to view the “Setting” menu”, using buttons (1) “s” or (2) “t” select the “LAP” function and press the reset button (3) to enter the following page. Use button (1) “s”…

  • Page 238: Battery Voltage Indicator (Battery)

    Instruments Battery voltage indicator (BATTERY) This function describes the battery voltage indicator. To access the function it is necessary to view the ““Setting” menu”, using buttons (1) “s” or (2) “t” select the “BATTERY” function and press the reset button (3) to confirm. The information will be displayed as follows: if battery voltage is between 11.8 and 14.9 Volt the reading will be displayed steady;…

  • Page 239: Clock Setting Function

    Instruments Clock setting function This function sets the clock. To access the function it is necessary to view the ““Setting” menu”, using buttons (1) “s” or (2) “t” select the “CLOCK” function and press the reset button (3) to confirm. In the following screen the message “SETTING”…

  • Page 240: Units Of Measurement Modification Function

    Instruments Units of measurement modification function This function allows you to change the units of measurement of the displayed values. To access the function it is necessary to view the ““Setting” menu”, using buttons (1) “s” or (2) “t” to select the “SET UNITS”…

  • Page 241: Abs Disabling Function

    Instruments — Vehicle speed and AVERAGE speed (SPEED AVG): Km/h 2 mph: by setting this condition the following values will have the same units of measurement: — TOT, TRIP1, TRIP2, TRIP FUEL: miles — Vehicle speed and AVERAGE speed (SPEED AVG): mph. To exit the setting function, press the reset button (3) when “EXIT”…

  • Page 242: Immobilizer Override Procedure

    Warning The motorcycle owner must activate (store) the PIN code; if there is already a stored PIN, contact an Authorised Ducati dealer to have the function “reset“. To perform this procedure, the Authorised Ducati Dealer may ask you to demonstrate that you are the owner of the motorcycle.

  • Page 243: Pin Code Change Function

    Instruments changed again as many times as necessary (without limits). To exit the setting function, press the reset button (3) when “EXIT” is highlighted. PIN CODE change function This function changes your four number PIN CODE. To access the function it is necessary to view the “setting”menu, using buttons (1) “s” or (2) “t” to select the “PIN CODE” function and press the reset button (3) to enter the following page.

  • Page 244
    Instruments Note There is no limit to the amount of times you can change your PIN CODE.
  • Page 245: The Hands Free System

    The Hands Free system 8 -The Hands Free system Introduction to the “Hands Free“ system The Hands free system allows the rider to start the engine without physically using the ignition key. The ignition key merely has to be in the vicinity of the motorcycle, such as in the rider’s pocket, for example, in order to use the vehicle. Compared to the standard ignition switches the Hands Free system allows having the hands completely free during usual actions (i.e.

  • Page 246: How To Turn The Motorcycle On

    The Hands Free system This photo shows the active and passive keys. From top to bottom: 1 Active key with mechanical part unfolded; 2 Active key with mechanical part folded; 3 Passive key How to turn the motorcycle on In order to switch the dashboard on and start the engine, the active key must be within 1.5 metres from the bike seat covering the receiver antenna.

  • Page 247: How To Start The Engine

    The Hands Free system If the key is not detected within 10 seconds of switching the dashboard on, the dashboard switches off automatically. How to start the engine With the motorcycle off and the dashboard on, the on/off switch is turned to “RUN OFF” With the motorcycle and dashboard on, the on/off switch is turned to “RUN OFF”.

  • Page 248
    The Hands Free system Push the switch downwards to switch the engine off and enter “RUN OFF” state. Push the switch downwards to switch off the dashboard. The dashboard can only be switched off if the vehicle is stationary (speed = 0 Km/h). If the vehicle is still in motion, the dashboard remains on (for example, if the motorcycle is coasting downhill with the engine off).
  • Page 249: Recovery And Emergency Procedures

    The Hands Free system The following image shows the icon appearing on the tank dashboard: this indicates that the steering is correctly positioned for activating the steering lock. When the steering lock is engaged, the following icon is shown on the display for 5 seconds: The following image shows the icon appearing on the tank dashboard: this indicates that the steering lock has been engaged.

  • Page 250: Recovery In The Event Of Flat Active Key Battery

    The Hands Free system The following image shows the icon appearing on the tank dashboard: this icon indicates that no key is detected. If the motorcycle has been started using the passive key or using the active key in transponder mode (no battery or flat battery), it is normal for the ‘no key’ icon to be displayed.

  • Page 251: Recovery Procedure In The Event Of Hands Free System Fault

    The Hands Free system The following image shows the icon appearing on the tank dashboard: this indicates that the steering lock has not been correctly disengaged Recovery procedure in the event of Hands Free system fault If the Hands free system can no longer communicate with the other control units over the CAN network (with the dashboard or engine on), the following icon is shown on the tank dashboard: The following image shows the icon appearing on the tank dashboard: this indicates that the Hands free system is not connected to the CAN network or that it cannot communicate over the CAN network…

  • Page 252: How To Enable Engine Start With Pin Code

    The Hands Free system Once vehicle speed exceeds 5 Km/h after starting the motorcycle with the PIN code, the no key message is displayed on the dashboard. This is normal. After switching both the engine and the dashboards off, the PIN code entry procedure has to be repeated in order to use the motorcycle again.

  • Page 253
    The Hands Free system 3U — Steering lock actuator 1C — CAN line 2C — Communication line via antenna (radio-frequency) The following is the overall layout of the motorcycle network: The following is the general electrical system diagram and pinout of the Hands free system. Note that the components relative to the electric steering lock are not included as they are not integrated into the Hands free module.
  • Page 254
    The Hands Free system The photo shows the pinout for the Hands free side antenna connection The photo shows the pinout for the Hands free side electric fuel tank cap connection The Hands free system is located in front of the fuel tank and is covered by a plastic shield. The on/off button built into the system is visible under the plastic shield.
  • Page 255: Possible Faults Of The Hands Free System Components

    The Hands Free system This image shows the location of the Hands free system antenna, behind the clear Plexiglas windscreen The Hands free relay, which ideally replaces the function of the ignition switch of the traditional bikes, supplies +15 with key turned to on, and is positioned on its supporting bracket.

  • Page 256
    The Hands Free system — Replace the Hands free system Electrical characteristics and checking component No electrical characteristics or checking procedures are given for the Hands free system as all components are integrated in the module and cannot be accessed for diagnosis, repair or replacement. The module receives direct 12 Volt battery power over PIN 1 and via the main 30 A fuse.
  • Page 257: Communication Antenna

    The Hands Free system The photo shows the Hands free system removed from the motorcycle fuel tank. One of the two switches detecting the full lock handlebar steering position is indicated in the photo. Component replacement methods No special measures or reprogramming are necessary in order to replace the Hands free system. However, the motorcycle keys must be reprogrammed after replacement.

  • Page 258: On/Off Switch On Handlebar

    The Hands Free system — Check that the antenna is in working condition by measuring its electrical resistance. — Check the integrity of the electrical circuit and the relative connections. Note Checking the integrity of the electrical circuit entails the following actions: — Check the wires for continuity and check the state and integrity of the connections.

  • Page 259
    The Hands Free system The button inside the on/off switch receives 12 Volt power directly from the battery via the main 30 A fuse. When pressed, it sends the 12 Volt power to the Hands free system, which detects activation of the button. On/off switch PIN 8, light blue wire (Lb), on/off switch PIN 5, red wire (R).
  • Page 260: The Hands Free Relay

    The Hands Free system The image shows the location of the on/off switch, near the throttle grip on the right hand side of the handlebar. The Hands free relay Introduction This relay provides Key ON +15 power to all the devices on the motorcycle. Functionally, it replaces the conventional ignition switch.

  • Page 261: Active Key

    The Hands Free system This image shows the location of the Hands free relay (A). It is located on the relay supporting bracket. Component replacement methods No special measures are necessary in order to replace the Hands free relay. Active key Introduction The active key (1) communicates with the Hands free system by radio.

  • Page 262
    — Reprogramme the key. — If none of the tests described above identify the problem, contact Ducati. Electrical characteristics and checking component The active key is fitted with a CR 2032 type 3 Volt lithium ion battery. Use only batteries with the same code and the same electrical characteristics.
  • Page 263
    The Hands Free system Remove the battery (2) from the printed circuit board (1) and replace it with a new one. Pay attention to polarity: the positive pole (+) must face upward. Important Use only batteries of the recommended type (CR 2032). Reinsert the printed circuit board (1) from the side with the battery (2) into the plastic shell.
  • Page 264: Passive Key

    — Check that the antenna is working correctly. — Reprogramme the key — If none of the tests described above identify the problem, contact Ducati Electrical characteristics and checking component The component has no specific electrical characteristics and requires no special checks.

  • Page 265
    The Hands Free system It is not possible to start the key programming/reprogramming procedure using only the PIN CODE. It is possible to programme maximum 3 keys, no matter which type (active or passive). During the procedure all keys that you want to use with the bike must be programmed. The keys unavailable during the procedure will thus no longer be able to start the vehicle (they might be reprogrammed afterwards by repeating the whole key programming/reprogramming procedure).
  • Page 266: Introduction To The Engine Control System

    Introduction to the engine control system 9 -Introduction to the engine control system The engine control system used on the Diavel consists of the following elements: — Ride-by-wire system (motorised throttle valves with electric actuator, throttle grip position sensor and throttle valve…

  • Page 267: Layout Of Engine Control System And Other Components

    Introduction to the engine control system 1I Emergency engine cutout switch 2I Start button 4I Side stand button 6I Clutch button 7I Battery voltage for congruence verification 8I Power from ride-by-wire relay (ETV) 9I Oxygen sensor for horizontal cylinder 10I Oxygen sensor for vertical cylinder 11I MAP sensor for horizontal cylinder 12I MAP sensor for vertical cylinder 13I Main throttle grip position sensor…

  • Page 268: Reassembly Of The Control Unit

    Introduction to the engine control system Reassembly of the control unit Insert the control unit (4) into the protecting sheath (5) and position it on the airbox. Position the relay supporting bracket (2) by starting and tightening the screws (1) to a torque of 6 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — Frame torque settings), and connect the control unit connectors (3).

  • Page 269: Fuel System Circuit

    Introduction to the engine control system Operations Section reference Refit the fuel tank 8 — 2, Refitting the fuel tank Refit the fuel tank covers 5 — 2, Refitting the fuel tank fairings Refit the seat 5 — 3, Refitting the seat Fuel system circuit The fuel system circuit consists of: — an electric pump, driven by the injection relay, which is in turn controlled by the ECU (engine control unit)

  • Page 270
    Introduction to the engine control system The image shows the housing at the bottom of the fuel tank in which the plastic mounting containing the electric pump, fuel filter and pressure regulator is installed. The two pipes of the fuel circuit are connected to the bottom of the tank with quick connectors. The connector (1) on the right is for the fuel delivery line (OUT), the connector (2) on the left is for the fuel return line (IN).
  • Page 271
    Introduction to the engine control system The drawing shows the layout for the fuel system circuit. The pipes (4) with grey arrows are the delivery lines of the electric pump, which carry fuel to the injectors. The pipe (3) with black arrows is the fuel return line. The fuel return line is connected to the pressure regulator, which is submerged in the tank with the pump and the filter.
  • Page 272: Injection And Ignition

    The DTC function (Ducati Traction Control, integrated in the BBS) acts on throttle valve aperture only to control traction as necessary. The DTC function integrated in the BBS communicates with the engine control unit via the CAN network.

  • Page 273
    Introduction to the engine control system During the progression stage — at throttle valve aperture angles immediately above idle speed angles — using the speed- density strategy allows more precise determination of engine load (air aspirated by engine), resulting in smoother power delivery.
  • Page 274
    Introduction to the engine control system Absolute pressure sensor readings As the signals generated by the two absolute pressure (MAP) sensors connected to the two intake manifolds are fundamental for the speed-density strategy, it is important to understand how the engine control unit reads these signals. Absolute pressure sensor 1 is connected to the intake duct for cylinder 1 (MAP 1, cylinder 1 — horizontal), whereas absolute pressure sensor 2 is connected to the intake duct for cylinder 2 (MAP 2, cylinder 2 — vertical).
  • Page 275: Operating Principle And Characteristics Of The Ride-By-Wire System

    Operating principle and characteristics of the ride-by-wire system The engine control system of the Diavel uses a ride-by-wire system with motorised throttle valves. This eliminates all direct connection with metal cables between the throttle grip and the throttle valves themselves. Cables are used to rotate the APS potentiometer, which generates an electric signal that is sent to the engine control unit.

  • Page 276
    Introduction to the engine control system The three curves show the relationship between the throttle valve aperture regimens and the angle of the throttle grip. Different curves for different engine speed bands are stored in the engine control unit. Each one of these is activated by the rider in relation to the selected riding mode.
  • Page 277
    Introduction to the engine control system (engine control unit), which constantly compares the signals against each other and verifies their consistency. In the event of inconsistency or a fault, the error is indicated and the throttle valve actuator motor is disabled. The information provided by the APS is used by the engine control unit to determine what is known as the “torque request”…
  • Page 278
    Introduction to the engine control system The two diagrams illustrate the operating principle of the ride-by-wire system and the monitoring and control functions performed by the internal ECU circuits. As can be seen, the APS consists of a potentiometer with two elements (MAIN and SUB), with independent power supply and ground.
  • Page 279: Explanation Of The Function Of The Ride-By-Wire System

    Introduction to the engine control system Important In the event of a fault of the electric throttle valve actuator motor, the TPS throttle valve position sensor (integrated into the electric motor) or the APS accelerator position sensor, the entire throttle body must be replaced. In the event of a fault in the ride-by-wire system (throttle valve actuator motor, throttle valve actuator motor relay and APS and TPS sensors), the command to actuate the throttle valves is immediately cancelled and the valves close automatically.

  • Page 280: Anti-Pollution System And Auto-Adaptive Strategy

    Anti-pollution system and auto-adaptive strategy Efficacy of the catalytic converter and oxygen sensors To comply with current emissions legislation, the Diavel is equipped with a trivalent catalytic converter, which oxidises CO (carbon monoxide) and HC (unburnt hydrocarbons) and reduces NOx (nitrogen oxides).

  • Page 281
    Introduction to the engine control system by the catalytic converter. This means that the catalytic converter reduces NOx and oxidises CO and HC by the maximum amount possible. If the engine and fuel system are functioning correctly, the signals generated by the oxygen sensors should oscillate between 0 V and 1 V in the engine operating ranges mentioned above: — Lean fuel-air mixture ->…
  • Page 282
    Operating principle of the zirconium dioxide (ZrO 2 ) oxygen sensor The external surface of the element in zirconium dioxide implemented in the two lambda sensors used on the Diavel is in direct contact with the exhaust gases, while the internal surface is in contact with atmospheric air. Both surfaces are…
  • Page 283
    As a result, never attempt to push-start the motorcycle if starting is impeded by a mechanical or electrical fault. Furthermore, the ignition system must always be in perfect working order. Only use engine oil specified by Ducati, as it has a low ash content (ash obstructs the tiny catalytic converter channels over time).
  • Page 284: Ignition Coils

    Introduction The engine control system of the Diavel includes two ignition coils: one for the horizontal cylinder and one for the vertical cylinder. These coils are installed directly in the spark plug wells. A diode is installed on the secondary winding inside the coil, which prevents the unintentional generation of a spark at the spark plug as a result of variations in voltage induced on the secondary winding itself when the primary winding charge phase starts.

  • Page 285
    Introduction to the engine control system The image shows the internal electric configuration of the coil. During the primary coil phase, the polarities of the two voltages inversely polarise the diode (red arrows). When the ECU interrupts power to the primary circuit, the diode is polarised directly (green arrows), allowing spark generation on the spark plug.
  • Page 286
    Introduction to the engine control system Installation location of vertical cylinder coil (B). Location of vertical cylinder coil connection. Connection wiring diagram O Horizontal cylinder coil, R Injection relay. CCM engine control connection, 1 power connection (12V) via injection relay (brown/white –…
  • Page 287: Injectors

    Introduction The injectors used on the Diavel are TOP FEED units, meaning that fuel is fed into the top of the injector itself. The injectors contain a winding which raises a needle when electrically energised. This opens the atomiser nozzle, through…

  • Page 288
    Introduction to the engine control system the spray consists of perfectly atomised fuel, the atomiser nozzle has twelve holes. Each cylinder has an injector, located underneath the respective throttle valve. The injector aperture time is determined by the engine control unit to ensure that the correct quantity of fuel is injected (carburation).
  • Page 289: Throttle Valve Operation Engine

    Introduction The electric motor actuating the throttle valve for the vertical cylinder is mounted on the throttle body of the Diavel, while a link rod connects the vertical cylinder throttle valve to the horizontal cylinder throttle valve. In the electric motor, the…

  • Page 290
    Introduction to the engine control system The electric motor, which also incorporates the throttle valve position sensor (TPS), is visible on the right, on the throttle body. The accelerator position sensor (APS) is visible on the left. Component assembling position The image shows the throttle valve actuator motor.
  • Page 291: Engine Start Button

    The throttle valve actuator motor may be actuated into three preset positions (0%, 50%, 100%) using the DDS. If none of the tests described above identify the problem and the throttle valve actuator is in proper working order, contact Ducati. Component replacement methods The throttle valve actuator motor incorporates the throttle valve position sensor (TPS) and cannot be replaced as an individual component.

  • Page 292
    Introduction to the engine control system Location of right hand handlebar switchgear set connection. Connection wiring diagram CCM engine control connection, S engine start button. 1 pink/black — P/Bk, 2 white/blue – W/B. In the event of fault In the event of a start button fault, the engine cannot be started. Fault codes generated and possible correlated faults The engine control unit generates no fault code in the event of an engine start button fault.
  • Page 293: Clutch Lever Button

    Introduction to the engine control system Component replacement methods No special measures are necessary in order to replace the starter button. Checking the right-hand handlebar switch To remove the right-hand handlebar switch, undo the retaining screws (1) and disconnect the wiring connector from the electric system.

  • Page 294
    Introduction to the engine control system Location of clutch button connection. Connection wiring diagram CCM engine control connection, S clutch button. 2 ground, black — Bk, 1 white — W. In the event of fault In the event of a clutch button fault, the operating conditions described in the introduction are not met. Fault codes generated and possible correlated faults The engine control unit generates no fault code in the event of a clutch button fault.
  • Page 295: Side Stand Button

    Introduction to the engine control system Side stand button Introduction The side stand button is located on the side stand. Together with the signal from the clutch button and the neutral signal generated by the gear sensor (transmitted to the engine control unit over the CAN line), the side stand position signal is used to enable or disable engine start.

  • Page 296: Injection Relay

    Introduction to the engine control system In the event of fault In the event of a side stand button fault, the safety conditions described in the introduction are not met. Fault codes generated and possible correlated faults The engine control unit generates no fault code in the event of a side stand button fault. No errors are indicated on the dashboard.

  • Page 297: Throttle Valve Actuator Motor Relay

    Introduction to the engine control system CCM engine control connection, T injection relay. 85 brown/black – Bn/Bk injection relay activation, 87 brown/white-Bn/W ECU input voltage, U direct power to injectors, ignition coils and fuel pump, R battery power (+30), 30 and 86 brown — In the event of fault In the event of an injection relay fault, the engine stops (if running) or will not start.

  • Page 298
    Introduction to the engine control system A injection relay; B ETV relay (throttle valve actuator motor), C radiator fan relay, D engine control unit. Connection wiring diagram CCM engine control connection, T throttle valve actuator motor relay. 85 throttle valve actuator motor relay activation, light blue/green –…
  • Page 299: Starter Motor Relay

    Introduction to the engine control system If none of the tests described above identify the problem and the throttle valve actuator relay is in proper working order, contact Ducati. Component replacement methods No special measures are necessary in order to replace the throttle valve actuator motor relay.

  • Page 300: Radiator Fan Relay

    Introduction to the engine control system connection on engine, see Sect. 6 — 3“Starter motor“) — The integrity of the engine start button and its circuit — The integrity of the side stand switch, the clutch lever switch, the gear position sensor and their respective circuits — Integrity of Stop Engine switch Note Check integrity of electric circuit –…

  • Page 301
    Introduction to the engine control system Location of left hand fan connection. Connection wiring diagram CCM engine control connection, T radiator fan relay, A KEY ON power (+15 from Hands free relay 30), R battery power (+30), L left hand fan, R right hand fan, 85 light blue/black — Lb/Bk, 30 red/green – R/G, 86 red/black – R/Bk, 87 red/grey –…
  • Page 302: Engine Speed-Timing Sensor

    Engine speed-timing sensor Introduction The engine control system of the Diavel is equipped with an inductive sensor that allows the ECU to determine the speed and timing phase of the engine. The sensor faces a phonic wheel with 48 teeth minus 2.

  • Page 303
    Introduction to the engine control system Location of engine speed-timing sensor connection. Connection wiring diagram CCM engine control connection S engine speed-timing sensor, 3 shielding connected to PIN 34 of the ECU, black — Bk, 1 and 2 electrical terminals of the winding inside the sensor. In the event of fault The engine stops (if running) or will not start and the injectors and ignition coils are no longer commanded by the ECU.
  • Page 304: Accelerator Position Sensor (Throttle Grip)

    Accelerator position sensor (throttle grip) Introduction An accelerator position sensor (APS) is mounted on the throttle body of the Diavel, which measures the degree of aperture of the throttle grip. — The throttle grip is connected to the sensor via two metal cables.

  • Page 305: Throttle Valve Position Sensor

    — Open circuit: check integrity of electric circuit and electrical connections. — Incorrect electrical characteristics: check integrity of electric circuit and electrical connections. If the above measures do not resolve the fault, contact Ducati. Note Check integrity of electric circuit – short-circuit to Vdc = with dashboard on, using a voltmeter, a voltage is measured between the wire tested and ground.

  • Page 306: Component Assembling Position

    Introduction to the engine control system Introduction The throttle valve position sensor (TPS) of the Diavel is mounted on the throttle body. — The sensor is integrated into the throttle valve actuator motor, which turns the spindle of the vertical cylinder throttle valve directly.

  • Page 307: Air Temperature Sensor

    Air temperature sensor Introduction The engine control system on the Diavel uses a sensor that measures air temperature. This sensor has a resistance of NTC type (Negative Temperature Coefficient), that reduces its own value when the temperature increases. The air temperature sensor allows the engine control unit to modify the fuel-air mixture and ignition advance in relation to the atmospheric air temperature.

  • Page 308
    Engine temperature sensor Introduction The engine control system on the Diavel uses a sensor that measures the temperature of the coolant (engine temperature). This sensor has a resistance of NTC type (Negative Temperature Coefficient), that reduces its own value when the temperature increases. The engine temperature sensor, allows the control unit to manage correctly the cold starting and the heating phases.
  • Page 309
    Introduction to the engine control system The engine temperature sensor is mounted on the left hand side of the vertical cylinder. Location of engine temperature sensor connector. Wiring diagram CCM engine control connection, S engine temperature sensor. 1 green/white – G/W, 2 black/purple – Bk/V. In the event of fault In the event of an engine temperature sensor fault, the engine control unit implements a recovery value of 70°C and activates the radiator fans.
  • Page 310: Absolute Pressure Sensors

    Introduction The engine control system of the Diavel is equipped with two absolute pressure sensors, with one connected to the intake duct of each cylinder (MAP 1 cylinder 1 – horizontal — MAP 2 cylinder 2 – vertical). They are used by the control unit to determine the quantity of fuel to be injected according to the speed-density strategy and to determine the atmospheric pressure (necessary information to correct the carburation in accordance with the altimetric measurement).

  • Page 311
    Introduction to the engine control system O Absolute pressure sensor 1, horizontal cylinder. CCM engine control connection, 1 ground, black/purple — Bk/V, 2 power (5V), brown/purple – Bn/V, 3 signal generated, green/white – G/W. V Absolute pressure sensor 2 vertical cylinder. CCM engine control connection, 1 ground, black/purple — Bk/V, 2 power (5V), brown/purple –…
  • Page 312: Oxygen Sensors

    An ON-OFF type oxygen sensor (in normal operating conditions, the voltage generated by the sensors switches between a value close to 1V and a value close to 0V) is mounted on each of the exhaust manifold of the Diavel. Each oxygen sensor has its own internal heater, which receives 12V and has a ground connection controlled by the engine control unit with a PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) signal.

  • Page 313
    Introduction to the engine control system The two images show the oxygen sensor mounted on the exhaust manifold for the vertical cylinder and the sensor mounted on the exhaust manifold for the horizontal cylinder. Location of vertical and horizontal cylinder oxygen sensor connections. Connection wiring diagram O horizontal cylinder oxygen sensor, CCM engine control connection.
  • Page 314
    Introduction to the engine control system V vertical cylinder oxygen sensor, CCM engine control connection. 1 green/purple – G/V and 2 black/purple – Bk/V vertical cylinder oxygen sensor signal input into ECU, 4 PWM signal for controlling vertical cylinder oxygen sensor heater, light blue/grey –…
  • Page 315
    If none of the aforementioned tests identify the problem and the oxygen sensors are in proper working order, contact Ducati. Component replacement methods No special measures are necessary in order to replace the oxygen sensors. After replacing one or both of the oxygen…
  • Page 316: On-Board Computers And The Can Line

    10.1 — Introduction to the electrical system of the Diavel On-board computers and the CAN line The following on-board computers make up the electrical system of the Diavel and are connected with each other via the CAN line (or network):…

  • Page 317: Fault Indication

    Fault indication The DDS (Diagnosis Ducati System) indicates all active errors and all inactive but stored errors gathered by the BBS. A simplified summary of the active errors is also shown in the Master dashboard service display when the dashboard is switched on.

  • Page 318: Operating Principle Of Dtc

    DTC will not intervene until a predetermined vehicle speed is reached. To ensure that the Ducati Traction Control functions correctly, never fit tyres other than those authorised by Ducati. On the Diavel there are 8 different DTC levels (from 1 to 8): 1 — Sporty riding on a road for expert users and on track.

  • Page 319: Riding Modes

    The battery charging circuit and power distribution On the Diavel, the +15V (KEY ON power) voltage does not come from a conventional ignition key, but from PIN 30 of the Hands Free relay. This relay is switched to closed state by the Hands Free unit when the latter enables power on for the ignition and engine.

  • Page 320: Ground Connection Locations

    Introduction to the electrical system of the Diavel In the event of a battery charging circuit fault, check the following in the order given: — Check the integrity of the electrical circuit connecting the alternator to the regulator and the regulator to the battery (to carry out these tests, disconnect the battery cables and check the state of the electrical connections and cables and check for short circuits).

  • Page 321
    Introduction to the electrical system of the Diavel The figure shows the locations of the low beam bulbs (LO), high beam bulbs (HI) and the parking light LED light unit (1). Rear view of the headlight showing the high and low beam light connections and the connection for the LED power module at the centre, with the connector cable.
  • Page 322: Location Of Elements On Motorcycle

    Introduction to the electrical system of the Diavel from BBS external 12V power source As soon as you start the engine the low beam turns on automatically. In KEY-ON condition and engine off it is possible to turn on the high and low beams that will switch off after 60 seconds if the engine is not started: in Key-ON condition the headlights are off, in Key-ON and engine running the headlights turn on automatically and in Key-ON it is possible to turn them on with the LH switch.

  • Page 323
    Introduction to the electrical system of the Diavel Fuses located at the rear right of the vehicle. (1) 7.5A Black Box System (BBS); (2) Navigator; (3) 25A ABS 2; (4) 30A ABS 1; (5) 10A fans; (6) 7.5A Diagnosis/Recharge (A) Starter motor relay; (B) Main fuse (30A).
  • Page 324: High Beam Lights Not Working

    BBS and DB faults 10.2 — BBS and DB faults High beam lights not working Fault codes The HI BEAM light on the (Slave) Dashboard flashes at 1Hz frequency. Wiring diagram Location of elements on motorcycle (A) Injection relay; (B) ETV relay (throttle valve operating engine); (C) Radiator fan relay; (D) Hands Free relay. Fuses located at the rear left of the vehicle.

  • Page 325: Low Beam Lights Not Working

    BBS and DB faults (A) low / high beam and parking light connections Location of left hand handlebar switchgear set connection. PIN numbering for wiring harness side dashboard connector. Note Check integrity of electric circuit – short-circuit to Vdc = with dashboard on, using a voltmeter, a voltage is measured between the wire tested and ground.

  • Page 326
    BBS and DB faults (A) Injection relay; (B) ETV relay (throttle valve operating engine); (C) Radiator fan relay; (D) Hands Free relay. Fuses located at the rear left of the vehicle. (1) 10A dashboard; (2) 5A engine control unit; (3) 15A key-sense; (4) 20A injection relay; (5) 10A throttle opening relay (ETV).
  • Page 327: Horn Not Working

    BBS and DB faults Horn not working Fault codes DDS: Horn diagnosis -> Short circuit to ground (S.C. GND). Dashboard: the error “Claxon” (horn) is shown on the service display. The EOBD warning light activates. Wiring diagram DB Dashboard connection, S horn button. 5 blue/white – B/W, 1 red/blue – R/B, DB 19 purple/black – V/Bk. Location of connections and components Location of left hand handlebar switchgear set connection.

  • Page 328: Turn Indicators Not Working

    BBS and DB faults Location of horn with relative connection. PIN numbering for wiring harness side dashboard connector. Note Check integrity of electric circuit – short-circuit to Vdc = with dashboard on, using a voltmeter, a voltage is measured between the wire tested and ground. Check integrity of electric circuit –…

  • Page 329
    BBS and DB faults white/black W/Bk. Location of connections and components Location of rear turn indicator and number plate light connection. Location of left hand handlebar switchgear set connection. Location of front right turn indicator connection. Location of front left turn indicator connection.
  • Page 330: High Beam Flash Not Working — Start/Stop Lap Function Not Working

    BBS and DB faults PIN numbering for wiring harness side dashboard connector. PIN numbering of wiring harness side BBS unit connection. High beam flash not working — start/stop lap function not working Fault codes DDS: no fault code displayed. Dashboard: no fault code displayed. Wiring diagram DB Dashboard connection, S high beam flash button.

  • Page 331: Number Plate Light Not Working

    BBS and DB faults PIN numbering for wiring harness side dashboard connector. Number plate light not working Fault codes DDS: no fault code displayed. Dashboard: no fault code displayed. Location of connections and components Location of rear turn indicator and number plate light connection. PIN numbering for wiring harness side dashboard connector.

  • Page 332: Running Lights Not Working

    BBS and DB faults Running lights not working Fault codes DDS: no fault code displayed. Dashboard: no fault code displayed. Location of connections and components (A) low / high beam and parking light connections Rear running light and stop light connection. PIN numbering of wiring harness side BBS unit connection.

  • Page 333: Resetting Turn Indicators Not Possible — Accessing Dashboard Menu Not Possible

    BBS and DB faults Location of left hand handlebar switchgear set connection. PIN numbering for wiring harness side dashboard connector. Resetting turn indicators not possible — accessing dashboard menu not possible Fault codes DDS: no fault code displayed Dashboard: no fault code displayed Location of connections and components Location of left hand handlebar switchgear set connection.

  • Page 334: Gear Indicator Display On Dashboard Shows Dashes, Engaged Gear Not Displayed Correctly, Idle Speed Irregular With Gearbox In Neutral

    BBS and DB faults Test turn indicator reset button function. When the button is pressed, there must be continuity between its two electric terminals (PIN 3 and PIN 1). Check that there is a voltage of 5V on PIN 1 of the turn indicator reset button arriving from dashboard PIN 17. Check the integrity of the electrical circuit and connections (short-circuits to ground, short-circuits to Vdc, open circuits).

  • Page 335
    BBS and DB faults BBS BBS unit connection, S gear position sensor. BBS 15 brown/red – Br/R (5V), BBS 13 yellow/green Y/G, BBS 10 black/blue – Bk/B. Location of connections and components Location of gear sensor connection. PIN numbering of wiring harness side BBS unit connection. Checks The gear sensor is a Hall effect unit.
  • Page 336: Dashes Shown Instead Of Speed Indication Or Indicated Speed Is Incorrect

    BBS and DB faults Check integrity of electric circuit – short-circuit to ground = with the battery cables disconnected, using an ohmmeter, continuity is detected between the wire tested and ground. Check integrity of electric circuit – open circuit = with the battery cables disconnected, using an ohmmeter, no continuity is detected between the two ends of the wire tested.

  • Page 337
    For diagnosing wheel speed sensors, consult the section relative to diagnosing the ABS unit. Check the integrity of the electrical circuit and connections (short-circuits to ground, short-circuits to Vdc, open circuits). If the above test did not identify the problem, contact Ducati. Note Check integrity of electric circuit –…
  • Page 338: Abs Fault Indicator Not Working

    Using the replicated rear wheel speed signal and the circumference of the wheel itself, the BBS unit calculates the vehicle speed (2 in diagram). This parameter is used by the Ducati Traction Control (DTC) function together with the front wheel speed and the circumference of the front wheel itself, in order to implement engine torque limiting strategies when required.

  • Page 339: Wiring Diagram

    Diagnose the ABS unit. Check the integrity of the electrical circuit and connections (short circuits to ground, short circuits to Vdc, open circuits). If the above test did not identify the problem, contact Ducati. Note Check integrity of electric circuit – short-circuit to Vdc = with dashboard on, using a voltmeter, a voltage is measured between the wire tested and ground.

  • Page 340
    BBS and DB faults Rear running light and stop light connection. Front brake button mounted near lever operating brake pump. Rear brake button mounted near lever operating brake pump. The button is normally closed (when the brake lever does not press on the button because it has been pressed by enough to cause a braking effect, the contacts close, short circuiting the contacts).
  • Page 341: Exhaust By-Pass Valve Not Working Correctly

    BBS and DB faults PIN numbering of wiring harness side BBS unit connection. Exhaust By-pass valve not working correctly Fault codes DDS: EXVL diagnosis -> Position error, Potentiometer, Short circuit to ground or open circuit (S.C. GND or C.O.), Potentiometer short circuited to Vdc (Potentiometer S.C Vdc). Dashboard: the error “EXVL”…

  • Page 342
    BBS and DB faults The image shows the exhaust system. The oxygen sensor for the horizontal cylinder (1) is visible on the right, the oxygen sensor for the vertical cylinder (2) is on the left. The catalytic converter is contained within the silencer, while the By-pass valve is installed in the section of pipe connecting the silencer to the twin tailpipes.
  • Page 343: Diagnostic Instruments

    Diagnostic instruments 11 — Diagnostic instruments Using a multimeter to check the electrical systems Introduction This instrument allows you to measure resistance, voltages, and current values. Multimeters can be divided into two basic types: analogue and digital display multimeter. An analogue multimeter has a pointer display. The dial is marked with the scales to be used for measurement of the various parameters.

  • Page 344: Description Of The Diagnosis Instrument (Dds)

    Diagnostic instruments rpm/ignition-injection system timing sensor (on the camshaft drive gear) the relative internal resistance can be checked by connecting a multimeter to its terminals. This makes it possible to check the electrical continuity of the winding inside the sensor (a reading of infinite resistance indicates that the winding is interrupted). Resistance measurement can also be used to check the continuity of sections of the electrical circuit or relay type switches.

  • Page 345: Tester Power Supply

    Diagnostic instruments The touch-screen display unit (A) serves for both data display and input, using the stylus housed on the side of the unit. The self-diagnosis module (B) enables communication between the DDS diagnosis instrument (1) and the motorcycle’s on-board electronic control unit (ECU). The user interface software resides in the display memory card (C) which is housed in the Palmtop display unit (A).

  • Page 346
    Diagnostic instruments — from the mains power supply: by connecting the power supply connector (N) to the network power supply (2) part no. 97900.0224; — from the motorcycle: connecting the corresponding cables (see paragraph “Connection to the motorcycle”); — from the tester’s internal battery: the battery (Q) is housed in the top part of the tester. To operate the tester (1) using the internal battery and to recharge the battery, refer to the “User Manual”…
  • Page 347
    Diagnostic instruments — by connecting the instrument diagnosis connector (P) with the power supply and diagnosis cable (4) part no. 97900.0227S; then connect the supply and diagnosis cable outlet (R) with the battery adaptor (5) part no. 97900.0228 and the adapter to the bike battery.
  • Page 348: Dds Diagnosis Instrument

    Diagnostic instruments Note For connection of the various devices required for self-diagnostic procedures, consult the instruction handbook supplied with the tester. DDS diagnosis instrument The main functions of the DDS diagnosis instrument can be summarised as follows: — Retrieval of errors (faults) of the ignition-injection system stored in the engine control unit memory and their subsequent deletion, if required.

  • Page 349
    Diagnostic instruments Measure the horizontal timing belt on the section (18) as described in paragraph “Measuring the timing belt tension values”. Turn the crankshaft by 270° in the engine rotation direction (vertical cylinder TDC, in the combustion stroke) and repeat the procedure used for the horizontal cylinder, measuring the voltage on branch (19) of the vertical belt.
  • Page 350
    Diagnostic instruments Fix the mounting bracket of the belt tension sensor (1) using the chain guard retaining screw (22). Direct the central green LED of the sensor (1) at the midpoint of the belt section, placing sensor (1) parallel to the belt and at a distance of about 1-1.5 cm from it.
  • Page 351: Checking The Idle Speed

    Diagnostic instruments Flick the belt lightly with your finger and read the frequency value (Hz) on the DDS diagnosis instrument. Note Do not stress the belt several times repeatedly, since the necessary minimum time for the DDS diagnosis instrument to take a reading is 1 second.

  • Page 352: Check The Idle And The Co Amount With Warm Engine

    2 Switch on the DDS and check that it does not signal any error (otherwise consult the relevant paragraph of this manual to reset the error and proceed with the idle check); 3 Enter the “SELF DIAGNOSIS“ menu by selecting the DIAVEL model in the available vehicle version. Enter the “ENGINE ELECTRONICS“ system and check the default parameters.

  • Page 353
    Diagnostic instruments Insert in the pipe union fitting (2) part no. 875.1.065.1A the fitting (3) part no. 814.1.114.1A, by putting the two copper gaskets (4). Fit in the threaded hole the fitting (3) of pipe (2), by tightening it fully home. Refit on fitting (3) the pressure switch (1), with the relevant gasket and reconnect it to connector (F) of the electric system.
  • Page 354
    Diagnostic instruments Connect the pressure sensor (5) to socket (A) or (C) of the cable (7). On the DDS diagnosis instrument (1), select the “Measurement module” function by pressing the corresponding icon; then press the “Pressure Test” icon (D) followed by the “Start” icon (E).
  • Page 355
    Diagnostic instruments The socket to which the cable (Measurement Module) (7) is to be connected is indicated on the screen with a capital letter: A, B or C. Start the engine. The values may be displayed in three different ways: in one numeric form and in two graphic forms; to select the desired display type, press the “Value display”…
  • Page 356: Cylinder Compression Test

    Diagnostic instruments Important The maximum pressure must never exceed 6.0 bar. Excessively high pressure may indicate that the relief valve is stuck. Excessively low pressure, on the other hand, may be caused by the relief valve being stuck in the open position, the relief valve spring being too weak, or a faulty oil pump. Other causes are excessively worn seals and gaskets or a badly worn engine.

  • Page 357
    Diagnostic instruments Connect the HT lead to earth to prevent sparking. Screw the cylinder compression cable part no.552.1.038.1A into the spark plug compartment. Connect the pressure sensor part no. 552.1.039.1A to the cable with part no. 552.1.038.1A.. Turn on the DDS diagnosis instrument (3) referring to the paragraph “Connection to the motorcycle”.
  • Page 358
    Diagnostic instruments The socket to which the cable (Measurement Module) (4) is to be connected is indicated on the screen with a capital letter: A, B or C. Turn over the engine with the starter motor until the pressure stops rising. Check the pressure in each cylinder: — standard value: 11 to 12 bar;…
  • Page 359: Fuel Pressure Test

    Diagnostic instruments Refit the tank as indicated in section 8 — 2 “Refitting the fuel tank”. Operations Section reference Refit the tank fairings 5 — 2, Refitting the fuel tank fairings Refit the seat 5 — 3, Refitting the seat Fuel pressure test Note The on-screen icons used during this procedure are explained in a table at the end of this section.

  • Page 360
    Diagnostic instruments Use the fuel pressure pipe (4) part no. 590.1.189.1A by connecting one end (D) to the coupling of the delivery pipe to the tank and the other end (E) to the fuel system pipe (3): in this way you create a pressure pick-up socket (F). Connect the pressure sensor (5) part no.
  • Page 361
    Diagnostic instruments On the DDS diagnosis instrument (6), select the “Measurement module” function by pressing the corresponding icon; then press the “Pressure Test” icon (F) followed by the “Start” icon (G). The socket to which the cable (Measurement Module) (7) is to be connected is indicated on the screen with a capital letter: A, B or C.
  • Page 362: Guided Diagnosis

    Diagnostic instruments Refit the flange cover (1) by tightening the screws (2) to a torque of 4 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Guided diagnosis Note The on-screen icons used during this procedure are explained in a table at the end of this section. The DDS diagnosis instrument guides the operator step-by-step through the various diagnostic procedures, providing descriptions and documentation for motorcycle components, wiring diagrams for the electronic systems and information on the locations of specific components.

  • Page 363
    Diagnostic instruments Enter the general functions menu by pressing the icon “Menu 1” (A). Press the “Select vehicle” icon and, on the next screen, press the “Select motorcycle” icon; select the motorcycle model and confirm, then select the version and confirm. Press the icon “Select system”…
  • Page 364
    Diagnostic instruments Select one of the options shown in the following picture and press icon “Confirm“ (B) to confirm it. Press the “Guided diagnosis” icon (C) to access the corresponding function. A series of screens are displayed indicating the operations required for correct diagnosis. To determine whether the system has any internal problems, you can access the “Self-diagnosis”…
  • Page 365: Testing The Battery Charging System

    Diagnostic instruments The DDS diagnosis instrument will interrogate the electronic control unit and display the parameters analysed with their relative values. Operations Section reference Refit the seat 5 — 3, Refitting the seat Testing the battery charging system Note The on-screen icons used during this procedure are explained in a table at the end of this section. You can determine the engine rpm required for generator to produce just enough current to charge battery, feed the injection ignition system and all electric items fitted to motorcycle.

  • Page 366
    Diagnostic instruments Connect the clamp-type amperemeter (1) to the connector (E) of the power and diagnosis cable (Measurement Module) (3). Warning The clamp-type amperemeter must not be connected to wires through which electrical current is flowing. Insert the clamp-type amperemeter into the battery positive terminal lead with the arrow on the clamp pointing towards the battery positive terminal (+).
  • Page 367: Deactivating The «Service» Indication On The Dashboard

    Diagnostic instruments If the measured current is a positive quantity, it means that generator is feeding all electric items and charging battery at the same time. If the current has a negative sign, this means that the charging system is not able to power the electrical loads and a significant amount of the current required must be supplied by the battery, which is therefore discharging.

  • Page 368
    Diagnostic instruments Turn on the DDS diagnosis instrument (1) referring to the paragraph “Tester power supply”. Connect the power and diagnosis cable (2) part no. 97900.0222 to the diagnosis connector (A) and the latter to the diagnosis socket (3) of the motorcycle. Enter the general functions menu, pressing “Menu Key 1“…
  • Page 369
    Diagnostic instruments Select the icon “DASHBOARD“. Press the “Confirm” icon (C). Next, press the “Self-diagnosis” icon to access the corresponding function. The DDS diagnosis instrument will interrogate the electronic control unit and display the parameters analysed with their relative values. Press the “Settings”…
  • Page 370: Abs Diagnosis

    Diagnostic instruments If any problems were encountered during the operation, the tester will display the relative error messages: you need to confirm or reject each message by pressing “Confirm“ (C) or “Exit“ (D), respectively. Note Once the “service“ light has been reset with the DDS diagnosis instrument, set the ignition switch to OFF and wait for at least 30 seconds before switching it ON again.

  • Page 371
    Diagnostic instruments Symbol Description Confirm Exit Measurement module Belt tension Start/stop Menu 1 Select vehicle Select motorcycle Self-diagnosis Settings Apply Cylinder synchronisation Value display Reset Pressure test Cylinder compression Actuators Guided diagnosis…
  • Page 372
    Diagnostic instruments Select system Errors Clamp-type amperemeter…
  • Page 373
    7 — Impianto elettrico 07 — Impianto elettrico 1 — Front wheel Removal of the front wheel 6 Overhauling the front wheel 9 Refitting the front wheel 12 2 — Rear wheel Removing of the rear wheel 16 Overhauling the rear wheel 16 Refitting the rear wheel 18 3 — Front brake control Removal of the front brake master cylinder 21…
  • Page 374
    7 — Impianto elettrico Removal of the clutch master cylinder assembly 78 Refitting the clutch master cylinder assembly 79 Removal of the clutch transmission unit 81 Refitting the clutch transmission unit 82 8.3 — Handlebar unit: Hands free Removing the Hands Free 90 Refitting the Hands Free 91 9 — Gearchange mechanism Removal of the gearchange control 93…
  • Page 375
    7 — Impianto elettrico Refitting the rear footrests 173 16 — Stands Removing of the side stand 177 Refitting the side stand 180 17 — Frame inspection Disassembly of structural components and the frame 183 Removal of the tool tray 185 Removing the frame and the lateral footrests 186 Checking the frame 187 Reassembly of structural components and the frame 188…
  • Page 376: Front Wheel

    8 Screw 9 Right spacer 10 Front wheel shaft 11 Valve Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS FRONT AND REAR WHEELS Diavel Carbon FRONT AND REAR WHEELS Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 377
    Front wheel Warning Do not operate the brake lever when the callipers are removed. This can cause the brake pistons to be expelled. Loosen and remove the nut (1) on left side of the wheel shaft. Recover the washer (2). Loosen the wheel shaft screws (8) on the fork legs.
  • Page 378
    Front wheel Remove the wheel and recover the spacers (3) and (9). Working from both sides, remove the oil sealing ring (4).
  • Page 379: Overhauling The Front Wheel

    Front wheel Overhauling the front wheel Wheel bearings Before checking the dimensions, check the wear on wheel bearings. Check for wear by hand after cleaning and degreasing the bearings in their seats. Turn the inner race. Check the amount of radial and axial play. Excessive play will cause vibration and make the bike unstable. To remove the bearings (5) and the sealing rings (4) from the wheel hub follow the instructions below.

  • Page 380
    Front wheel Note Wheels must be rebalanced after repair, maintenance and overhaul operations. Inspecting the wheel axle Check the wheel shaft for straightness. Turn the pin on a reference surface and measure maximum distortion using a feeler gauge (see Sect. 3 — 1.1, Front wheel).
  • Page 381: Refitting The Front Wheel

    Front wheel Refitting the front wheel When all the necessary inspections have been completed, refit the wheel as follows. Fit the spacers (3) and (9) to the seal rings on the sides of the wheel hub. Install the complete wheel between the fork legs. Lubricate the shank and thread of the wheel axle (10).

  • Page 382
    Front wheel Tighten the nut (1) to the torque of 63 Nm ± 5% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Grease the threads and undersides of the heads of screws (A). Tighten the two retaining screws (A) of the brake callipers (B) to a torque of 2 Nm ± 10%. (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings) Operate the front brake lever two or three times.
  • Page 383
    Front wheel…
  • Page 384: Rear Wheel

    3 Spacer 4 Valve 5 Wheel 6 Circlip Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS FRONT AND REAR WHEELS Diavel Carbon FRONT AND REAR WHEELS Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 385: Overhauling The Rear Wheel

    Rear wheel Using a suitable socket wrench, loosen the wheel nut (1). Fully unscrew the nut (1), then remove the washer (2) and the spacer (3). Remove the rear wheel from the motorcycle. Overhauling the rear wheel Inspect the condition of the rear wheel. As the wheel rim has no bearings, it should be supported using the service tool code 88713.2951.

  • Page 386: Refitting The Rear Wheel

    Rear wheel Refitting the rear wheel Lubricate the wheel shaft threaded end with prescribed grease. Insert the wheel shaft by matching (A) with pins (B). Install spacer (3) with the conical surface faced to the wheel conical surface, washer (2), apply prescribed grease to nut (1) and insert it by hand (1).

  • Page 387
    Rear wheel…
  • Page 388: Front Brake Control

    Front brake control 3 -Front brake control 1 Front brake master cylinder 2 Brake lever 3 Special screw 4 Sealing washer 5 Screw 6 Phonic wheel 7 Brake disc 8 Pin 9 Left brake calliper 10 Boot 11 Bleed valve 12 Spare stand 13 Control unit — front callipers pipe 14 Microswitch…

  • Page 389: Removal Of The Front Brake Master Cylinder

    Front brake control 33 Screw 34 Pair of brake pads Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS FRONT BRAKE Diavel ABS FRONT AND REAR WHEELS Diavel Carbon FRONT BRAKE Diavel Carbon FRONT AND REAR WHEELS Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 390: Refitting The Front Brake Master Cylinder

    Front brake control For disassembly of components of the master cylinder assembly (1), refer to the exploded view at the beginning of this chapter. Refitting the front brake master cylinder Insert the front brake master cylinder unit (1) on the right side of the handlebar to bring the terminal internal edge in correspondence to the bolted joints (A).

  • Page 391: Removal Of The Front Brake System

    Front brake control Warning Brake fluid is corrosive and will damage paintwork. Avoid contact with eyes and skin. In case of accidental contact, wash the affected area with abundant running water and consult a doctor if necessary. For all the maintenance operations (wear check and replacement of brake pads and brake fluids, etc.) see Sect. 4 — 3, Maintenance operations.

  • Page 392: Removal Of The Brake Discs

    Front brake control Unscrew the two fixing screws (21) of the left front brake calliper (9) to the fork leg. Repeat the operation for the right brake calliper (18). Undo the special screws (19) and (25) and collect, from both callipers, the sealing washers (4). Detach the front brake callipers from the pipe (13) and (20).

  • Page 393: Refitting The Brake Disks

    Front brake control Important Critical safety components. The brake calliper manufacturer recommends that you do not attempt to service the internal components of the brake callipers. Incorrect overhaul of this component could endanger rider safety. Operations should be limited to renewal of the pads, fasteners and the bleed valve assembly. Refer to the exploded view at the beginning of this section for indications on renewal of the above components.

  • Page 394
    Front brake control When reconnecting the brake hose to the calliper or master cylinder, make sure to install the sealing washers (4) either side of the hose end fitting. After having oriented the pipe fitting (24) tighten the screw (3) to a torque of 23 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).
  • Page 395
    Front brake control Hold the lever pulled towards the twistgrip and tighten the calliper screws (21) to the torque of 45 Nm ± 5% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Insert brake rubber block (D) into grommet (B) and ensure it is centred. Fold hose clip (B) and fasten it by starting the screw (C) in its thread.
  • Page 396
    Front brake control For correct position of the ties fastening the ABS sensor cable (A) to front brake lines (20), please refer to Sect. 7 — 6, Flexible wiring/hoses positioning. Operations Section reference Filling of the front braking system 4 — 3, Changing the brake fluid…
  • Page 397: Rear Brake

    Rear brake 4 -Rear brake 1 Rear speed sensor (ABS) 2 Screw 3 Washer 4 Spring 5 Brake switch (rear) 6 Brake lever (rear) 7 Rear pump — control unit pipe 8 Sealing washer 9 Pin 10 Bush 11 O-ring 12 Screw 13 Screw 14 Rear brake disc…

  • Page 398: Removing Of The Rear Brake Control

    41 Pair of brake pads 42 Spare clip pins 43 Clip spring 44 Boot 45 Bleed valve 46 Dust cap Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS REAR BRAKE Diavel ABS ANTILOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) Diavel ABS REAR WHEEL AXLE Diavel Carbon…

  • Page 399: Disassembly Of The Rear Brake Control

    Rear brake Loosen the special screw (22) from the master cylinder (16); slide out the hose (7) and recover the sealing washers (23). Loosen the rear brake master cylinder (16) retaining screws (19) and remove it from the vehicle. Undo the fixing pin (9) of the brake lever (6), collecting the spring (4). Remove the brake lever (6) and collect the pin (9), the washer (3), the bush (10) and the O-ring (11).

  • Page 400: Refitting The Rear Brake Control

    Rear brake To disassemble the various parts of the system, refer to the exploded view at the beginning of this chapter. Warning After performing an operation on the rear brake control, check the brake pedal position following the instructions detailed in Sect.

  • Page 401
    Rear brake Insert the pin (9) on the brake lever (6), apply the recommended grease to the seat of the second O-ring (11) of the lever (6) and place the other O-ring (11) and the washer (3). Fit the spring (4) on the rear brake lever (6) observing the orientation shown. Apply the recommended threadlocker to the threaded side of the pin (9).
  • Page 402
    Rear brake Reconnect the hose (7), locating the sealing washers (23) on both sides of the hose end fitting, and secure it with the special screw (22). Tighten the special screw (22) to a torque of 23 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).
  • Page 403: Removal Of The Rear Brake Calliper

    Rear brake Operations Section reference Refit the RH footrest bracket 7 — 15, Refitting the rear footrests Connect the rear stop switch to the 6 — 1, Routing of wiring on frame main wiring Removal of the rear brake calliper Important The brake manufacturer advises against any servicing of the internal components of brake callipers or the master cylinder.

  • Page 404: Removal Of The Rear Brake Disc

    Rear brake — brake calliper: pads, fasteners and bleed valve assembly; — master cylinder: control pedal, bleed valve assembly, reservoir and its components. Refer to the exploded view at the beginning of this section for indications on renewal of the above components. Removal of the rear brake disc Remove the rear eccentric hub (Sec.

  • Page 405
    Rear brake Warning If incorrectly positioned, the hose can affect brake operation and foul moving parts. Position the hose as shown in the figure. Remember to fit the copper faced sealing washers (23) to the hose end fitting when reconnecting the brake pipe to the brake calliper (15).
  • Page 406: Abs System Information

    Operating principle The Ducati ABS brake system manages the front and rear brakes separately. A pulse generator (phonic wheel), with a ring of slots, is fixed onto each wheel. On the left calliper mounting bracket of the front fork and on the rear brake calliper holder plate are HALL effect sensors which detect the full sections and voids on the phonic wheel as the vehicle moves, providing and instantaneous wheel speed reading.

  • Page 407
    ABS system information Hydraulic faults in the brake system and faults not directly related to the ABS system (e.g.: worn brake pads) cannot be detected by the ABS control unit. Important The response of the system is based on the values read for the front and rear wheel speeds; take great care not to damage the phonic wheels and relative speed sensors when removing the wheels or when working in the vicinity of these components;…
  • Page 408: Abs System Deactivation

    ABS system information the updated ABS error list again. The abbreviations for all the errors displayed are given as follows: Errors Description Front ABS speed sensor signal Disconnected/short circuit to GND/short circuit to Uz of rear wheel speed sensor Plausibility of signal from front Front wheel speed sensor fault –…

  • Page 409: System Components

    15 Rubber mounting 16 Screw 17 Special screw 18 Cable grommet 19 Cable grommet 20 Screw 21 Washer 22 Vibration damper mount 23 Screw 24 Screw Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS ANTILOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) Diavel Carbon ANTILOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

  • Page 410: Replacing The Front Phonic Wheel Sensor

    System components Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram. Replacing the front phonic wheel sensor Operations Section reference Remove the front wheel 7 — 1, Removal of the front wheel Disconnect the front ABS sensor (2) connector (A) from the main electric wiring.

  • Page 411: Replacing The Rear Phonic Wheel Sensor

    System components Refit the front wheel as indicated in Sect. 7 — 1, Refitting the front wheel. Connect the connector (A) to the main wiring. Restore all the retainer clamps of the front ABS sensor cable (2): refer to table of Sect. 7 — 6, Flexible wiring/hoses positioning.

  • Page 412
    System components Remove the rear ABS sensor (5) from its seat on the rear calliper mounting bracket (E), undoing the retaining screw (1) and collect the calibrated gasket (3). Before refitting, make sure that the contact parts between the rear ABS sensor (5) and its seat are not damaged and are perfectly clean.
  • Page 413: Removing Of The Abs Control Unit

    System components Refit the rear mudguard 5 — 4, Refitting the front mudguard Refit the rear wheel 7 — 2, Refitting the rear wheel Refit the silencer 8 — 8, Refitting the exhaust system Removing of the ABS control unit Operations Section reference Remove the saddles…

  • Page 414: Refitting The Abs Control Unit

    System components Do not open the ABS control unit: if it is faulty, replace it. Note If it is necessary to replace one or more pipes, follow the instructions indicated in paragraph “Flexible wiring/hoses positioning” of this section. Refitting the ABS control unit If the brake hoses (7), (8), (9) and (10) on the ABS control unit are changed or removed, ensure that the fittings on the control unit are positioned correctly.

  • Page 415
    System components Connect the connector (A) of the ABS control unit (6). If removed, refit the front rubber pad (15) applying the recommended threadlocker to the pin (C) and the rear face of the pad. Fit the pad inserting pin (C) into the corresponding hole (D). If removed, refit the rear rubber pad (15) applying the recommended threadlocker to the cover of the exhaust valve motor until achieving engagement.
  • Page 416: Flexible Wiring/Hoses Positioning

    System components be fitted and the system filled and bleeded as a traditional system. Operations Section reference Refit the fuel tank 8 — 2, Refitting the fuel tank Reassemble the tank half covers 5 — 2, Refitting the fuel tank fairings Reassemble air conveyor covers 8 — 7,…

  • Page 417
    System components Table B…
  • Page 418
    System components…
  • Page 419
    System components…
  • Page 420
    System components…
  • Page 421
    System components…
  • Page 422
    System components Table C…
  • Page 423
    System components…
  • Page 424
    System components…
  • Page 425
    System components…
  • Page 426
    System components…
  • Page 427
    System components…
  • Page 428
    System components…
  • Page 429: Abs Components Maintenance

    ABS components maintenance 7 -ABS components maintenance Adjusting of the AIR-GAP phonic wheel sensor (For front as well as rear sensor) In each case of maintenance that foresees: — replacement or refitting of the wheel — replacement or refitting of the phonic wheel (1) or (2) — replacement or refitting of the brake discs — replacement or refitting of the speed sensor (3) or (4) — (front) replacement or refitting of the sensor holder bracket…

  • Page 430: Bleeding Of The Abs Hydraulic System

    ABS components maintenance Frame torque settings) placing washers (7) and (8) in-between and check again using the 1.3 mm feeler gauge (go gauge) and the 1.9 mm feeler gauge (no-go gauge). Phonic wheels cleaning It is important to check that both phonic wheels (21) and (20) are always clean. Otherwise: gently remove any possible dirt deposits with a cloth or metal brush.

  • Page 431
    ABS components maintenance drain in the pump the air collected near the ABS control unit Purge must be carried out by means of the corresponding joints (A) placed near the callipers and the brake pumps. Important Do not undo the fixing screws of the joints of the pipes on the ABS hydraulic control unit, unless control unit replacement is necessary.
  • Page 432: Handlebar Unit: Throttle Twistgrip

    7 Bush 8 Screw 9 Bush 10 Throttle cables Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS HANDLEBAR AND CONTROLS Diavel Carbon HANDLEBAR AND CONTROLS Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 433: Refitting The Handlebar

    Handlebar unit: Throttle twistgrip Remove the front brake lever 7 — 3, Removal of the front brake master cylinder Remove the clutch lever 7 — 8.2, Removal of the clutch master cylinder assembly Unscrew and remove the screws (3) securing the upper clamp (1). Remove the upper clamp (1).

  • Page 434: Adjusting The Throttle Cable

    Handlebar unit: Throttle twistgrip Operations Section reference Refit the front brake lever 7 — 3, Refitting the front brake master cylinder Refit the right-hand and left-hand 6 — 5, Checking the indicating handlebar switches devices Refit the throttle twistgrip 7 — 8.1, Refitting the throttle twistgrip Refit the clutch lever…

  • Page 435: Refitting The Throttle Twistgrip

    Handlebar unit: Throttle twistgrip Refitting the throttle twistgrip Lubricate the ends of the throttle grip cables (10) and the twistgrip race with the recommended grease. The closing cable (10) features a writing on the yellow tube, whereas the opening one (10) features such writing on the white tube.

  • Page 436: Handlebar Unit: Hydraulic Clutch Control

    17 Bleed valve 18 Special screw 19 Sealing washer 20 Boot 21 Plug 22 Fluid reservoir assembly 23 Inspection plug (replacement part) 24 Union 25 Oil duct union 26 Insert 27 Hose clip Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS CLUTCH CONTROL…

  • Page 437: Removal Of The Clutch Master Cylinder Assembly

    Handlebar unit: Hydraulic clutch control Diavel ABS CLUTCH Diavel Carbon CLUTCH CONTROL Diavel Carbon CLUTCH Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 438
    Handlebar unit: Hydraulic clutch control Couple terminal (6) to the clutch master cylinder control and fix them with the screws (V). Tighten the retaining screws (V) to a torque of 10 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings) following the sequence 1-2-1 starting from the upper screw.
  • Page 439: Removal Of The Clutch Transmission Unit

    Handlebar unit: Hydraulic clutch control Refit the LH mirror 5 — 1, Refitting the rear-view mirrors Fill the clutch circuit 4 — 3, Filling the clutch circuit Removal of the clutch transmission unit Warning The manufacturer of the clutch transmission unit (15) advises against servicing of its internal parts due to the safety- critical nature of this component.

  • Page 440
    Handlebar unit: Hydraulic clutch control Position the two seals (19) and tighten the screw (18) to a torque of 23 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Refit the bleed valve (17) and the dust gaiter (16). To position the pipe retaining clamps (4) refer to the table on the following page.
  • Page 441
    Handlebar unit: Hydraulic clutch control Turn the clutch pushrod (14) counter clockwise until the hole axis of the anti-rotation pin (12) is aligned with the centreline of the casing cover machined surface (D), as shown in the figure. Insert the clutch actuator (R) into the pushrod (14) and bring it fully home on the anti-rotation insert (28). Note Upon insertion of the clutch actuator (R), make sure that the tab (C) of insert (28) matches with the actuator slot (E).
  • Page 442
    Handlebar unit: Hydraulic clutch control…
  • Page 443
    Handlebar unit: Hydraulic clutch control…
  • Page 444
    Handlebar unit: Hydraulic clutch control…
  • Page 445
    Handlebar unit: Hydraulic clutch control…
  • Page 446: Handlebar Unit: Hands Free

    5 Button 6 Spring 7 Frame 8 Elastic pin Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS HANDLEBAR AND CONTROLS Diavel Carbon HANDLEBAR AND CONTROLS Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 447: Refitting The Hands Free

    Handlebar unit: Hands free Remove air conveyors 8 — 7, Removal of the air filters Disconnect the throttle cable 7 — 8.1, Removal of the throttle twistgrip Remove the airbox and the throttle 8 — 6, Removal the airbox and body throttle body Loosen the screws (2) and remove the Hands Free system (1) from the frame.

  • Page 448
    Handlebar unit: Hands free…
  • Page 449: Gearchange Mechanism

    12 Nut 13 Nut 14 Nut with left-hand thread 15 LH ball joint Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS L.H. FOOTRESTS Diavel Carbon L.H. FOOTRESTS Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 450: Disassembly Of The Gearchange Mechanism

    Gearchange mechanism seals (5). Loosen and remove the screw (7) securing the gearchange lever (8) to the gear selector shaft. Withdraw the lever (8) complete with the gearchange control assembly. Note Mark the position of lever (8) relative to the gear selector shaft. To remove the lever (8) from the gearchange assembly, remove the screw (10) and slide the lever (8) out.

  • Page 451
    Gearchange mechanism ring (5) and the washer (9). Apply the recommended threadlocker to the threaded side of the pin (4). Fit the gearchange lever (1) on the footrest bracket and tighten the pin (4) to a torque of 23 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).
  • Page 452: Fork — Steering Head: Front Fork

    Fork — Steering head: front fork 10.1 — Fork — Steering head: front fork 1 Screw 2 Screw 3 Steering head 4 Bottom yoke 5 Left fork leg assembly 6 Right fork leg assembly 7 Counter nut 8 Damper assembly 9 Bush 10 Spring 11 Preload tube…

  • Page 453: Removal Of The Front Forks

    Fork — Steering head: front fork Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS FRONT FORKS Diavel ABS HANDLEBAR AND CONTROLS Diavel Carbon FRONT FORKS Diavel Carbon HANDLEBAR AND CONTROLS Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 454
    Fork — Steering head: front fork Disassembly of the front fork Restrain the counter nut (7) with a hex wrench. Using another hex wrench, unscrew and remove the plug (14), with its seal, from the cartridge (8). Unscrew the counter nut (7) up to the final threads on the damper (8). While restraining the spring (10) with one hand, withdraw the bush (9) sideways and then slowly release spring (10).
  • Page 455
    Fork — Steering head: front fork Drain the oil from inside the leg by pumping with the outer tube (24) and the damper cartridge (8). Warning This movement generates pressure so that the oil will be rapidly expelled from the fork leg. Aim the jet of oil into a previously prepared container and avoid contact with fork oil.
  • Page 456
    Fork — Steering head: front fork Slip the dust seal (20) off the outer tube (24), prising it off with a screwdriver. Remove the circlip (22). Important Take care not to damage the fork tube — calliper unit (19) and the seat of snap ring (22) in the outer tube (24). To separate the outer tube (24) from the fork tube — calliper unit (19), pull sharply outwards repeatedly to gradually displace the bottom bush (23).
  • Page 457
    Fork — Steering head: front fork Inspection of the front fork Place the spring on a flat surface and measure the free length (L). Service limit: 270 mm. Renew the spring if the length is not within the specified limit. Inspect the outer surfaces of both fork inner tubes and the internal surfaces of both outer tubes.
  • Page 458
    Fork — Steering head: front fork Protect the end of the unit with tape. Important Before installation, smear the sliding edges of sealing ring (21) with fork oil or oil seal grease. Install the sealing ring (21) with the marked surface facing the dust seal (20). Install the following components in the fork tube — calliper unit (19): — dust seal (20);…
  • Page 459
    Fork — Steering head: front fork Insert the cartridge assembly (8) in the fork tube — calliper unit (19), screwing the tool 88713.3203 onto the cartridge. Install the gasket (13) and the compression set screw (15) and tighten to the torque (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).
  • Page 460: Refitting The Front Forks

    Fork — Steering head: front fork Screw the counter nut (7) onto the damper (8) with a wrench. Using the same wrench, restrain the counter nut and screw the top cap (14) complete with the O-ring onto the damper (8). Tighten the upper plug (14) to the specified torque (Sect.

  • Page 461
    Fork — Steering head: front fork Warning The difference in height between the two fork legs must be no greater than 0.1 mm. Position the fork legs (5) and (6) on the yoke base (4) and on the steering head (3). Lock the fork legs by tightening the screws (1) to the torque of 20 Nm ±…
  • Page 462: Fork — Steering Head: Steering

    16 Dowel 17 Nut 18 Screw 19 Special screw 20 Clip nut 21 Left-hand support 22 Front splashguard 23 Right-hand support 24 Front support Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS HANDLEBAR AND CONTROLS Diavel ABS HALF FAIRING Diavel Carbon HANDLEBAR AND CONTROLS…

  • Page 463: Adjusting The Steering Head Bearings

    Fork — steering head: Steering Diavel Carbon HALF FAIRING Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram. Adjusting the steering head bearings Note To adjust the steering bearing clearance, follow what is described in Sect.

  • Page 464: Removal Of The Steering Head Components

    Fork — steering head: Steering Turn the front forks to the right until the spacer (A) is seated against the frame top tube. Tighten the adjuster screw (16) to bring it into contact with the stop on the steering head. Apply threadlocker to the thread of nut (17).

  • Page 465
    Fork — steering head: Steering Loosen the screws (19) securing the front support (24) of the splashguard (22) to the bottom yoke (15). Loosen the screws (V) to free the cable grommets (P) from the steering head (2). Loosen the screw (3) securing the steering head (2) to the steering head nut (12). Remove the steering head (2).
  • Page 466
    Fork — steering head: Steering With the service tool no. 88713.1058 loosen the nut (12) and unscrew it from the steering shaft. Slide the seal (8), the inner ring (A) and the ball race (B) of the upper bearing (6) off the steering shaft. Remove the bottom yoke (15) complete with the steering shaft from the frame tube.
  • Page 467
    Fork — steering head: Steering Disassembly of the steering head Loosen and remove the screws (7), washers (11) and the lower U-bolts (4) and (5) from the steering head. Reassembly of the steering head If the spacers (10) were removed from the steering head, lubricate with silicone spray. Seat the spacers (10) square in the bores (D) in the steering head, orienting them as shown in the figure.
  • Page 468: Refitting The Steering Head Components

    Fork — steering head: Steering Tighten the screws (7) to a torque of 45 Nm ±5% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Refitting the steering head components Important The steering tube bearings (6) are identical but in no case may their components be swapped around during reassembly. Clean all contact surfaces and lubricate with the recommended grease.

  • Page 469
    Fork — steering head: Steering Insert the washer (13), seal (8) (with the rim facing upwards) and inner ring (L) of bottom bearing (6) onto the steering shaft after heating it for about 10 minutes to 120°C. Insert drift part no. 88713.1072 onto steering shaft. Push the inner ring (L) on the sealing ring (8), manually pushing for at least 10-15 seconds.
  • Page 470
    Fork — steering head: Steering Grease the nut (12). Tighten the steering shaft nut (12) by hand until it seats against the sealing ring (8). Fit service bush no. 88713.1058 to the steering shaft nut (12) and fit the torque wrench to the bush. Tighten the adjuster ring nut (12) to a torque of 30 Nm ±5% (Sect.
  • Page 471
    Fork — steering head: Steering For the supports (21), (23) and (24) to be installed correctly, the pins (P) must be fully out at the side opposite to insertion site. Position the front speed cable (G) and the brake hose (H) in the suitable seats provided by the front support (J) of the splashguard (22) as shown.
  • Page 472
    Fork — steering head: Steering Fix supports (21) and (23) of the splashguard (22) to the air conveyors (T) by tightening the screws (19) to a torque of 4 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Operations Section reference Refit the fork legs 7 — 10.1,…
  • Page 473: Rear Shock Absorber Assembly

    Rear shock absorber assembly 12 — Rear shock absorber assembly 1 Special screw 2 Screw 3 Nut 4 Grub screw 5 Bush (right) 6 Bush (left) 7 Screw 8 Sealing ring 9 Roller bearing 10 Linkage (left) 11 Shock absorber (rear) 12 Linkage (right) 13 Spacer 14 Special screw…

  • Page 474: Rear Suspension System

    34 Knob 35 Nut 36 Grub screw 37 Screw Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS REAR SUSPENSION Diavel Carbon REAR SUSPENSION Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 475: Overhauling The Rear Shock Absorber

    Rear shock absorber assembly Undo the special screw (1) and remove the shock absorber assembly from the vehicle. Overhauling the rear shock absorber Important Contact an authorised SACHS Service Centre in case of problems with the shock absorber. Disassembly of rear shock absorber — rocker arm — linkage assembly Undo the screw (15) and remove the rear shock absorber (11) from the rocker arm (18).

  • Page 476: Reassembly Of Rear Shock Absorber — Rocker Arm — Linkage Assembly

    Rear shock absorber assembly The rocker arm movement is obtained by needle roller bearings (9) rotating on a spacer (13); two seals (8) are placed at the outer ends and keep the lubricant inside the roller cages. Remove the inner spacer (13), the seals (8) and the needle roller bearings (9) using a suitable punch. Important Take care not to damage the bearing housings on the rocker arm while driving out the bearings.

  • Page 477
    Rear shock absorber assembly Position the linkages (10) and (12) on the rocker arm (18) by starting the screw (14). Apply grease to the threaded side of the screw (14) and to the contact face of the nut (21). Start the nut (21) on the screw (14). Tighten the nut (21) to a torque of 45 Nm ±…
  • Page 478
    Rear shock absorber assembly Apply recommended lubricant on the internal surface of the reservoir (25) support. Position support (25) on the cover (26) and rotate support until face (E) nearly contacts the fitting (D). Fix cover (26) and support (25) using ties (28), and position the ties so that the external profile of the retainers is about 20 cm away from the edge of support (25).
  • Page 479: Refitting The Rear Suspension

    Rear shock absorber assembly Refitting the rear suspension Lubricate the thread and underside of the special screw (1). Insert the lower side of the shock absorber into the swingarm and insert the screw (1). Tighten the screw (1) to a torque of 45 Nm ± 5% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).

  • Page 480: Removal Of The Shock Absorber Support

    Rear shock absorber assembly Reposition the assembly (34) on the frame and tighten the screws (22) to a torque of 10 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Operations Section reference Refit the silencer 8 — 8, Refitting the silencer Removal of the shock absorber support Remove the rear brake master cylinder (Sect.

  • Page 481: Refitting The Shock Absorber Support

    Rear shock absorber assembly Refitting the shock absorber support If you had removed them, apply recommended grease on the threads of the adjusters (4) and the ring nuts (3) having care not to have grease on the surface (C) of the adjusters. Tighten the adjusters on the ring nut side opposite to that featuring flats until bringing the surfaces as close as possible as shown.

  • Page 482
    Rear shock absorber assembly Start the adjuster (36) and tighten it manually (y is equal to about 2 threads) on the external side of the plate of the side stand assembly (G). Note During this operation, be sure to keep ring nut (3) in position, i.e. flush with the external surface of the clearance adjuster (36).
  • Page 483
    Rear shock absorber assembly Tighten the screws (L) and (H) to a torque of 7 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings), by following the sequence 1-2 -3. On the right side, extract the front centring pin (U2). Tighten the front adjuster (4) to a torque of 0.6 Nm ±…
  • Page 484
    Rear shock absorber assembly On the right side, extract the rear centring pin (U3) from the internal side and refit it on the outside, while keeping the right spacer (V1) in place. Warning Make sure that the pin hexagon fits properly into the hexagon socket of the adjuster. Locate service tool no.
  • Page 485
    Rear shock absorber assembly On the left side, tighten the screws (L) to a torque of 45 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings), by following the sequence 1-2. Then tighten the screw (H) securing the side stand plate to the shock absorber support to a torque of 45 Nm ± 10% (Sect.
  • Page 486
    Rear shock absorber assembly Apply the recommended grease to the thread and the underside of the left-side screw (7). On the left side, start the screw (7) and, on the opposite side, tighten the nut (35). Tighten screw (7) to a torque of 45 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings) while holding the nut (35).
  • Page 487: Swingarm

    Swingarm 13 — Swingarm 1 Swingarm pivot 2 Washer 3 Special screw 4 Bush 5 Sealing ring 6 Roller bearing 7 Special screw 8 Rear swingarm 9 Spacer 10 Bearing 11 Spacer 12 Spacer 13 Hose clip 14 Pin 15 Chain slider (lower) 16 Washer 17 O-ring 18 Calliper mounting bracket…

  • Page 488: Removal Of The Rear Wheel Eccentric Hub And Rear Wheel Shaft

    Swingarm 33 Screw 34 Screw 35 Plug 36 Bracket Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS REAR WHEEL AXLE Diavel ABS SWINGARM Diavel Carbon REAR WHEEL AXLE Diavel Carbon SWINGARM Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 489: Refitting The Rear Wheel Eccentric Hub And Rear Wheel Shaft

    Swingarm Withdraw the eccentric hub (22) from the chain side of the swingarm. Note The rear hub is a component particularly critical to the dynamic safety of the motorcycle; under no circumstances may the internal components of the hub be serviced or repaired. The hub may be ordered as a complete assembly, spare part No.

  • Page 490
    Swingarm If previously removed, refit the cable grommet (25) as shown in the figure and tighten the screw (26) to a torque of 1 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Before refitting apply some recommended grease to the eccentric hub (22) external surface. Insert the hub (22) fully home on the swingarm (8).
  • Page 491
    Swingarm Apply grease on rings (17) and place them in their seat of the plate (18). Fit the washer (16) on the eccentric hub (22). Place the plate (18) on the swingarm: the pin (14) must match with the blind slot (T) on the plate (18). Refit the other washer (16) on the eccentric hub (22).
  • Page 492
    Swingarm Apply an even coating of the recommended grease in the areas (A) of the axle (31). Insert the rear wheel shaft (31) in the hub (22). Ensure the stub axle (31) is seated in the hub. Fit the inner ring (21) on the wheel shaft (31). Insert the inner ring (21) in the hub.
  • Page 493: Removal Of The Swingarm

    Swingarm Operations Section reference Refit the rear brake calliper 7 — 4, Refitting the rear brake calliper Refit the rear sprocket 7 — 14, Refitting the rear sprocket Refit the rear wheel 7 — 2, Refitting the rear wheel Refit the exhaust silencers 8 — 8, Refitting the exhaust system Set the chain tension as described in Sect.

  • Page 494
    Swingarm Release the rear brake hose, the rear speed sensor cable, and the rear wiring from the swingarm, by loosening the screws (26) and retrieving the cable grommets (25). You can check the play in the swingarm bearings while the swingarm (8) still installed on the motorcycle frame. Grasp the rear of the swingarm (8) and try to move it in the four directions shown by the arrows.
  • Page 495: Inspecting The Swingarm Pivot

    Swingarm Any abnormal movement is a sign of worn bearings that could cause instability when riding. To check the free play of the support bearings, refer to Sect. 7 — 1, Wheel bearings. Once the play in the swingarm bearings has been checked, the swingarm (8) may be removed from the motorcycle. Keep the swingarm shaft (1) blocked with the screws (3) on the bike LH side and loosen at the same time the screw (3) on the opposite side: keep washer (2).

  • Page 496
    Swingarm To change the bearings, proceed as follows. Remove the shims (12) and (9) from the right-hand side of the swingarm (8) and refit the bush (4) from the left-hand side. Remove the ball bearings (10), sealing rings (5) and roller bearings (6) with a suitable punch and press. Support the swingarm and take care not to damage the bearing bores.
  • Page 497
    Swingarm Insert the new roller bearings (6) in the punch tool with code 88713.1068 and install them into the bore on the left-hand side of the swingarm, working from the outside. Drive them in until the tool is fully seated against the swingarm. Use the same tool to fit the new sealing rings (5), positioned as shown in the sectional view, so that they seat against the newly installed roller bearings.
  • Page 498
    Swingarm Refit the shims (12) and (9) from the right-hand side of the swingarm (8) and refit the bush (4) from the left-hand side. Note The spacer (9) with the larger external collar goes on the external side of the swingarm, whereas the spacer (12) with the smaller external collar goes on the inside.
  • Page 499: Refitting The Swingarm

    Swingarm Refitting the swingarm Apply the recommended threadlocker to the screws (7). Install the lower chain guard (15) on the swingarm (8), fastening it with the screws (7): tighten the screws (7) to a torque of 4 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).

  • Page 500
    Swingarm On the bike opposite side fix the swingarm shaft (1) with the screw (3) after having lubricated it with recommended grease, and fit the washer (2) between frame and swingarm. Tighten the screw (3) to the torque of 72 Nm ± 5% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).
  • Page 501
    Swingarm Refit the rear wheel eccentric hub as described in chapter “Refitting the rear wheel eccentric hub and rear wheel shaft” of this section. Operations Section reference Refitting the rear mudguard 5 — 4, Refitting the rear mudguard Reconnect the shock absorber 7 — 12, Refitting the rear suspension…
  • Page 502: Final Drive

    10 Chain cover 11 Screw 12 Nut 13 Lock washer 14 Front sprocket 15 Spacer 16 O-ring 17 Rear sprocket Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS GEARBOX Diavel ABS REAR WHEEL AXLE Diavel Carbon GEARBOX Diavel Carbon REAR WHEEL AXLE Important…

  • Page 503: Inspecting The Final Drive

    Final drive the exploded view diagram. Inspecting the final drive To check the wear of the final drive, visually check the pinion (14) and sprocket (17). If the teeth are found to worn as shown in the figure (dotted line), the sprocket must be renewed. To check the amount of wear on the chain (8), keep the chain taut and measure 16 links.

  • Page 504
    Final drive Remove the chain with the tool code 88713.1344. The tool is composed of a holder (A), punch (B), body (C) and two wrenches (D) and (E). Fit the link to be opened into the holder (A). Fit a punch (B) into the body (C) and manually unscrew the screw until the punch no longer protrudes. Fit the holder (A) and link into the body (C).
  • Page 505: Refitting The Front Sprocket

    Final drive Important The O-ring (16) must be renewed on reassembly. Refitting the front sprocket Grease the O-ring (16) and install it on the front sprocket spacer (15). Fit the spacer, from the O-ring side, on the secondary shaft and drive it fully home against the inner ring of the bearing. Check that the splines of the gearbox secondary shaft and the sprocket are in perfect condition.

  • Page 506: Replacing Of The Rear Sprocket

    Final drive Warning Carefully check the two pins: the figure shows the correct result of the procedure. Adjust the chain tension (Sect. 4 — 3, Adjusting the chain tension). Apply the recommended threadlocker to the screws (11). Fit the sprocket cover (10) tightening the screws (11) to the torque of 6 Nm± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).

  • Page 507: Refitting The Rear Sprocket

    Final drive Refitting the rear sprocket Check the cush drive bushes (6) condition and, if necessary, replace them by removing them from the flange. Refitting is the reverse of removal. Apply recommended grease on the rear sprocket flange (5) external diameter. Place the rear sprocket flange (5) on sprocket (17) by inserting it on cush drive damper pins (6).

  • Page 508: Washing The Chain

    Final drive Check for wear following the instructions given at the beginning of this section. To refit the nut (2) follow the specifications for the wheel fixing nut, in Sect. 7 — 2, Refitting the rear wheel. Position the clip (1) as shown. Operations Section reference Refit the rear wheel…

  • Page 509: Footrest Brackets

    17 Screw 18 Vibration damper mount 19 Special screw 20 Front LH footrest 21 Left footrest bracket 22 Left rear footrest Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS R.H. FOOTRESTS Diavel ABS L.H. FOOTRESTS Diavel Carbon R.H. FOOTRESTS Diavel Carbon L.H. FOOTRESTS…

  • Page 510: Removal Of The Front Footrests

    Footrest brackets Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram. Removal of the front footrests Note The removal of the front footrests is described only for the right one (2) but it is the same also for the left one. Remove the circlip (5) by releasing the pin (3).

  • Page 511: Removing The Front Footrest Brackets

    Footrest brackets If previously removed, refit the rubber footrest (1) on the footrest (2), inserting pad (E) into the seat (F) in the footrest (2) until it becomes engaged. Note To better insert the rubber footrest (1) use lubricant specific for rubber. Start the screw (19) on the bottom side of the footrest (2) and tighten to the specified torque.

  • Page 512: Reassembling The Front Footrest Brackets

    Footrest brackets (Sect. 8 — 8, Removal of the exhaust system). To remove the front LH footrest bracket (21) it is necessary to remove the gearchange lever from the bracket (Sect. 7 — Removal of the gearchange control). Loosen the screws (7) and remove the brackets (6) and (21). Reassembling the front footrest brackets To reassemble the brackets (6) and (21) carry out the removal procedure in the reverse order;…

  • Page 513
    Footrest brackets The removal of the rear footrests is described for the right side but it is the same for both. Undo the pin (13) and remove the RH rear footrest (12) from the frame. Recover washer (8) and the O-rings (9). If necessary remove the rubber footrest (11) of the footrest (12).
  • Page 514
    Footrest brackets Place O-rings (9) in the relevant seats of the footrest (12). Position footrest (12) as shown, on the rear subframe RH bracket; make sure that the previously fitted O-rings do not come out of the relevant seats on the footrest (12). Fit washer (8) between footrest (12) and the rear subframe RH bracket.
  • Page 515
    Footrest brackets If previously removed, apply recommended grease into the holes (L) and insert balls (14) and springs (15) into the relevant holes of the rear subframe RH bracket. Apply prescribed threadlocker on the screw thread (17). Fit the cap (16) and tighten the screw (17) to a torque of 10 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings)
  • Page 516: Stands

    11 Screw 12 Screw 13 Nut 14 Clearance adjuster Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS STAND Diavel Carbon STAND Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 517
    Stands Disconnect connector (A) of the stand switch (2) from the main wiring. Loosen the screws (3), (10), (11) and (12) securing the stand bracket (4) to the engine and remove the complete side stand assembly. Disassembly of the side stand Undo the fixing screw (5) and remove the side stand switch (2).
  • Page 518
    Stands Inspecting the side stand Fit the side stand leg to the bracket and check that there is no excessive clearance. Ensure that the ends of the side stand are not bent with respect to the shank. A side stand which shows signs of cracking must be renewed immediately. To check the switch (2) refer to Sec.
  • Page 519: Refitting The Side Stand

    Stands Fit the retaining screw (5) with recommended threadlocker and tighten it to a torque of 5 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Refitting the side stand Place the stand plate on the rear shock absorber support; bring adjuster (14) in line with bracket (S) and start the screw (12) in the nut behind the bracket (S).

  • Page 520
    Stands Connect connector (A) of the side stand switch to the main wiring harness. To place the stand switch wiring refer to the table (Sect. 6 — 1, Routing of wiring on frame). Operations Section reference Refit the right oil undersump 5 — 5, Reassembly of belly fairing…
  • Page 521: Frame Inspection

    Frame inspection 17 — Frame inspection 1 Frame 2 RH subframe 3 LH subframe 4 Grub screw 5 Nut 6 Special screw 7 Rubber pad 8 Nut 9 Special screw 10 Screw 11 Left-hand bracket 12 Hose clip 13 Hose clip 14 Right-hand bracket 15 Special screw 16 Cover…

  • Page 522: Disassembly Of Structural Components And The Frame

    33 Nut 34 Screw 35 Screw 36 Immobilizer antenna 37 Nut 38 Screw 39 Washer 40 Screw Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS FRAME Diavel ABS REAR SUBFRAME Diavel Carbon FRAME Diavel Carbon REAR SUBFRAME Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 523: Removal Of The Tool Tray

    Frame inspection motor/solenoid cable Remove the support of the battery 5 — 6, Removing the electrical and of the electrical components components support Remove the exhaust unit 8 — 8, Removal of the exhaust system Remove the side stand 7 — 16, Removing of the side stand Remove the footrests 7 — 15,…

  • Page 524: Removing The Frame And The Lateral Footrests

    Frame inspection Move the wiring branch from the seat (S) on the tool tray. Loosen the screws (24) to remove the tool tray unit (23) from the lateral brackets (2) and (3). Removing the frame and the lateral footrests Loosen the two special screws (6) to separate the frame (1) from the lateral brackets (2) and (3). On the left side of the vehicle block retaining pins (9) and loosen the nuts (8) on the right side at the same time.

  • Page 525: Checking The Frame

    Frame inspection Checking the frame Check the dimensions of the frame against the dimensions shown here to determine whether it needs to be realigned or renewed. Important Damaged frames must be changed, not repaired. Any work carried out on the frame can give rise to potential danger, infringing the requirements of EC directives concerning manufacturers’ liability and general product safety.

  • Page 526
    Frame inspection Apply recommended grease on the threads of the adjusters (4) and the ring nuts (5) having care not to have grease on the surface (C) of the adjusters. Tighten the adjusters on the ring nut side opposite to that featuring flats until bringing the surfaces as close as possible as shown.
  • Page 527
    Frame inspection Check for the presence of rubber blocks (G) on the tray (23). Note In case of difficulties upon reassembly of the vibration damping pads (G), it is recommended to use specific lubricant suitable for rubber. Check for the presence of the rubber pads (T) on the tray (23). The pads are correctly fitted if the protrusions (P) come out completely on the insertion opposite side.
  • Page 528
    Frame inspection Check for the presence of clips (22) and make sure they are fitted aligned with the holes in the gloves compartment (23) front side, as shown in the figure. Note The threaded holes of the clips (22) must be perfectly aligned with the holes on the gloves compartment. If removed, insert the rear handgrab (17) fully home through the opening in the gloves compartment (23) as shown.
  • Page 529
    Frame inspection Position the spacers (39) at the threaded inserts of the gloves compartment (23). If previously removed, insert pin (30) on spring (31); position the spring (31), together with the pin (30), in the specific seat of the handle (32) guide as indicated. Insert the screw (38) on knob (33), by orienting the latter as indicated.
  • Page 530
    Frame inspection Place the clips (26) on the tabs (J), fix them starting the screws (25) and tighten the screws to the torque of 2 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Position the nut (37) in the suitable seat on the compartment (23). Fit the Immobilizer antenna (36) as shown and tighten the screw (35) on nut (37) to the torque of 2 Nm ±…
  • Page 531
    Frame inspection Check the presence of the clip (E) on the left plate of the rear subframe (3). If the blackbox had been removed from the left plate of the rear subframe (3), on refitting start the silent blocks (F) on the plate (3) and tighten them until fully home.
  • Page 532: Reassembling The Frame And The Lateral Footrests

    Frame inspection Fit the blackbox cover (S) starting the screws (U) and tighten the screws (U) to the torque of 3 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Reassembling the frame and the lateral footrests Apply the recommended grease to the thread of the pins (9) and of the nuts (8). Place the frame (1) and the brackets (2) and (3) on the engine block.

  • Page 533
    Frame inspection Reassemble the tool tray (23), as described in the following paragraph, by tightening the rear screws (24) to 14 Nm ± 5% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Tighten the indicated rear nut (8) to a torque of 60 Nm ± 5% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings), by holding the pin (9) on the left side.
  • Page 534
    Frame inspection Work first on the left side and then on the right one, remove the special screws (6) and tighten to a torque of 0.5 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings) the adjusters (4) and make sure they are fully home on the rear plates of the rear subframe.
  • Page 535: Reassembly Of The Tool Tray

    Frame inspection Reassembly of the tool tray Place the tool tray unit (23) on the lateral brackets (2) and (3) by tightening the screws (24) to 14 Nm ± 5% (Sect. 3-3, Frame torque settings). If the handle guide (32) has been previously removed, position it on the tray (23) and tighten the screws (34) to 20 Nm ±…

  • Page 536
    Frame inspection Check the presence of the clip (F) on the cover (16). Fix the cover (16) by tightening the screws (15) to a torque of 4 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 -3, Frame torque settings). Apply the recommended threadlocker to the screws (40). Reposition the splashguard (20) and tighten the screws (40) to a torque of 4 Nm ±…
  • Page 537: Tail Light — Number Plate Holder

    18 Spacer 19 Screw 20 Washer 21 Splashguard (Europe — Australia) 22 Plate (Europe — Australia) 23 Reflector (Europe — Australia) Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS NUMBER PLATE HOLDER — TAIL LIGHT Diavel Carbon NUMBER PLATE HOLDER — TAIL LIGHT…

  • Page 538: Removal Of The Licence Plate Holder

    Tail light — number plate holder Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram. Removal of the licence plate holder Operations Section reference Remove the rear wheel 7 — 2,…

  • Page 539
    Tail light — number plate holder Fit the vibration dampers (15) in the corresponding holes of the number plate holder plate (8). Position the splashguard (16) on the number plate support subframe (9). Apply prescribed threadlocker on the screw threads (17). Fix the splashguard (16) by tightening the screws (17) to a torque of 5 Nm ±…
  • Page 540
    Tail light — number plate holder Fit the number plate holder plate (8) to the number plate support subframe (9), fitting the special screws (6) into the vibration dampers and starting the nuts (10) on the opposite side. Note Slide the plate (8) along the slots (G) in the subframe (9) until bringing it all the way towards the bottom side. Tighten the special screws (6) to a torque of 5 Nm ±…
  • Page 541: Removal Of The Tail Light

    Tail light — number plate holder Reposition the assembly on the swingarm and tighten the screws (11) to a torque of 25 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Removal of the tail light Operations Section reference Remove the saddles 5 — 3, Removal of the seat…

  • Page 542: Refitting The Tail Light

    Tail light — number plate holder Refitting the tail light Fit the spacers with collar (3) into the rear vibration dampers (2) located on the gloves compartment (23). Note Two spacers (3) must be inserted inside and outside on the right side and two spacers (3) must be inserted inside and outside on the left side.

  • Page 543
    Tail light — number plate holder Fit the left optical unit (13) and the right optical unit (1) on the compartment (23), inserting their pins (D) and (E) into the vibration dampers (2). Fit the split vibration dampers (H) into the corresponding holes of the compartment (23). Fit the washers (14) on the screws (4).
  • Page 544
    Tail light — number plate holder…
  • Page 545
    8 — Impianto elettrico 08 — Impianto elettrico 2 — Fuel tank Removal of the fuel tank 4 Removal of the fuel tank filler cap 6 Refitting the filler cap 7 Replacing the tank flange and fuel sensor. 8 Refitting the fuel tank flange 9 Refitting the fuel tank 9 6 — Airbox –…
  • Page 546: Fuel Tank

    13 Screw 14 Hose clip 15 Hose 16 Screw 17 Screw 18 Sealing washer 19 Screw 20 Flange 21 Sealing washer Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS FUEL TANK Diavel ABS FUEL SYSTEM Diavel Carbon FUEL TANK Diavel Carbon FUEL SYSTEM…

  • Page 547: Removal Of The Fuel Tank

    Fuel tank Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram. Removal of the fuel tank Operations Section reference Remove the seat 5 — 3, Removal of the seat Remove the tank covers…

  • Page 548: Removal Of The Fuel Tank Filler Cap

    Fuel tank On both sides of the tank plug, paying attention not to damage them, slide out the two breather pipes (8) and (15). Remove the tank (1). Removal of the fuel tank filler cap Remove tank covers (Sect. 5 — 2, Removal of the fuel tank fairings).

  • Page 549: Replacing The Tank Flange And Fuel Sensor

    Fuel tank In particular tighten the screws (17) to a torque of 3 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Replacing the tank flange and fuel sensor. Loosen the screws (19) securing the fuel tank flange (20). Remove the flange (20) from the tank (20).

  • Page 550: Refitting The Fuel Tank Flange

    Fuel tank Refitting the fuel tank flange Insert the flange (20) in its housing in the fuel tank. Apply prescribed threadlocker to the screws (9) and tighten to a torque of 6 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings), following the indicated order.

  • Page 551
    Fuel tank delivery on the filler marked with OUT and the return on the filler marked with IN. Connect connector (D) of the fuel level sensor to the main wiring. Attach the fuel hoses (12) to the hose clips (14). Refit the flange cover (A) by tightening the screws (B) to a torque of 4 Nm ±…
  • Page 552
    Fuel tank Operations Section reference Refit the fuel tank covers 5 — 2, Refitting the fuel tank fairings Refit the seat 5 — 3, Refitting the seat Positioning of the fuel tank breather and drain hoses…
  • Page 553
    Fuel tank…
  • Page 554
    Fuel tank…
  • Page 555
    Fuel tank Positioning of the fuel hoses…
  • Page 556
    Fuel tank…
  • Page 557
    Fuel tank…
  • Page 558: Airbox — Throttle Body

    14 Intake manifold 15 Sealing washer 16 Screw 17 Screw 18 Spacer 19 Bracket 20 Rubber pad 21 Clamp 22 Hose 23 Clamp 24 Union 25 Washer 26 Hose 27 Cable grommet Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS THROTTLE BODY Diavel ABS…

  • Page 559: Removal The Airbox And Throttle Body

    Airbox – Throttle Body AIR INTAKE — OIL BREATHER Diavel ABS FUEL SYSTEM Diavel Carbon THROTTLE BODY Diavel Carbon AIR INTAKE — OIL BREATHER Diavel Carbon FUEL SYSTEM Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 560
    Airbox – Throttle Body Operating on the right side of the vehicle, disconnect connector (E) from the APS sensor. Operate on the vehicle LH side, disconnect connector (F) of the TPS/ETV motor. Loosen the clamp (6) that retains the blow-by pipe to the airbox. Loosen the clamp (21) that retains the drain hose to the airbox.
  • Page 561
    Airbox – Throttle Body Loosen the clamps (6) that retain the airbox to the intake manifolds, and slide it out of its housing. Operating on both throttle grip cables (H) and (M), loosen the nuts (L) and, turning the throttle body pulley (G), slide the two throttle grip cables (H) and (M).
  • Page 562
    Airbox – Throttle Body Refitting the injectors Operate on both intake manifolds, check the presence of the O-rings (2) and (Q) on injectors (3). Apply prescribed grease on O-rings (2) and (Q) of injectors (3). Insert the injectors in the relevant seats on the intake manifolds. Important To avoid damaging the O-rings, insert the injectors fully home on the intake manifolds by keeping them in line with the relevant seat.
  • Page 563
    Airbox – Throttle Body Remove the throttle body (4) from the filter box (1) with the intake manifolds (14). Reassembly of the airbox – throttle body If removed, fit the seals (13) in the seats on the filter housing (1). Note To better insert the seals (13) use lubricant specific for rubber.
  • Page 564
    Airbox – Throttle Body If removed, refit the intake ducts (14) on throttle body (4) and apply prescribed threadlocker to the screws (5) and tighten them to a torque of 3.5 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings) following the sequence indicated in figure.
  • Page 565: Refitting The Airbox And Throttle Body

    Airbox – Throttle Body — on the opening throttle cable is a white writing; — on the closure throttle cable is a yellow writing. Insert the bolts (T) in the corresponding seats of the pulley. Keep oriented as shown in figure, fasten the cables (M) and (H) inserting the nuts (L).

  • Page 566
    Airbox – Throttle Body Check for the vibration dampers (20) on the MAP sensor supporting bracket (19). Insert the spacers with collar (18) fully home onto the vibration dampers (20). Note Two spacers with collar (18) must be fitted on the upper side of the bracket (19) and the other two spacers with collar (18) must be fitted on the lower side of bracket (19).
  • Page 567
    Airbox – Throttle Body Fit the longer hose (C1) and the shorter hose (C2) on the MAP sensors (9) and position them so as to match the marks on longer hose (C1) and shorter hose (C2) with the arrows on the MAP sensor supporting bracket (19). Fix the hoses (C1) and (C2) with the clips (11).
  • Page 568
    Airbox – Throttle Body If the drainage pipe has been removed, fit clamp (21) onto drainage pipe (26). Fit the drainage pipe (26) by inserting it fully home on fitting (U) on the filter box (1). Orient the clamp (21) as indicated. Fix the drainage pipe (26) by tightening the clamp (21).
  • Page 569
    Airbox – Throttle Body Operations Section reference Refit the control unit 7 — 6, Refitting the ABS control unit 6 — 9, Reassembly of the control unit Refit the control unit and its support 8 — 7, Refitting the air filters Refit air conveyors Refit the fuel tank 8 — 2,…
  • Page 570
    Airbox – Throttle Body Positioning of the horizontal and vertical head air sensor hoses…
  • Page 571
    Airbox – Throttle Body…
  • Page 572
    Airbox – Throttle Body…
  • Page 573: Air Intake

    8 Threaded insert 9 Spacer 10 Clamp 11 Breather hose Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS AIR INTAKE — OIL BREATHER Diavel Carbon AIR INTAKE — OIL BREATHER Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 574: Refitting The Air Filters

    Air intake Remove the fuel tank 8 — 2, Removal of the fuel tank Work on the vehicle right side, loosen screws (3) that secure the intake duct (2) to the airbox, and the radiator retaining screw (A); recover the washer (B). Remove the intake duct (2).

  • Page 575
    Air intake Pull out the filter cartridge (1) from the seat in the airbox. Position the RH air duct (2). Start the screws (1) and the screw (A) with washer (B). Tighten the screws (1) to a torque of 3.5 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3Frame torque settings) and screw (B) to a torque of 10 Nm ±…
  • Page 576
    Air intake Check that the clips (10) securing hose (11) are positioned as shown. Operations Section reference Refit the fuel tank 8 — 2, Refitting the fuel tank Refit the fuel tank covers 5 — 2, Refitting the fuel tank fairings Refit the seat 5 — 3, Refitting the seat…
  • Page 577: Exhaust System

    Exhaust system 8 -Exhaust system 1 Screw 2 Bush 3 Vibration damper mount 4 Silencer 5 Washer 6 Screw 7 Bracket 8 Nut 9 Nut 10 Upper heat guard 11 Screw 12 Washer 13 Central heat guard 14 Spacer 15 Clip nut 16 Long exhaust spring 17 Plug 18 Sealing washer, thickness 1…

  • Page 578: Removing The Silencer

    44 Screw 45 Upper heat guard 46 Rubber mounting 47 Spacer Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS EXHAUST SYSTEM Diavel Carbon EXHAUST SYSTEM Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 579: Removal Of The Exhaust System

    Exhaust system Removal of the exhaust system Remove the silencer, as described in the paragraph “Removing the silencer“ of this section. Loosen the screws (28) and remove the exhaust by-pass valve cover (27). Turn the exhaust valve pulley (A) to facilitate the throttle cable (25) output. Release the end fitting (B) of the cable (25) from the exhaust valve (D) and remove the circlip (39).

  • Page 580
    Exhaust system Loosen the screws (11) and remove the heat guard (13) from the upper exhaust pipe (19); keep the spacers (12). Undo and remove the horizontal cylinder lambda probe (20). Undo and remove the three fixing nuts (21) and remove the horizontal manifold (24) with the gasket (23).
  • Page 581: Refitting The Exhaust System

    Exhaust system Undo and remove the vertical cylinder lambda probe (20). Undo and remove the three fixing nuts (21) and remove the manifold (22) with the gasket (23). Unscrew the nuts (9) and remove the heat guard from the manifold (10). Refitting the exhaust system Refit the heat guard on the manifold (10) by tightening the nuts (9) to a torque of 10 Nm ±…

  • Page 582
    Exhaust system Position the vertical exhaust manifold (22) on the vertical cylinder head with the gasket (23). Tighten the fixing nuts (21) to a torque of 10 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). If removed, tighten the vertical lambda sensor (20) to a torque of 25 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).
  • Page 583
    Exhaust system If removed, tighten the horizontal lambda sensor (20) to a torque of 25 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Check the presence of clips (15) on the upper exhaust pipe (19). Fit the aramid washers (12) on the screws (11) using the recommended threadlocker. Insert the screws (11) in the holes of the heat guard (13).
  • Page 584
    Exhaust system Insert the upper exhaust pipe (19) into the vertical exhaust pipe (22) and block it with the spring (16). Insert the central exhaust pipe (26) in the upper exhaust pipe (19) and the horizontal flange (24), and fix them with the springs (16).
  • Page 585
    Exhaust system Fix the exhaust valve motor (34) to cover (32) starting the screws (37) with washers (36) in the vibration dampers (35) installed previously. Tighten the screws (37) to a torque of 3 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).
  • Page 586
    Exhaust system Tie the wiring (H) using a large self-locking tie wrap (N) in the area of the cover (32) shown. If previously removed, place the exhaust valve motor assembly (32) on the right plate of the rear subframe, start the screws (29) with washers (30) and tighten them to a torque of 10 Nm ±…
  • Page 587
    Exhaust system Refit the exhaust by-pass valve cover (27) by starting and tightening the screws (28) to a torque of 8 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings), starting with the front one. Refit the silencer, as described in the paragraph “Refitting the silencer“…
  • Page 588
    Exhaust system Important Assembly operations described below must be performed following sequence X — Y — Z. Fit the washers (12) on the screws (40). Insert the screws (40) in the holes of the heat guard (41). Insert the other three washers (12) and the spacers with collar (42) on the protruding ends of the screws (40). Note The spacers (42) must be oriented with the collar (J) facing the heat guard (41) as shown.
  • Page 589: Refitting The Silencer

    Exhaust system Fit the washers (12) on the screws (44) using the recommended threadlocker. Insert the screws (44) in the holes of the rear heat guard (45). Insert the other two washers (12) and the spacers with collar (47) on the protruding ends of the screws (44). Note The spacers (47) must be oriented with the collar (K) facing the heat guard (45).

  • Page 590
    Exhaust system…
  • Page 591: Evaporative Emissions Canister

    12 Hose clip 13 Evaporative emissions canister 14 Hose 15 Spring Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS CANISTER Diavel Carbon EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS CANISTER Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 592: Removal Of The Evaporative Emissions Canister

    Evaporative emissions canister The breather hose (4) is connected to the Canister filter (1); when the fuel has been filtered, it is returned through the hose (2) to the horizontal (A) and vertical (B) intake manifolds via the hoses (2A) and (2B). Drainage pipe (C) and the hose (5) vent to the ground.

  • Page 593
    Evaporative emissions canister Release the retainers (B) of the plate (8) to remove it from the canister (13). Disconnect the hose (11), removing the clamp (12). Should it be necessary to replace one or more hoses, follow the procedure outlined in the paragraph “Positioning the hoses / clamps and Canister filter”…
  • Page 594
    Evaporative emissions canister Fix the hose (11) with the clamp (12). Fit the clamp (7) on the hose (14). Mount the hose (14) on the upper fitting of the canister (13) and fix the hose (14) by means of the clamp (7). Fit the plate (8) as indicated by inserting its lateral brackets (B) (on the right and left side) completely inside the slots on the rubber cover (10).
  • Page 595: Refitting The Evaporative Emissions Canister

    Evaporative emissions canister Refitting the evaporative emissions canister To refit, carry out the removal operations in reverse order, making sure to locate the hoses as shown in the figures at the end of the chapter. Operations Section reference Refit the fuel tank covers 5 — 2, Refitting the fuel tank fairings Refit the seat…

  • Page 596
    Evaporative emissions canister…
  • Page 597
    Evaporative emissions canister…
  • Page 598
    Evaporative emissions canister…
  • Page 599
    Evaporative emissions canister…
  • Page 600
    9 — Impianto elettri-co 09 — Impianto elettrico 1 — Removal–refitting of the engine assembly Removal of the engine 6 Refitting the engine 8 2.1 — Lubrication system: oil pump Removal of the oil pump 11 Disassembly of the oil pump 12 Reassembly of the oil pump 13 Refitting the oil pump 13 2.2 — Lubrication system: oil cooler…
  • Page 601
    9 — Impianto elettri-co Removal of the intake manifold and coolant union 107 Refitting the intake manifold and coolant union 109 4.5 — Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Removal of the cylinder heads 112 Removing the valves 113 Removing the valve rocker arms 114 Overhaul of cylinder head components 117 Reassembly of the cylinder head 124…
  • Page 602
    9 — Impianto elettri-co Removal of the timing gears 232 Refitting the timing gears 234 Removal of the starter motor idler gear 236 Refitting the starter motor gear 237 9.2 — Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Separation of the crankcase halves 240 Overhaul of the crankcase halves 243 Main bearings 246 Reassembly of the crankcase halves 249…
  • Page 603: Removal-Refitting Of The Engine Assembly

    1 -Removal–refitting of the engine assembly 1 Screw 2 Special screw 3 Nut 4 Screw 5 Swingarm pivot 6 Special screw 7 Washer Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS FRAME Diavel ABS SWINGARM Diavel Carbon FRAME Diavel Carbon SWINGARM Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 604
    Removal–refitting of the engine assembly Operations Section reference Remove the saddles 5 — 3, Removal of the seat Remove air conveyor covers 8 — 7, Removal of the air filters Remove the tank half covers 5 — 2, Removal of the fuel tank fairings Remove the fuel tank 8 — 2,…
  • Page 605: Refitting The Engine

    Removal–refitting of the engine assembly Withdraw the complete engine assembly from the frame by lowering it and pushing it forwards. Refitting the engine Refitting is the reverse of removal. Important Apply recommended grease and tighten the special screws (6) to a torque of 60 Nm ± 5% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).

  • Page 606
    Removal–refitting of the engine assembly Refit the removed parts by performing the steps shown in the table and in the specific sections of the manual in reverse order. Operations Section reference Connect wiring connectors on the 6 — 1, Routing of wiring on frame engine block Refit the rear shock absorber 7 — 12,…
  • Page 607: Lubrication System: Oil Pump

    14 By-pass plug 15 Locating bush 16 By-pass spring 17 By-pass valve Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS FILTERS AND OIL PUMP Diavel Carbon FILTERS AND OIL PUMP Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 608: Disassembly Of The Oil Pump

    Lubrication system: oil pump Operations Section reference Drain the oil from the lubrication 4 — 3, Changing the engine oil and system filter cartridge Remove the clutch cover 9 — 6.2, Removal of the clutch-side crankcase cover Undo and remove the screws (9) and (10) securing the pump assembly. Remove the oil pump assembly (1) and extract the O-rings (2) and (4) from the crankcase half together with two locating bushes (15).

  • Page 609: Reassembly Of The Oil Pump

    Lubrication system: oil pump Check the condition of the above components. Remove the circlip (6) and withdraw the pump drive gear (12). Reassembly of the oil pump Check that the circlip (3) and tongue (13) are present on the pump. Fit the pump drive gear (12) on to the oil pump and secure it by installing the circlip (6) in its groove.

  • Page 610
    Lubrication system: oil pump Position the reference bushings (15) and the oil sealing O-rings (2) and (4) according to the crankcase lubrication channels. Position the oil pump on the crankcase and tighten screws (9) to a torque of 26 Nm (Min. 23 Nm — Max. 29 Nm) and the screw (10) to a torque of 10 Nm (Min.
  • Page 611
    Lubrication system: oil pump Operations Section reference Refit the clutch cover 9 — 6.2, Refitting the clutch-side crankcase cover Fill the lubrication system with oil 4 — 3, Changing the engine oil and filter cartridge…
  • Page 612: Lubrication System: Oil Cooler

    15 Exhaust protection 16 Screw 17 Washer 18 Spacer Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS OIL COOLER Diavel Carbon OIL COOLER Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in…

  • Page 613: Removal Of The Lubrication System

    Lubrication system: oil cooler Removal of the lubrication system Operations Section reference Remove the oil cooler covers 5 — 5, Removal of belly fairing Drain the oil from the lubrication 4 — 3, Changing the engine oil and system filter cartridge Disconnect the sensor (12) of the main wiring.

  • Page 614: Oil Cooler Inspection

    Lubrication system: oil cooler Loosen the nuts (G) of the pipes (7) from the nipples (5) and disconnect it from the radiator. Loosen the nipples (5) on the radiator and collect the gaskets (6). Oil cooler inspection Visually inspect the oil cooler. Renew the cooler at any sign of damage or leaks. Refitting the lubrication system Note Before fitting the pipes (7), it is recommended to check the presence of the O-rings (E).

  • Page 615
    Lubrication system: oil cooler Start the nipples (5) on the oil cooler (1) and tighten them to a torque of 23 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Lubricate the nipples threads (5) with engine oil. Attach the hoses to the nipples (5), finger-tightening the ring nuts (F) of the hoses on the nipples. Tighten the ring nuts (F) to a torque of 18 Nm ±…
  • Page 616
    Lubrication system: oil cooler Check that the vibration damper mounts are present on the oil cooler (2). Fit the oil cooler (1) by inserting it first into pins (C) and (D) of the supporting bracket. If you encounter any difficulties, apply lubricant for rubber to the pin (D). Insert the spacer (3), the screw (4) and start the screw (4).
  • Page 617
    Lubrication system: oil cooler Tighten the screw (4) to the torque of 6 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Close the pipe grommet (11). If previously removed, place the sensor (12) with washer (13) on cooler and tighten it to a torque of 19 Nm ± 10% (Sect.
  • Page 618: Cooling System: Coolant Expansion Tank

    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank 3.1 -Cooling system: coolant expansion tank 1 Plug 2 Screw 3 Fuel filler flange 4 Clip nut 5 Clamp 6 Hose clip 7 Valve/tank hose 8 Clamp 9 Screw 10 Spacer 11 Rubber mounting 12 Expansion reservoir 13 Filler cap 14 Hose clip 15 Support…

  • Page 619: Removal Of The Expansion Tank

    37 Thermostat/cylinder head sleeve (horizontal) 38 Thermostat 39 Thermostat protection ring 40 Radiator/thermost. sleeve 41 Copper gasket 42 Temperature sensor 43 Clamp Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS COOLING SYSTEM Diavel ABS EXPANSION RESERVOIR Diavel Carbon COOLING SYSTEM Diavel Carbon EXPANSION RESERVOIR…

  • Page 620: Refitting The Expansion Tank

    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank Loosen the clamp (19) to remove the hoses (7) and (20) from the tank. Loosen the screws (18) and remove the supporting plate (15). Refitting the expansion tank If the support (15) has been removed, place the hose clamps (14) on the bracket (15) orienting them as indicated. Fully press the pins (A) to block the clamps (14) until pins surfaces (B) are at the same level of the clamps (14) surfaces.

  • Page 621
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank Fit the clip (8) on the hose (7). Insert completely the hose (7) into the lower fitting (D) of the expansion reservoir (12), by orienting it so as the reference (E) of the hose matches with the arrow in relief (F) on the expansion reservoir. Note In case of difficulties during insertion of the hose (7) into the fitting (D) it is recommended to apply lubricant suitable for rubber to the fitting.
  • Page 622
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank Note The hose (20) side to be inserted in the fitting (H) features the white padprinting (N). Important Once the assembly is completed, the hose (20) must be in contact with the internal surface of the hose clamp (1) as indicated.
  • Page 623
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank Position the tank (12) with its hoses (7) and (20) and the support (15). Position the pipes inside the clamps (14) and close them. Tighten the screws (16) to the torque of 8 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).
  • Page 624
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank Position the union (3) on the frame by tightening the screw (2) to a torque of 5 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Place hose (7) on the union (3) with clip (6) and tighten the latter to a torque of 1 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings).
  • Page 625
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank Remove the saddles 5 — 3, Removal of the seat Remove air conveyor covers 8 — 7, Removal of the air filters Remove the tank half covers 5 — 2, Removal of the fuel tank fairings Remove the fuel tank 8 — 2,…
  • Page 626
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank Loosen the clip (28) to release the breather pipe (27) from the half-casing. Loosen the screws (32) and remove the fitting (33). Recover the O-ring gasket (31) located between the retainer and the vertical head. Loosen the clips (21) that secure the pump/radiator sleeve (22) and the radiator/radiator sleeve (23).
  • Page 627: Refitting The Cooling System Hoses And Unions

    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank Important Periodically check the connection hoses for leaks. Hoses that are cracked, swollen, or hardened should be renewed. Refitting the cooling system hoses and unions Position the pump/radiator sleeve (22) and the radiator/radiator sleeve (23). Fit sleeve (23) and sleeve (22) to their corresponding fittings (N) and (O), and bring them fully home on collars (P).

  • Page 628
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank Install one gasket (31) into the seat of the vertical head fitting (33). Fix the fitting (33) on the vertical head by means of the screws (32) with prescribed threadlocker, and tighten them to a torque of 6 Nm (Min.
  • Page 629
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank Place the breather pipe (27) on the half-casing fitting and tighten the clip (28). If removed, fit the coolant union (36) on the horizontal cylinder head and tighten it to a torque of 20 Nm (Min. 18 Nm — Max.
  • Page 630
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank Position the radiator/thermostat sleeve (40) with the clips (21) and the radiator/plug sleeve (24) on the radiators and tighten the clips to a torque of 2.5 ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Operations Section reference Refill the cooling system…
  • Page 631
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank…
  • Page 632
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank…
  • Page 633
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank…
  • Page 634
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank…
  • Page 635
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank…
  • Page 636
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank…
  • Page 637
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank…
  • Page 638
    Cooling system: coolant expansion tank…
  • Page 639: Cooling System: Water Radiators

    Cooling system: water radiators 3.2 -Cooling system: water radiators 1 Clip nut 2 Spacer 3 Vibration damper mount 4 Screw 5 Screw 6 Spacer 7 Vibration damper mount 8 Clip nut 9 Bush 10 Spacer 11 Rear sprocket 12 Screw 13 Water radiator (right) 14 Screw 15 Screw…

  • Page 640: Removing The Water Radiators

    Cooling system: water radiators 33 Water radiator (left) 34 Washer 35 Screw Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS RADIATOR (RIGHT) Diavel ABS RADIATOR (LEFT) Diavel ABS HALF FAIRING Diavel Carbon RADIATOR (RIGHT) Diavel Carbon RADIATOR (LEFT) Diavel Carbon HALF FAIRING Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 641
    Cooling system: water radiators Loosen the screws (30), to separate the two internal air ducts (24) and (26). Disconnect the wiring connectors of the main wiring loom (C) from both fans. Disconnect the connections of wiring (D) from the front turn indicators.
  • Page 642: Disassembling The Water Radiator Unit

    Cooling system: water radiators Loosen the screws (4) and (5) with spacer (6) securing the water radiator to the frame. Remove the RH radiator (13) from the frame. Follow the same procedure for the left radiator. Disassembling the water radiator unit The procedure is the same for both radiators.

  • Page 643
    Cooling system: water radiators Undo the screws (12) and (14) to remove the half-fairing (23) from the radiator. Radiator inspection…
  • Page 644: Renewal Of The Cooling Fan

    Cooling system: water radiators Visually inspect the oil cooler. If it shows signs of damage or leaks, the radiator must be renewed. Check also that the air flow through the radiator core is not obstructed by leaves, insects, mud, etc. Important Excessive cooling temperatures can be caused by a partial obstruction of the radiator core.

  • Page 645: Reassembling The Water Radiator Unit

    Cooling system: water radiators Tighten screws (15) and (17) to a torque of 5 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Reassembling the water radiator unit The procedure is the same for both radiators. Check the presence of clips (1) at the positions of the external coolant radiator cover (23). If removed, fit the front turn indicator (32) on the cover (23) and tighten the screws (27) to 2 Nm ±…

  • Page 646
    Cooling system: water radiators Insert the spacers with collar (2) onto the “upper” vibration dampers (3). Fix the right coolant radiator (13) by starting the screws (12). Position the right fan assembly (18) on the right coolant radiator (13), so that the holes in the assembly (18) match the protrusions (L) on the radiator (13).
  • Page 647
    Cooling system: water radiators Fit a rubber pad (U) as shown into the suitable hole in the internal cover of the right coolant radiator (24). Note For the rubber pad (U) to be installed correctly, the pin (M) must be fully out at the side opposite to insertion site. Position the internal cover (24) as shown, making sure the tabs (N) and (O) of the right coolant radiator (23) external cover become engaged in the slots (Q) and (R) of the internal cover (24).
  • Page 648
    Cooling system: water radiators Insert the small self-locking tie wrap (J) into the hole (W) in the cover (24) and use it to fix the cable (X). Start the screw with a shorter collar (35), the screws with medium collar (15) and the screw with a taller collar (21) at the positions shown.
  • Page 649: Refitting The Radiator

    Cooling system: water radiators Refitting the radiator The reassembly procedure is the same for both radiators. Check for the nuts with clips (8). Refit the RH radiator (13) on the frame and tighten the screws (4) and (5) with the spacers (6) to a torque of 10 Nm ±10% (Sect.

  • Page 650
    Cooling system: water radiators Connect the connections of wiring (D) to the front turn indicators. Reconnect the electro-fan wiring of the radiators to the main wiring (C).
  • Page 651
    Cooling system: water radiators Once both radiators have been mounted, join the two internal air ducts (24) and (26) by tightening the screws (30) to a torque of 4 Nm ± 10% (Sect. 3 — 3, Frame torque settings). Fix supports (S) of the front splashguard to the air ducts (24) and (26) by tightening the screws (P) to a torque of 4 Nm ±…
  • Page 652: Cooling System: Water Pump

    15 Sealing washer 16 Generator cover 17 Special washer 18 Fuel filler flange Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS WATER PUMP-ALTR-SIDE CRANKCASE COVER Diavel Carbon WATER PUMP-ALTR-SIDE CRANKCASE COVER Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in…

  • Page 653: Removal Of The Water Pump

    Cooling system: water pump Removal of the water pump Operations Section reference Drain the cooling system 4 — 3, Changing the coolant Remove the cooling system pipe 9 — 3.1, Removal of the cooling from the water pump cover system hoses and unions Remove the front sprocket cover 7 — 14, Removing of the front…

  • Page 654
    Cooling system: water pump Recover the ceramic washer — seal unit (8) placed on the internal side. Undo and remove the screws (1) with the washer (2). Working from the generator cover (16) internal side, use a suitable punch to press on the inner race of end bearing (5) until it can be extracted from the cover.
  • Page 655: Refitting The Water Pump

    Cooling system: water pump Refitting the water pump Clean the seat on the cover, any parts you intend to reuse, and the impeller shaft. Then refit as follows. Fit on the impeller (10) shaft the mechanical seal (9) as indicated in the figure. Apply specified lubricant to facilitate the insertion.

  • Page 656
    Cooling system: water pump settings). Turn the cover upside down. Introduce the counterface (8) completely into the generator cover. The counterface must be oriented so that the white side is faced upwards. Apply specified lubricant to facilitate the counterface insertion. Clean the counterface from exceeding lubricant.
  • Page 657
    Cooling system: water pump Fit the plug on the water pump cover (12) and tighten it to a torque of 20 Nm (Min. 18 Nm — Max. 22 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings). Clean the mating surfaces thoroughly on the pump cover and on the alternator-side crankcase cover. If previously removed, install the two centring bushes (11) completely into the generator cover.
  • Page 658
    Cooling system: water pump Fill the cooling system 4 — 3, Changing the coolant…
  • Page 659: Cylinder Head Assemblies: Checks And Adjustments

    4.1 -Cylinder head assemblies: checks and adjustments 1 Closing shim 2 Intake side camshaft 3 Opening shim 4 Exhaust side camshaft 5 Valve Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS CYLINDER HEAD: TIMING SYSTEM Diavel ABS VERTICAL CYLINDER HEAD Diavel ABS HORIZONTAL CYLINDER HEAD Diavel Carbon…

  • Page 660
    Cylinder head assemblies: checks and adjustments Remove the tank half covers 5 — 2, Removal of the fuel tank fairings Remove the fuel tank 8 — 2, Removal of the fuel tank Remove air conveyors 8 — 7, Removal of the air filters Disconnect the throttle cable 7 — 8.1, Removal of the throttle…
  • Page 661: Checking And Adjusting The Valve Clearances

    Cylinder head assemblies: checks and adjustments Note Closing rocker arm shims measuring from 2.2 to 4.5 are available as replacement parts: the size is punched on the shim. Checking valve lift Set the engine to the configuration described for the “Checking and adjusting the valve clearances”, previously indicated.

  • Page 662: Checking The Engine Timing

    Cylinder head assemblies: checks and adjustments Fasten the timing belt covers 9 — 4.2, Refitting the timing covers Reassemble the water radiators on 9 — 3.2, Refitting the radiator the frame Tighten the clamps of the hose 9 — 3.1, Refitting the cooling that connects the two radiators system hoses and unions…

  • Page 663
    Cylinder head assemblies: checks and adjustments Set the opening valve clearance to zero when the camshaft is in its rest position by fitting a feeler gauge between the upper rocker arm and the opening shim. Check that in this condition the camshaft can rotate. If it moves stiffly, use a thinner feeler gauge. In this condition, with the piston of the horizontal cylinder at TDC with the valves fully closed as confirmed by the reading on gauge (G), set the gauges (H) to zero.
  • Page 664
    Cylinder head assemblies: checks and adjustments Remove the installed tools to check timing. Then tension the belts to the value of the prescribed operation, as described at Sect. 6 — 11, Measuring the timing belt tension values. In case of values different from the described ones (Sect. 3 — 1.1, Timing system/valves), loosen the fixing screws (M) of the timing pulley and correct the value detected by turning the ring nut of the timing shaft with the supplied wrench with…
  • Page 665
    Cylinder head assemblies: checks and adjustments Fasten the timing belt covers 9 — 4.2, Refitting the timing covers Reassemble the water radiators on 9 — 3.2, Refitting the radiator the frame Tighten the clamps of the hose 9 — 3.1, Refitting the cooling that connects the two radiators system hoses and unions…
  • Page 666: Cylinder Head Assemblies: Timing System

    16 Key 17 Spacer 18 Camshaft pulley 19 Driveshaft pulley spacer 20 Spacer 21 Nut 22 Screw 23 Washer 24 Spacer flange 25 Vertical cylinder belt external cover 26 Central protection 27 Screw 28 Mesh Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS…

  • Page 667: Removal Of The Timing Belt Covers

    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system TIMING SYSTEM Diavel ABS CYLINDER HEAD: TIMING SYSTEM Diavel Carbon TIMING SYSTEM Diavel Carbon CYLINDER HEAD: TIMING SYSTEM Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 668: Removal Of The Movable Tensioner/Timing Belt

    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Undo the fixing screws (4) of the external cover (3) and remove it from the horizontal thermal unit. Removal of the movable tensioner/timing belt Loosen the nut (8) and remove the washer (7) and the tensioner pulley (9) from the pin (12) on the cylinder head. Remove the timing belt (14) from the horizontal cylinder assembly.

  • Page 669: Removal Of The Tensioner And Idler Pulley Mounting Studs

    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Loosen the nut (8), and remove the washer (7) and the fixed tensioner (13). Repeat the same procedure to remove the other pulley. Removal of the tensioner and idler pulley mounting studs Using the tool code 88713.1821, remove the tensioner pins (12) from the cylinder heads. Disassembly of the camshaft pulleys Unscrew and remove the screws (22).

  • Page 670: Removing The Timing Belt Driveshaft Pulleys

    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Removing the timing belt driveshaft pulleys Use the tool code 88713.1805 to hold the driving pulley on the engine crankcase against rotation. Important If this operation is carried out with the engine installed in the frame, hold the driveshaft pulleys against rotation using the tool code 88713.2011 mounted on the alternator cover.

  • Page 671: Refitting The Timing Belt Driveshaft Pulleys

    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Remove the inner spacer (17) and second Woodruff key (16) on the timing belt driveshaft. It is now possible to remove the circlip (10) on the driveshaft. Refitting the timing belt driveshaft pulleys To fit the circlip (10) in the driveshaft seat, use the tool code 88713.2834. Install the inner spacer (17) on the driveshaft, taking care to align the notch in the spacer with the slot for the Woodruff key.

  • Page 672
    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Fit the first Woodruff key (16) on the timing belt driveshaft. Locate the inner pulley (18). Refit the second tongue (16) and the washer (19). Locate the outer pulley (18) and the spacer (20). Apply the recommended grease to the threads on the end of the driveshaft.
  • Page 673: Refitting The Idler And Tensioner Pulley Mounting Studs

    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Fit the nut (15). Important To prevent the nuts working loose and consequent serious engine damage, always use new self-locking nuts on all the timing belt pulleys on reassembly. Lock rotation of the pulleys by means of the tool part no. 88713.1805 and, using the insert supplied with the wrench together with a torque wrench, tighten the self-locking nut to the torque of 71 Nm (Min.

  • Page 674: Refitting The Cylinder Heads Pulleys/Fixed Tensioners

    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Refitting the cylinder heads pulleys/fixed tensioners Check that the keyway on the end of the camshaft is in good condition and without burrs. Fit a Woodruff key (B) in the keyway of each camshaft.

  • Page 675
    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Fit the pulley (11) on the camshaft, inserting the Woodruff key in the in the slot (C) in the pulley. Apply the recommended grease to the threads on the end of the camshaft. Repeat the procedure on the other camshaft. Insert the tool code 88713.1806 into the pulleys to prevent rotation.
  • Page 676: Refitting The Timing Belts

    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Undo the locking screws (22) of the pulleys, turning them anti-clockwise through 90° ± 5°. Check that the pulleys have no end float and can rotate freely at all points along the full length of the slots. Refitting the timing belts Rotate the pulleys on the timing belt driveshaft until the timing mark on the outer roller is aligned with the mark on the clutch-side crankcase cover.

  • Page 677
    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Approach the tool code 88765.1623 to insert the pins (F) in the timing shaft seats (G). Position the tool code 88765.1623 with legend “UP” and the arrow facing the cylinder head cover. First place the pins (F) of the tool with part no. 88765.1623 in the intake side pulley with the wrench of tool with part no.
  • Page 678
    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Tighten manually the knobs with tool code 88765.1623 until they stop. With a torque screwdriver (H) tighten the knob nuts of the tool with part no. 88765.1623 to the torque of 2 Nm ± 10%. Fit the vertical cylinder timing belt around the camshaft pulleys and pass it behind the idler pulley.
  • Page 679
    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Check the timing belt tension and adjust if necessary as described in the paragraph Measuring the timing belt tension values (Sect. 6 — 11) of the vertical cylinder head belt. Warning Check the tension on the belt sections (D) and (E) shown in the figure. Once the required tension has been reached make sure that the nut (8) retaining the tensioner (9) is tightened to a torque of 25 Nm (Min.
  • Page 680
    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Position the tool code 88765.1623 with legend “UP” and the arrow facing the cylinder head cover. Place the pins of tool 88765.1623 in the exhaust side pulley seat (G) manually. Manually tighten the knobs with tool code 88765.1623 until they stop. With a torque screwdriver (H) tighten the knob nuts of the tool with part no.
  • Page 681
    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system torque of 25 Nm (Min. 22 Nm — Max. 28 Nm) and the screws (22) of the horizontal head are tightened to a torque of 10 Nm (Min. 9 Nm — Max. 11 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings).
  • Page 682
    Cylinder head assemblies: timing system Operations Section reference Refit the exhaust unit 8 — 8, Refitting the exhaust system Refit the water radiators 9 — 3.2, Refitting the radiator Tighten the clamps of the hose that 9 — 3.1, Refitting the cooling system connects the two radiators and the hoses and unions hose that connects the RH radiator…
  • Page 683: Cylinder Head Assemblies: Camshafts

    20 Vertical cylinder intake camshaft 21 Screw 22 Timing side support 23 Opposite side support 24 Sealing washer 25 Intake manifold 26 Screw 27 Sealing washer 28 Sealing washer Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS CYLINDER HEAD: TIMING SYSTEM Diavel ABS VERTICAL CYLINDER HEAD…

  • Page 684
    Cylinder head assemblies: camshafts Diavel ABS HORIZONTAL CYLINDER HEAD Diavel ABS THROTTLE BODY Diavel Carbon CYLINDER HEAD: TIMING SYSTEM Diavel Carbon VERTICAL CYLINDER HEAD Diavel Carbon HORIZONTAL CYLINDER HEAD Diavel Carbon THROTTLE BODY Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.
  • Page 685
    Cylinder head assemblies: camshafts Repeat the same procedure for the other cylinder head cover. Unscrew the screws (3) securing the camshaft supports. Withdraw the camshaft supports (22) and (23) straight out from the cylinder head, taking care not to damage the machined faces and locating dowels (11).
  • Page 686: Checking The Camshafts And Supports

    Cylinder head assemblies: camshafts Checking the camshafts and supports Check the cam contact surfaces for scratches, grooves, steps and waving. Worn cams are frequently the cause of poor timing, which leads to loss of engine power. Place the camshaft between two centres and check the run-out on the areas indicated using two dial gauges. Service limit: 0.1 mm.

  • Page 687
    Cylinder head assemblies: camshafts Refitting the camshafts If the stud bolts (2) were removed, apply the recommended threadlocker to the short end of the stud bolts (2), i.e. the end that is to be screwed into the cylinder head. Tighten the stud bolts (2) to a torque of 10 Nm (Min. 9 Nm — Max. 11 Nm) (Sect.
  • Page 688
    Cylinder head assemblies: camshafts Apply sealant (Three Bond 1215 liquid gasket) at the four points of the support (22) shown in red in the photo. Clean off any excess sealant. Note Only apply sealant to the timing side support (22): do not apply to support (23). Install the camshafts (14) and (15) in the cylinder head, and rotate them to distribute the lubricant evenly.
  • Page 689
    Cylinder head assemblies: camshafts Pre-tighten the screws (3) to a torque of 10 Nm (Min. 9 Nm — Max. 11 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings). Pre-tighten one support at a time, working in the sequence 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8. Then tighten the screws to a torque of 22.5 Nm (Min. 21 Nm — Max. 25 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings).
  • Page 690
    Cylinder head assemblies: camshafts When correctly installed, the sealing ring should be flush with the bevel of the cylinder head bore. Cylinder head cover Apply sealant (Three Bond 1215 liquid gasket) at the four points of the cylinder head cover shown in red in the photo. Fit the gaskets (4) and (9) on the cylinder head cover, as shown in the figure.
  • Page 691
    Cylinder head assemblies: camshafts Apply in the four areas of the cylinder heads surface a strip of about 2 mm (MAX. about 4 mm) of sealant (liquid sealant Three Bond 1215), observing the heights and position indicated in figure. Cylinder head cover identification: The vertical head rocker cover (6) has a nib (A) on the left-hand side (exhaust side), whereas rocker cover (5) has a nib (B) on the right-hand side (exhaust side).
  • Page 692
    Cylinder head assemblies: camshafts Remove excess sealant from the area of application. Repeat the same procedure for the other cylinder head. If the screw (10) has been removed, upon reassembly apply specified threadlocker, insert the seal (28) and tighten the screw (10) to a torque of 10 Nm (Min.
  • Page 693: Removal Of The Intake Manifold And Coolant Union

    Cylinder head assemblies: camshafts Removal of the intake manifold and coolant union Operations Section reference Remove the saddles 5 — 3, Removal of the seat Remove air conveyor covers 8 — 7, Removal of the air filters Remove the tank half covers 5 — 2, Removal of the fuel tank fairings…

  • Page 694: Refitting The Intake Manifold And Coolant Union

    Cylinder head assemblies: camshafts Loosen the clamp (A) and remove the hose (B). Remove the union (12) and recover the seal (24). Refitting the intake manifold and coolant union Apply prescribed threadlocker to the fitting (12), start it with seal (24) and tighten it to a torque of 2.5 Nm (Min. 2 Nm — Max.

  • Page 695
    Cylinder head assemblies: camshafts Check that the mating surfaces of the cylinder head and manifold are perfectly flat and clean and install the intake manifold (25) on the cylinder head. Lock the fixing screws (21) to the torque of 10 Nm (Min. 9 Nm — Max. 11 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings) in a cross-pattern sequence (1-2-3-4).
  • Page 696: Cylinder Head Assemblies: Valves — Rocker Arms

    19 Valve return spring (left) 20 Head 21 Cylinder head nut 22 Washer 23 Spacer 24 Valve return spring (right) 25 Valve return spring (left) Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS CRANKCASE HALVES Diavel ABS VERTICAL CYLINDER HEAD Diavel ABS HORIZONTAL CYLINDER HEAD…

  • Page 697: Removal Of The Cylinder Heads

    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Diavel Carbon CRANKCASE HALVES Diavel Carbon VERTICAL CYLINDER HEAD Diavel Carbon HORIZONTAL CYLINDER HEAD Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 698: Removing The Valves

    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Removing the valves Operations Section reference Remove the cylinder head assembly 9 — 4.5, Removal of the cylinder from the engine heads Remove the timing belt pulleys 9 — 4.2, Removing of the cylinder head pulley/fixed tensioner Ignition coils Remove the coils…

  • Page 699
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Using an M6 screw, withdraw the shafts (2) of the opening rocker arms (3) on the exhaust and intake sides. Remove the opening rocker arms (3). Using the claw of the rocker arm spring tensioning kit 88713.2069 installed between the spring and the inner wall of the cylinder head, move the straight end of the rocker arm return spring (19) and (18) and insert it in the drilled shaft.
  • Page 700
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Use the shaft to slide the end of the spring into its final position. Using an M6 screw, withdraw the shafts (1) of the closing rocker arms on the exhaust and intake sides. Remove the closing rocker arms (4) and (16), the springs (18) and (19) with the spacers (17).
  • Page 701: Overhaul Of Cylinder Head Components

    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Carry out the same operation to remove the closing rocker arms (4) and (16), the springs (24) and (25) with the spacers (23). Remove the sealing rings (8) from the ends of the valve guides. Repeat the same procedure for the other cylinder head.

  • Page 702
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Check that the cylinder barrel mating surfaces of the cylinder head are free of carbon deposits and scale. If this is not the case, spread diamond dressing compound (6 to 12 micron thickness) on a reference surface and slide the cylinder head on the surface as shown in the figure until a flat finish is obtained.
  • Page 703
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms If the valve seats are excessively damaged, fit oversize seats. Replacement seats are available with 0.03 and 0.06 mm oversized outside diameters. Important When you change the valve seats, change the valve guides as well. Proceed as follows.
  • Page 704
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms It is advisable to smooth the joint between the intake valves seats and the intake ducts (F = before; G = after). Valve guides Check internal surface of the valve guides: for cracking or distortion. Thoroughly check the dimensions of the inner surface of the valve guide.
  • Page 705
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms The assembly clearance must be: highest measured value – lowest measured value = 0.03 to 0.045 mm; the maximum permissible wear limit is 0.08 mm. Change the valve guides when the ovality exceeds permissible limit or the clearance to the valve stem is outside the tolerance range.
  • Page 706
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Check the valve stem for buckling. Place it on a “V” block and measure deformation with a dial gauge. Service limit: 0.053 mm. Check the valve stem for buckling. Place valve on a «V» block, set a dial gauge perpendicular to head and measure run- out of valve face at 45°.
  • Page 707: Reassembly Of The Cylinder Head

    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Checking the rocker arms Check for signs of wear, grooves or chrome flaking off. Check the condition of rocker arm bore and shaft. Assembly clearance: 0.025 to 0.049 mm. Wear limit: 0.08 mm. Opening and closing shims — Springs Check the condition of the contact surfaces of the valve opening and closing shims: there must be no signs of wear.

  • Page 708
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms The intake side can be identified by the presence of four threaded holes on the flange. All the photos in this chapter refer to a vertical cylinder head. Valve guide sealing rings Position the cylinder head on the appropriate support 88713.2103. Lubricate the valve guides seal rings (8) with engine oil and insert them from the spring side onto tool 88713.2442.
  • Page 709
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Locate the spacer (17) on the shaft. Locate the spring (18) on the spacer (17) as shown, fitting one end of the spring in its seat in the cylinder head. Locate the closing rocker arm (16) into its seat, making sure that the through hole is in line with the closing rocker arm shaft and drive the shaft home.
  • Page 710
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Proceed in a similar manner to install the closing rocker arm (4) with the spring (19). Load the springs (18) and (19) on the closing rocker arms (16) and (4) respectively using the tool 88713.2069. Proceed to install the closing rocker arms (4) and (16), the springs (24) and (25), the relative pins on the exhaust side in the same manner as described for the intake side.
  • Page 711
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Refitting the valves, closing shims and half rings Carefully clean the two intake valve seats (A) and the two exhaust valve seats (B). Lubricate the stems of the two intake valves (14) and of the two exhaust valves (11) with engine oil. Warning Apply engine oil to the valve stems, however only in the area shown, making sure not to smear the grooves (V).
  • Page 712
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Repeat the procedure with the opposite valve and check that the top of the valve stem is aligned with the surface of the shim (7); if it is not, repeat the half ring installation procedure. Install the closing shims on the intake valves (14) using the method described above for the exhaust valves.
  • Page 713
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Locate the opening rocker arm (3) and drive the shaft home. Install the four rocker arms (3) in the manner described above. Raise the opening rocker arm (3) and install the opening shim (5) so it seats against the valve stem. Release the rocker arm so that it rests against the shim.
  • Page 714
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms Insert the gaskets (15) on the plugs (12), orienting them (preferably) with the square edge side (T) facing the cylinder head. Apply prescribed threadlocker on the plug threads (12): apply the product on the first two plug threads, spreading it for the half circumference (about 180°).
  • Page 715: Refitting The Cylinder Head Assemblies

    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms pulleys/fixed tensioners Refit the cylinder head covers 9 — 4.4, Refitting the camshafts Refit the coils 6 — 9, Ignition coils Refit the cylinder head assembly 9 — 4.5, Refitting the cylinder head assemblies Refitting the cylinder head assemblies Warning…

  • Page 716
    Cylinder head assemblies: valves — rocker arms hose that connects the RH radiator to the union Refill the cooling system 4 — 3, Changing the coolant Refit the injectors on the intake 8- 6, Refitting the injectors manifolds and reassemble the supply system Refit the oil breather pipe, the blow 8 — 6,…
  • Page 717: Cylinder/Piston Assemblies

    9 Vertical cylinder coolant inlet hose 10 Cylinder barrel 11 Cylinder head gasket 12 Bush Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS CYLINDERS — PISTONS Diavel Carbon CYLINDERS — PISTONS Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 718
    Cylinder/piston assemblies Remove the tank half covers 5 — 2, Removal of the fuel tank fairings Remove the fuel tank 8 — 2, Removal of the fuel tank Remove air conveyors 8 — 7, Removal of the air filters Disconnect the throttle cable 7 — 8.1, Removal of the throttle twistgrip…
  • Page 719
    Cylinder/piston assemblies Note The following procedure is described with the engine removed from the frame and the cylinder head removed from the engine (Sect. 9 — 4.5, Removal of the cylinder heads). Remove the gasket (11) from the horizontal thermal unit. Remove the bushes (12).
  • Page 720
    Cylinder/piston assemblies Since insertion of piston in the barrel is a difficult operation to perform at the time of reassembly, remove the piston together with the barrel as described below. Stuff the crankcase opening with a rag or soft paper to prevent foreign material from falling in. Remove the circlip (2) from the gudgeon pin (3) on the clutch side.
  • Page 721: Overhaul Of The Cylinder Barrel/Piston Components

    Cylinder/piston assemblies Overhaul of the cylinder barrel/piston components Overhauling the cylinder Check that the walls of the cylinder bore are perfectly smooth. Measure the cylinder bore diameter at 50 mm from the top face and determine the size class to which it belongs in accordance with the values specified in Sect. 3 — 1.1Cylinder/Piston.

  • Page 722
    Cylinder/piston assemblies Checking the piston-cylinder clearance The pistons are marked with a letter (punched into the piston crown) that indicates the size class to which they belong. Always match cylinders with pistons from the same size class. The prescribed values are given in Sect. 3 — 1.1, Cylinder/Piston. Overhauling the gudgeon pins Gudgeon pins must be perfectly smooth without signs of scoring, steps, or blueing due to overheating.
  • Page 723
    Cylinder/piston assemblies Overhauling the piston rings The piston rings must not show any signs of scuffing or scoring. Replacement pistons are supplied complete with piston rings and gudgeon pin. Checking the piston ring-grooves clearance The maximum permissible wear limit is 0.15 mm for the top segment (1 st ) and 0.10 mm for the others (2nd and oil scraper ring).
  • Page 724: Refitting The Cylinder/Piston Assembly

    Cylinder/piston assemblies Checking the piston ring/cylinder clearance Insert the ring in the cylinder bore so that it is positioned 50 mm from the top face of the cylinder barrel; make sure that the ring is positioned perfectly square to the cylinder walls by checking with a gauge at several points around the ring that the top surface of the ring is exactly 50 mm from the top face of the cylinder barrel.

  • Page 725
    Cylinder/piston assemblies of the cylinder barrel/piston components” of this section). If the pistons have been separated from their cylinders, before reassembling these components, position the piston ring gaps at 120° from one another (the markings must always face the piston crown). Note For better sealing the piston ring gaps should be positioned at 180°…
  • Page 726
    Cylinder/piston assemblies pin. The gudgeon pin (3) must slide smoothly in the connecting rod small end bush and in the piston (1). Close the crankcase opening with a cloth to prevent foreign objects from falling inside and then fit the retainer ring (2) as shown in the figure.
  • Page 727
    Cylinder/piston assemblies Fit the cylinder head gasket (11) over the studs. The side marked with the part number must be facing the cylinder head. Note The shape of the gasket prevents incorrect fitting, provided that the coolant flow holes are aligned with those on the cylinder.
  • Page 728
    Cylinder/piston assemblies Operations Section reference Refit heads on the engine block 9 — 4.5, Refitting the cylinder head assemblies Refit the intake manifolds 9 — 4.4, Refitting the intake manifold and coolant union Refit the timing belt external 9 — 4.2, Refitting the timing covers covers and the timing belts Refit the cooling system pipe on…
  • Page 729: Clutch Assembly: Clutch

    11 Flat ring 12 Clutch centre 13 Spacer 14 Clutch lifter Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS CLUTCH Diavel Carbon CLUTCH Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 730
    Clutch assembly: clutch pressure plate (4) located on top of the clutch plate pack (9). Drive is transmitted from the crankshaft to the gearbox primary shaft by a gear integrated with the clutch housing/primary drive gear pair (A). Accommodated in the clutch housing is a set of drive and driven plates (9). When the clutch is operated, the driven plates push away a drum (12) which is splined onto the gearbox primary shaft.
  • Page 731
    Clutch assembly: clutch Undo the fixing screws (1) and remove the ring (2) and the springs (3) from the pressure plate (4). Slide the pressure plate (4) paying attention to the circlips (6). Remove the clutch control pin (14) and the bearing (5). Remove the clutch plates.
  • Page 732
    Clutch assembly: clutch Restrain the clutch centre (12) using service tool 88713.3408 and remove the centre nut (7). Withdraw the Belleville washer (8) and slide out the clutch drum (12). Slide the spacer (13).
  • Page 733: Checking And Overhauling The Components

    Clutch assembly: clutch Withdraw the Belleville washer (10) and flat ring (11) from the clutch centre (12). Checking and overhauling the components Clearance between the clutch drum and friction plates Insert a friction plate (E) in the clutch drum (F) and measure the clearance (S) with a feeler gauge. Clearance “S”…

  • Page 734: Reassembling The Clutch

    Clutch assembly: clutch The total thickness of the discs pack must not be less than 46.1 mm. Place the plate on a flat surface and check the amount of deformation with a feeler gauge. Max. flatness error: 0.2 mm. Overhaul of the pressure plate Check bearing (5) condition;…

  • Page 735
    Clutch assembly: clutch Fit the flat ring (11) and the Belleville washer (10) on the clutch center (12), so that the convex side faces the clutch drum. Locate the Belleville washer (8). Apply the prescribed grease to the thread of the gearbox primary shaft and the mating surface of nut (7), and fit it over Belleville washer (8).
  • Page 736
    Clutch assembly: clutch Install the clutch plates (9) in the following order: on the drum (12): — a series of ten driving discs (L) alternately to new driven discs (I) thickness 2 mm; on the pressure plate (4): — one driven disc (H), 2 mm thick; — a driving disc (L).
  • Page 737
    Clutch assembly: clutch Place the pusher plate (4) with the two discs on the centring tool part no. 88713.3352. Fit the pressure plate (4). Insert a spring (3) in each slot. Position the O-ring (2). Lubricate the thread of the screws (1) with oil. Insert the screws (1).
  • Page 738
    Clutch assembly: clutch Tighten the screws (1) to a torque of 10 Nm (Min. 9 Nm — Max. 11 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings). Operations Section reference Refit the clutch cover 9 — 6.2, Refitting the clutch-side crankcase cover Top up the engine oil 4 — 3,…
  • Page 739: Clutch Assembly: Clutch Cover

    15 Sealing washer 16 Screw 17 Plug 18 Panel Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS CLUTCH-SIDE CRANKCASE COVER Diavel Carbon CLUTCH-SIDE CRANKCASE COVER Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in…

  • Page 740: Removal Of The Clutch-Side Crankcase Cover

    Clutch assembly: clutch cover Removal of the clutch-side crankcase cover Operations Section reference Drain the engine oil 4 — 3, Changing the engine oil and filter cartridge Unscrew the screws (2), (3) and (5) securing the clutch-side crankcase cover (1). Tap around the edge of the cover with a plastic mallet to detach it from the crankcase half.

  • Page 741: Reassembly Of The Clutch-Side Crankcase Cover

    Clutch assembly: clutch cover Reassembly of the clutch-side crankcase cover Fit the plug (14) and the gasket (13). Fit the plug (17) and the gasket (15). If the bush has been replaced, fully seat the new bush (7) in the slot in the cover using a suitable drift and a press. If the sealing ring (8) needs to be renewed, fit the new seal into the crankcase cover, positioning it so the side without a spring is facing the circlip (10).

  • Page 742
    Clutch assembly: clutch cover Apply an even, regular bead of DUCATI liquid gasket (A) on the mating surface of the crankcase half and around all holes. Fit the cover assembly (1) to the crankcase half and insert the retaining screws.
  • Page 743: Clutch Assembly: Primary Drive Gears

    Clutch assembly: primary drive gears 6.3 -Clutch assembly: primary drive gears 1 Clutch drum/Primary drive gears 2 Spacer 3 Threaded ring nut 4 Lock washer Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS CLUTCH Diavel ABS CONNECTING RODS Diavel Carbon CLUTCH Diavel Carbon…

  • Page 744
    Clutch assembly: primary drive gears Withdraw the clutch housing (1) complete with driven gear of the primary pair (A). Remove the inner spacer (2). Remove the oil pump (D) (Sect. 9 — 2.1, Removal of the oil pump). Lock the primary pinion (B) with the holding tool 88713.3417 and loosen the threaded ring nut (3) using the bush part no.
  • Page 745: Refitting The Primary Drive Gears And Checking Backlash

    Clutch assembly: primary drive gears Remove the complete primary drive gear (B) using a commercial puller and placing a brass or aluminium pad between the end of the crankshaft and the puller screw. Remove the spacer (C). Refitting the primary drive gears and checking backlash Fully degrease the crankshaft splined end and the corresponding spline on the primary drive gear.

  • Page 746
    Clutch assembly: primary drive gears Temporarily secure the gear with the washer (4) and nut (3). Important If fitting a new primary driving gear (B), check the backlash. To check the clearance, temporarily fit the clutch bell (1) complete with the primary driven gear (A) on the gearbox primary shaft.
  • Page 747
    Clutch assembly: primary drive gears Refit the oil pump (D) and check the clearance between the oil pump gear and primary drive gear on the crankshaft (Sect. 9 — 2.1, Refitting the oil pump). Thoroughly degrease the mating surfaces of the clutch bell (1). Fit the spacer (2) onto the primary shaft.
  • Page 748: Gearbox Assembly: Gearchange Mechanism

    16 Shaft with gearchange lever arm 17 Gearchange lever arm return spring 18 Screw 19 Spacer 20 Screw 21 Gearchange mechanism 22 Locating ring 23 Stop plate 24 Shim washer Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS GEARCHANGE CONTROL Diavel Carbon GEARCHANGE CONTROL…

  • Page 749: Removal Of The Gear Selector Lever

    Gearbox assembly: gearchange mechanism Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram. Removal of the gear selector lever Operations Section reference Drain the engine oil 4 — 3, Changing the engine oil and…

  • Page 750: Disassembly Of Gear Interlock Plunger And Pawl Assembly

    Gearbox assembly: gearchange mechanism Tighten the nut (13) to a torque of 10 Nm (Min. 9 Nm — Max. 11 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings). Disassembly of gear interlock plunger and pawl assembly Operations Section reference Drain the engine oil 4 — 3, Changing the engine oil and filter cartridge…

  • Page 751: Refitting The Gear Interlock Plunger And Pawl Assembly

    Gearbox assembly: gearchange mechanism Unscrew the clutch-side crankcase half screw (3) and remove the pawl (4), washer (2) and spring (1). Refitting the gear interlock plunger and pawl assembly On the special screw (3), fit the gear pawl lever (4), orienting it as shown in the figure, the washer (2) with the square edge side (D) facing the clutch-side crankcase half, and the spring (1), positioning it so that the hook end (A) is facing the gear pawl lever.

  • Page 752
    Gearbox assembly: gearchange mechanism Grease and then fit the ball (8), spring (7), and seal (6) to the gear interlock plunger (5). Lock the plunger (5) to a torque of 30 Nm (Min. 27 Nm — Max. 33 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings).
  • Page 753: Refitting The Gear Selector Lever

    Gearbox assembly: gearchange mechanism Refitting the gear selector lever Position the gearbox drum selector fork in the centre of the gear rollers. Position the gear selector lever (21) together with control shaft, spring and plate into the chain-side crankcase half. Insert the screws (18) and (20) with the spacer (19).

  • Page 754
    Gearbox assembly: gearchange mechanism must be screws of class 12.9 in order to respect the tightening torque indicated above (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings). Start tightening the first screw (18), and continue with screw (20). Remove service tool no. Check that the pin (H) placed on the gear drum is axially to the notch (L) on the gear claw (with gear in neutral).
  • Page 755
    Gearbox assembly: gearchange mechanism assembly. and alternator side alternator assembly crankcase cover Refit the water pump-LH water 9 — 3.1, Refitting the cooling system radiator hose hoses and unions Refit the pump-cylinder hoses 9 — 5, Refitting the cylinder/piston assembly Refill the cooling system 4 — 3, Changing the coolant…
  • Page 756: Gearbox Assembly: Gearbox Shafts

    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts 7.2 -Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts 1 Shim, thickness 1 2 Gearbox primary shaft 3 Shim, thickness 0.5 4 Needle roller bearing 5 5 th speed driving gear 6 Splined washer, thickness 0.5 7 Circlip 8 3 rd — 4 th speed driving gear 9 6 th speed driving gear 10 2 nd speed driving gear 11 Shim, thickness 1.8…

  • Page 757: Removal Of The Gearbox Assembly

    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts 29 5 th , 6 th speed selector fork 30 Selector fork shaft 31 Shim, thickness 1 32 Needle roller retaining circlip (square cross-section) Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS GEARCHANGE CONTROL Diavel ABS GEARBOX Diavel Carbon GEARCHANGE CONTROL…

  • Page 758
    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Once removed, it is possible to replace the special rollers (13). Remove gear selector forks (29) and (28). Remove the gearbox primary (2) and secondary (25) shafts complete with gears, taking care to recover the spacers on the ends of the shafts.
  • Page 759: Disassembly Of The Gearbox Shafts

    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Disassembly of the gearbox shafts Place the shaft in a vice in such a way as to facilitate the disassembly operations. Important Take care not to invert the positions of the shims on reassembly: this would potentially lead to jamming when using the gear selector control, making it necessary to reopen the engine crankcase.

  • Page 760
    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Remove the fifth speed driven gear (20). Use two flat blade screwdrivers to remove the circlip (7) taking care not to damage the shaft surface. Remove the circlip (7) and the splined washer (6).
  • Page 761
    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Withdraw the fourth speed driven gear (21) with the roller cage (4) and splined washer (12). Remove the third speed driven gear (22) with the roller cage (4) and the splined washer (6).
  • Page 762
    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Remove the circlip (7) and remove the sixth speed driven gear (23). Remove the circlip (7) and withdraw the splined washer (6) and the second speed driven gear (24).
  • Page 763
    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Withdraw the roller cage (4) and the shim (3). All the components have thus been removed from gearbox secondary shaft (25). Disassembly of the gearbox primary shaft Remove the chain-side shim washer (11) and the clutch-side shim washer (1) from the primary shaft. Remove the second speed driving gear (10).
  • Page 764
    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Remove the sixth speed driving gear (9) with its roller cage (4). Remove the splined washer (6) and the circlip (7). Withdraw the third and fourth speed driving gear (8).
  • Page 765
    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Remove the circlip (7) and the splined washer (6). Remove the fifth speed driving gear (5) with the roller cage (4).
  • Page 766: Overhaul Of The Gearbox

    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Slide the shim (3) off the primary shaft (2). Overhaul of the gearbox Check the condition of the front coupling dogs of the gears. They must be in perfect condition and with no sign of wear on the edges of the teeth.

  • Page 767: Inspection Of The Gear Selector Drum

    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Inspection of the gear selector drum Use a gauge to measure the clearance between fork pin and the slot on the selector drum. If the service limit is exceeded, determine which part must be replaced by comparing these dimensions with those of new components (Sect.

  • Page 768: Reassembly Of The Gearbox Shafts

    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Reassembly of the gearbox shafts Figure 1 shows all the parts to be reassembled on the gearbox primary shaft (2), with the calculated end shims (1) and (11) (Sec. 9 — 9.2, Reassembly of the crankcase halves).

  • Page 769
    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Reassemble the gears on the gearbox shafts by reversing the disassembly procedure. Take particular care when installing the idler gears. The assembly of the 3 rd and 4 th speed gears and the relative fixing components on the secondary shaft is given as an example. Fit the circlip (7), checking that it is fully inserted into its groove on the shaft.
  • Page 770
    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Fit on the gear the three-pointed washer (12), which can be distinguished from its counterpart (6) by its bigger outside diameter. Fit another needle roller cage (4) using the method already described. Fit the 4 th speed gear (21).
  • Page 771: Reassembly Of The Gearbox

    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Fit another safety washer (6) and another circlip (7) into the shaft. Push it inside its seat using the previously used pad. Reassembly of the gearbox To refit the gearbox components follow the procedure under Sect. 9 — 9.2, Reassembly of the crankcase halves, relating to reassembly of the engine crankcase.

  • Page 772
    Gearbox assembly: gearbox shafts Operations Section reference Reassemble the engine crankcase 9 — 9.2, Reassembly of the crankcase halves halves Refit the primary gear 9 — 6.3, Refitting the primary drive gears and checking backlash Refit the clutch cover 9 — 6.2, Refitting the clutch-side crankcase cover Refit the clutch cover, drum and…
  • Page 773: Flywheel — Alternator

    19 Inner ring 20 Needle roller bearing 21 Electric starter driven gear 22 Starter clutch 23 Circlip 24 Alternator rotor 25 Screw 26 Screw 27 Bearing Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS WATER PUMP-ALTR-SIDE CRANKCASE COVER Diavel ABS ELECTRIC STARTING AND IGNITION…

  • Page 774: Removal Of The Generator Cover

    Flywheel — alternator Diavel ABS CONNECTING RODS Diavel Carbon WATER PUMP-ALTR-SIDE CRANKCASE COVER Diavel Carbon ELECTRIC STARTING AND IGNITION Diavel Carbon CONNECTING RODS Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 775: Disassembly Of The Generator Cover

    Flywheel — alternator Turn the tool shaft slowly to separate the cover (13) from the LH crankcase half. There is a seal (4) on the cover (13) in correspondence with the gearchange lever shaft that may be damaged when removing the generator cover. Always check the condition of this sealing ring and renew it if damaged.

  • Page 776: Removing The Flywheel — Generator Assembly

    Flywheel — alternator Remove the water pump components as described in Sect. 9 — 3.3, Removal of the water pump. Removing the flywheel — generator assembly Use the tool 88713.3367 fixed to the M10 side stand fixing holes (D). Secure the tool to the flywheel with the screws (E). Unscrew the alternator-flywheel retaining nut (15).

  • Page 777: Overhaul Of The Flywheel-Alternator Assembly

    Flywheel — alternator Important Check the race (19), the needle roller bearing (20) and the inner washer (18) for wear. Renew if worn. Overhaul of the flywheel-alternator assembly Examine the inner part of alternator rotor (24) for signs of damage. Check that the starter clutch is working properly and that the needle races do not show signs of wear or damage of any kind.

  • Page 778
    Flywheel — alternator Reassembling the flywheel — generator assembly Install the starter clutch (22) in the flange (14) to bring the edge (A) of the clutch up against the flange. Important Assemble the components (starter clutch and flange) so that the edge (A) of the starter clutch is positioned on side of the flange with the bevelled edge (B).
  • Page 779
    Flywheel — alternator Note The locating hole (D) of the flywheel can be either one of the two holes (F). Note Use suitable tools to align the locating holes. Important Assemble the components (flange and flywheel) so that edge (A) of the starter clutch (22) is enclosed between the flange and flywheel.
  • Page 780
    Flywheel — alternator Install the rotor (24) on the flywheel (17), aligning one of the flywheel locating holes (D) with the rotor locating hole (G). Note The rotor locating hole (G) is the hole positioned on the same diameter as the fixing holes (H). Note Use suitable tools to align the locating holes.
  • Page 781
    Flywheel — alternator Lubricate the surface (L) of the driven gear (21) with engine oil. Install the driven gear on the starter clutch, ensuring it is properly seated. Note To facilitate installation, rotate the driven gear in the direction of the green arrow. Hold the flywheel (17) with one hand and check that the driven gear can rotate freely in the direction of the green arrow but not in the direction of the red arrow.
  • Page 782: Refitting The Flywheel-Alternator Assembly

    Flywheel — alternator Refitting the flywheel-alternator assembly Fit the roller cage unit (20) with washer (18) and internal ring (19), applying prescribed grease on the washer (18). Install the roller cage assembly (20) with the washer (18) and inner race (19). Install the flywheel assembly (V) with the gear (21), aligning the notches as shown in the photo.

  • Page 783: Refitting The Alternator-Side Crankcase Cover

    Flywheel — alternator Apply the recommended threadlocker to the thread on the end of the crankshaft and the nut (15). Start the nut (15) on the crankshaft. Lock the flywheel rotation by means of tool number 88713.3367 and tighten the nut (15) to a torque of 330 Nm (Min. 313 Nm — Max.

  • Page 784
    Remove any scale and grease from the mating surfaces of the left-hand crankcase half and the generator cover. Fit the two locating bushes (11). Spread a continuous uniform bead of DUCATI liquid gasket on the cover mating surface, ensuring continuity around the holes for the retaining screws and bushes.
  • Page 785
    Flywheel — alternator Tap the cover at different positions with a rubber mallet to facilitate its location on the shafts and locating bushes. Note Should it be necessary to remove the cover again, fit the puller 88713.1749 located in the threaded holes in correspondence with the crankshaft.
  • Page 786: Section

    Flywheel — alternator Nm (Min. 13 Nm — Max. 17 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings). Make sure that the O-ring (5) is installed in the cover (6). Apply threadlocker to the screws (7). Tighten the two screws (7) that retain cover (6) with the engine crankcase to the torque of 5 Nm (Min. 4.5 Nm — Max. 5.5 Nm) (Sect.

  • Page 787: Crankcase Assembly: External Components

    Crankcase assembly: external components 9.1 -Crankcase assembly: external components 1 Oil breather valve 2 O-ring 3 Sealing washer 4 Gear position sensor 5 Cylinder barrel/head stud 6 Nipple 7 By-pass spring 8 Plug 9 Plug 10 Aluminium gasket 11 Nut 12 Lock washer 13 Timing gear pair 14 Key…

  • Page 788: Removing Outer Components

    33 Spacer 34 Reed 35 Lower shield 36 Special screw 37 Washer 38 Spring 39 Cap 40 Ball Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS GEARCHANGE CONTROL Diavel ABS TIMING SYSTEM Diavel ABS CRANKCASE HALVES Diavel ABS CRANKCASE HALVES Diavel ABS ELECTRIC STARTING AND IGNITION…

  • Page 789
    Crankcase assembly: external components Unscrew and remove the oil filter support nipple (6) and remove also by-pass spring (7). Remove the mesh filter (A) from the clutch crankcase half (Sect. 4 — 3, Changing the engine oil and filter cartridge). Remove the drain plug (10) with its seal (9).
  • Page 790
    Crankcase assembly: external components Remove gear position sensor (4) by means of the tool number 88713.3407. Remove the cylinder head studs (5) with the aid of the appropriate tool.
  • Page 791: Refitting The External Components

    Crankcase assembly: external components To remove the engine sensor (23), unscrew the screw (25) and recover the washer (26). Check the condition of O-rings (22) and renew them if necessary. Loosen the clutch fluid flow rate adjusting valve (36) and remove the washer (37), the spring (38), the cap (39) and the ball (40).

  • Page 792
    Crankcase assembly: external components Make sure that the O-rings (22) are fitted on the crankcase. Fit the engine pickup (23) in its seat in the crankcase half. Start the screw (25) with washer (26), and tighten it to a torque of 10 Nm (Min. 9 Nm — Max. 11 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings).
  • Page 793
    Crankcase assembly: external components between 0.6 and 0.8 mm. Check the condition of O-rings (2) and renew if necessary. Install the oil vapour breather valve (1) in the crankcase along with O-rings (2), previously lubricated. Tighten the screw (17) to a torque of 10 Nm (Min. 9 Nm — Max. 11 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings).
  • Page 794
    Crankcase assembly: external components Refit idle gear position sensor (4) by means of the tool number 88713.3407. Refit the mesh filter (A) (Sec. 4 — 3, Changing the engine oil and filter cartridge). Check the condition of O-rings (16) of the stud bolts (5) and replace them if necessary. Fit, using the tool (C), the O-rings (16) in the corresponding seats (D) of the stud bolts (5).
  • Page 795
    Crankcase assembly: external components Fit the stud bolts (5) on crankcase half, by applying sealant on the thread and tightening them to a torque of 30 Nm (Min. 28 Nm — Max. 32 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings).
  • Page 796: Removal Of The Timing Gears

    Crankcase assembly: external components Operations Section reference Refit the mesh filter 4 — 3, Changing the engine oil and filter cartridge Refit the primary gear 9 — 6.3, Refitting the primary drive gears and checking backlash Refit the oil pump 9 — 2.1, Refitting the oil pump Refit the complete clutch…

  • Page 797: Refitting The Timing Gears

    Crankcase assembly: external components Relieve the staking on the lock washer (12) of the nut (11). Restrain the driven timing gear by inserting a pin in one of the holes, and unscrew the nut (11). Remove the nut (11), washer (12), driven timing gear (B) and Woodruff key (15) from the timing belt driveshaft shaft. Refitting the timing gears Before reassembling the removed parts, check timing gears (13) for wear.

  • Page 798
    Crankcase assembly: external components Important On completion of the refitting operations, check that tab washer (12) is staked against nut (11) in such a way as to prevent the nut from working loose. Operations Section reference Refit the flywheel/alternator 9 — 8, Refitting the flywheel- assembly.
  • Page 799: Removal Of The Starter Motor Idler Gear

    Crankcase assembly: external components Refill the cooling system 4 — 3, Changing the coolant Refit the gearchange control 7 — 9, Refitting the gearchange mechanism Refit the clutch control piston 7 — 8.2, Refitting the clutch transmission unit Refit the sprocket cover 7 -14, Refitting the front sprocket Refill the system with engine oil…

  • Page 800
    Crankcase assembly: external components Position the washer (20) and the gear (19) in the pin (21) and take the pin into contact with the crankcase half. Operations Section reference Refit the flywheel/alternator 9 — 8, Refitting the flywheel- assembly. and alternator side alternator assembly crankcase cover Refit the water pump-LH water…
  • Page 801: Crankcase Assembly: Crankcase Halves

    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves 9.2 -Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves 1 Bearing 2 Bearing holder bushing 3 Alternator-side crankcase half 4 Bearing 5 Circlip 6 Washer 7 Bearing 8 Sealing ring 9 Bearing 10 Retaining plate 11 Screw 12 Screw 13 Clutch-side crankcase half 14 Sealing ring 15 Bearing 16 Circlip…

  • Page 802: Separation Of The Crankcase Halves

    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves 33 Hose 34 Screw 35 Grub screw 36 Screw 37 Sealing washer Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS TIMING SYSTEM Diavel ABS CRANKCASE HALVES Diavel ABS CRANKCASE HALVES Diavel Carbon TIMING SYSTEM Diavel Carbon CRANKCASE HALVES Diavel Carbon…

  • Page 803
    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Unscrew the two screws (12) on the clutch side near the vertical cylinder. Reuse the alternator cover or a service cover with puller 88713.1749 fitted. Secure cover to crankcase half with some of the original screws and begin separation by turning the central pin of the tool.
  • Page 804: Overhaul Of The Crankcase Halves

    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Tap the end of the gearbox secondary shaft with a plastic mallet to separate the crankcase halves. Note Take care not to lose the shims on the shafts and on the selector drum. Remove gearbox shafts and gearbox selector drum from the crankcase halves (Sect. 9 — 7.2, Removal of the gearbox assembly.

  • Page 805
    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Check that the bearings (1) and (18), and the bushings (2) and (17) are in optimum conditions. Note that the main bearings must always be changed in pairs (refer to the procedure below in “Main bearings”). Note When overhauling an engine it is good practice to renew all the crankcase half bearings.
  • Page 806
    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Renew the bearings (7) and (23) on the ends of the gearbox shafts and timing belt driveshaft bearings (4) and (15). Take care not to lose the shim (6) interposed between the bearing (7) on the end of the gearbox primary shaft and the chain side crankcase half.
  • Page 807: Main Bearings

    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Check that the oilways are free of restrictions or clogging. Check the condition of locating bushes (22). If apparently distorted or loose in their seats, change them using proper tools. When the locating bushes (22) are hard to remove from casing, use a left-hand tap to force bushes out.

  • Page 808
    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves why these bearings are generally fitted back to back in pairs. Note The main bearings supplied can be bearings with bushing (A) or flanged bearings (B) with the bushing integrated in the external ring of the bearing. To renew the bearings proceed as follows: — heat the crankcase in an oven to 100 °C;…
  • Page 809: Reassembly Of The Crankcase Halves

    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves After having removed the bushing, check that the interference fit between the crankcase and the bushing, with bearing fitted, is no less than 0.03 mm, otherwise, replace the crankcase halves. Note Fit the bearings (1) and (18) orienting them so that the side with the “letter” (C) is facing the bushings (2) and (17). Flanged bearings Important On badly worn engines, bearing outer rings may have developed clearance in the crankcase halves — normally, bearing…

  • Page 810
    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves The roller bearing (15) with retaining circlip (16) installed in correspondence with the end of the timing belt driveshaft. Insert the circlip (5) in the crankcase half installing it in its seat on the bearing (4). Refitting the alternator-side crankcase half The following parts must be present on the internal side of the crankcase half: the double race ball bearing (9) supporting the selector fork shaft.
  • Page 811
    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves the crankcase half: apply grease to the bearing rollers. Fit the inner race (A) removed previously from the bearing. Apply grease to the inner race. The main bearing (1) with the corresponding bushing (2) (if present). The bearing (4) with the retaining circlip (5) installed in correspondence with the timing belt driveshaft.
  • Page 812: Shimming The Shafts

    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Shimming the shafts Before assembling the crankcase halves, calculate the shims required to obtain the correct end float of the crankshaft and gearbox shafts. To determine the correct shim thickness proceed as follows. Shimming the crankshaft After having installed the new main bearings (with bushing (A) or flanged bearings (B)) proceed as follows to determine the total “SA”…

  • Page 813
    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Add 0.30 mm preload for crankshaft axial bearings to bed in correctly into their seats (inner rings seated inside outer ring). Thus, we obtain: SA=LA1+LA2+0.30-LA. To calculate the thickness of each shim note that: SA=SA1+SA2 where “SA1” and “SA2” represent the shims for the clutch-side crankcase half 1 and the alternator-side crankcase half 2. Considering the alignment of the shaft, this gives: SA1=LA1+0.15-LA/2;…
  • Page 814: Reassembly Of The Crankcase Halves

    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Place a dial gauge (C) with magnetic base on a support plate fixed to crankcase. Bring the stylus into contact with the end of the crankshaft and set the dial gauge to zero in this position. Place a lever (D) between crankcase and crank web of the crankshaft pushing towards dial gauge.

  • Page 815
    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves the torque of 8 Nm (Min. 7 Nm — Max. 9 Nm) (Sect. 3 — 3, Engine torque settings). If removed, apply threadlocker on the dowel thread (35), tighten it to a torque of 20 Nm (Min. 18 Nm — Max. 22 Nm) (Sect.
  • Page 816
    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Note When refitting used components, before installing the gearbox assembly in the crankcase half, make sure that the inner races (C) of the gearbox shaft bearings are fitted into the correct bearings and have not been left on the shafts. Match gearbox shafts, fit the shims and fit them to the clutch-side crankcase half.
  • Page 817
    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Note The two selector forks are identical. Insert the fork of 5 th — 6 th speed (E) in the primary shaft driven gear and the pin (G) in the fork (E): the fork must be fitted with the number indicating the gear facing the crankcase half.
  • Page 818
    Grease the O-ring (31) to hold it in position and install it. Apply a uniform and continuous bead of DUCATI liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of the crankcase halves, going around all the holes as shown in the figure.
  • Page 819
    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Bring the crankcase halves (3) and (13) together, tapping with a rubber mallet in the area of the shafts if necessary. Apply the recommended grease to the screws and insert them in the crankcase halves (note that the screws are different lengths).
  • Page 820
    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Check that the crankshaft can be turned with a certain amount of interference with the main bearings (the crankshaft should have a pre-load of 0.20 to 0.30 mm); check also that all the parts you have fitted are free to rotate or move correctly.
  • Page 821
    Crankcase assembly: crankcase halves Operations Section reference Refit the mesh filter 4 — 3, Changing the engine oil and filter cartridge Refit the primary gear 9 — 6.3, Refitting the primary drive gears and checking backlash Refit the oil pump 9 — 2.1, Refitting the oil pump Refit the complete clutch…
  • Page 822: Crankcase Assembly: Crankshaft/Connecting Rods Assembly

    5 Bushes 6 Crankshaft 7 Grub screw 8 Shim washer Spare parts catalogue Diavel ABS CONNECTING RODS Diavel Carbon CONNECTING RODS Important Bold reference numbers in this section identify parts not shown in the figures alongside the text, but which can be found in the exploded view diagram.

  • Page 823: Disassembly Of The Crankshaft/Connecting Rods Assembly

    Crankcase assembly: crankshaft/connecting rods assembly unit heads Remove the cylinder barrel/piston 9 — 5, Removal of the assemblies cylinder/piston assembly Remove the alternator-side 9 — 8, Removal of the generator crankcase cover and the alternator cover assembly Remove the starter motor 6 — 3, Starter motor Remove the clutch cover…

  • Page 824
    Crankcase assembly: crankshaft/connecting rods assembly The connecting rod is supplied in two size classes A and B relative to the big end diameter (Sect. 3 — 1.1, Crankshaft) as punch marked on the side of the cap. It is preferable to use crankshafts and connecting rods of the same size class. Renewal of the small end bushing To remove the worn bushing, use a suitable punch and a press.
  • Page 825
    Crankcase assembly: crankshaft/connecting rods assembly Crankshaft class Connecting rod class Bearings colour BLUE/YELLOW YELLOW/YELLOW BLUE/BLUE BLUE/YELLOW Crankshaft The main bearing and big-end journals should not be scored or grooved; the threads, keyways, and slots must be in good condition. Check for fretting or burrs in the fillet between journal and shoulder. Fillet radius: 2 mm.
  • Page 826
    Crankcase assembly: crankshaft/connecting rods assembly Loosen all crankshaft plugs (4) and (7); heating the crankshaft, if necessary, to remove the threadlocker applied at the time of assembly. Clean all the oilways using suitable diameter metal brushes and then blow with compressed air to remove any residues that have accumulated and are restricting the oil flow.
  • Page 827: Reassembly Of The Connecting Rods

    Crankcase assembly: crankshaft/connecting rods assembly Reassembly of the connecting rods Before starting, check that the crankshaft main bearing journals and big-end journals are free of burrs or evident signs of machining: if necessary, clean the surfaces with very fine emery cloth and oil. Check that the grooves are in perfect condition with no signs of forcing.

  • Page 828
    Crankcase assembly: crankshaft/connecting rods assembly Join the connecting rod cap (F) with the corresponding connecting rod small end (G), checking that the progressive number stamped on the two pieces is the same, as shown in the figure. Important Check that the progressive numbers of a connecting rod are next to the selection of the other connecting rod. Fill the recommended grease into the two ends of the hole to lubricate threads and underside of the new screws (1) and the thread of the shaft.
  • Page 829
    Crankcase assembly: crankshaft/connecting rods assembly Warning The grease utilised is an irritant in contact with the skin. Wear protective gloves. Important Lubrication of big-end cap screws is essential to obtain the correct coupling and to prevent breakage of the parts. The big-end cap screws may only be used for one tightening.
  • Page 830: Refitting The Crankshaft/Connecting Rod Assembly

    Crankcase assembly: crankshaft/connecting rods assembly Tighten the screws (1) with a torque wrench and angle reading (degree wheel) in accordance with the procedure described below (observe the same tightening sequence at each step as that of the previous step): 1 first torque each screw to a value of 20 Nm; 2 now carry out a second tightening stage applying a torque of 35 Nm on each screw;…

  • Page 831
    Crankcase assembly: crankshaft/connecting rods assembly Operations Section reference Crankcase halves closure 9 — 9.2, Reassembly of the crankcase halves Refit the mesh filter 4 — 3, Changing the engine oil and filter cartridge Refit the primary gear 9 — 6.3, Removal of the primary drive gear Refit the oil pump…

Ducati Diavel Carbon Owner's Manual

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ducati Manuals
  4. Motorcycle
  5. Diavel Carbon
  6. Owner’s manual

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

loading

Related Manuals for Ducati Diavel Carbon

Summary of Contents for Ducati Diavel Carbon

  • Page 2
    Although the manual includes fully updated information at the time of print, Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. therefore reserves the right to make changes without prior notification or without incurring obligations. For this reason, you may note discrepancies when comparing some illustrations with your motorcycle.
  • Page 3
    Owner’s manual US/CANADA…
  • Page 4
    We’d like to welcome you among Ducati enthusiasts and congratulate you on your excellent choice of motorcycle. We imagine you’ll be riding your Ducati motorcycle for long trips as well as short daily excursions. Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. wishes you smooth and enjoyable riding.
  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents California emission control warranty statement Your warranty rights and obligations Manufacturer’s warranty coverage Owner’s warranty responsibilities California evaporation emission system Ducati limited warranty on emission control system Introduction Instrument Panel (Dashboard) Safety guidelines Dashboard on handlebar Warning symbols used in the manual…

  • Page 6
    Indicator «CONS.» — Instantaneous fuel «Setting» menu consumption Riding Mode» customization Indicator «SPEED AVG» — Average speed DTC (Ducati Traction Control) setting Indicator «TRIP TIME» — Trip time function Indicator «AIR» — Air temperature ENGINE setting function (Engine Power Engaged gear indicator Control) «Riding Mode set»…
  • Page 7
    Keys Side stand Replacing the battery in the active key Passenger grabhandle Duplicate keys Adjusting the front fork Immobilizer override procedure Adjusting the rear shock absorber Light control Other functions Riding the motorcycle Break-in recommendations Controls Pre-ride checks Position of motorcycle controls Engine on/off Hands Free»…
  • Page 8
    Charge the battery Top-ups Charge and maintenance of the battery during winter Timing system storage Performance data Check drive chain tension Spark plugs Chain lubrication Fuel system Replace the high and low beam bulbs Brakes Beam setting Transmission Adjust rear-view mirrors Frame Tubeless tyres Wheels…
  • Page 9: Introduction

    Safety guidelines Important Your safety and that of others are very important. Possibility of damaging the motorcycle and/or Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. urges you to ride your its components. motorcycle responsibly. Before using your motorcycle for the first time, Note…

  • Page 10: Permitted Use

    Permitted use This motorcycle must be used only on road surfaces with asphalt or flat and even pavement. This motorcycle may not be used on dirt roads or for off- road riding. Attention Using the bike off-road may cause the rider to lose control, which in turn may lead to vehicle damage, injury or death.

  • Page 11: Rider’s Obligation

    Rider’s obligation Attention All riders must hold a driver’s license. Some medications may induce sleepiness or other effects that impair reflexes and the ability of the Attention rider to control the motorcycle, which may lead to accident. Riding without a license is illegal and punishable by law.

  • Page 12: Reporting Of Safety Defects

    NHTSA cannot become involved in individual Failure to be wearing a helmet in case of problems between you, your dealer, or Ducati North accident increases the chance of serious injury and America. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the even death.

  • Page 13
    Suitable clothing includes: helmet, eye protection, Important gloves, boots, long-sleeved jacket and long pants. For the safety of the passenger, make sure that he or she also wears appropriate clothing. The helmet must have the requisites as listed on page 9, if the helmet model has no visor, use suitable goggles;…
  • Page 14: Best Practices» For Safety

    Manual. Exhaust gases are poisonous and may lead to loss of Failure to follow these instructions releases Ducati consciousness or even death within a short time. Motor Holding S.p.A. from any liability whatsoever for During the ride, assume a correct body position and any engine damage or shorter engine life.

  • Page 15
    Important Important The passenger should always hold on to the Park your motorcycle where no one is likely to grab handle located inside the tail guard. hit it, and use the side stand. Never park on uneven or soft ground or your motorcycle may fall over. Refer to paragraph «Grab Handle»…
  • Page 16
    Attention When you leave the motorcycle unattended, always remove the ignition key and make sure it is inaccessible to anyone unsuitable to ride the motorcycle.
  • Page 17: Refueling

    Refueling Attention Refuel the motorcycle in an open area and with the In case of malaise caused by prolonged engine switched off. inhalation of fuel vapors, stay outdoors and consult a Do not smoke or ever use flames during refueling. physician.

  • Page 18: Carrying The Maximum Load Allowed

    Carrying the maximum load allowed Important Your motorcycle is designed for long-distance riding Be sure to secure the luggage to the supports with the maximum load allowed carried in full safety. provided on the motorcycle as firmly as possible. Even weight distribution is critical to preserving these Improperly secured luggage may affect stability.

  • Page 19: Dangerous Products — Warnings

    Dangerous products — warnings Attention Used engine oil The brake fluid used in the brake system is corrosive. In the event of accidental contact with eyes or skin, wash the affected area with generous Attention quantities of running water. Prolonged or repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

  • Page 20
    The cooling fan operates automatically: keep hands well clear and make sure your clothing does not get caught in the fan. Battery Attention The battery gives off explosive gases; keep it away from any source of ignition such as sparks, flames and cigarettes.
  • Page 21: Vehicle Id Number

    These numbers identify the motorcycle model and should always be indicated when ordering spare parts. We recommend that you note the frame number of your motorcycle in the space below. Frame number Fig 1 DUCATI PLANT OF TYPE OF MANUFACTURE MOTORCYCLE SEQUENTIAL MODEL…

  • Page 22: Engine Id Number

    Engine ID number Note These numbers identify the motorcycle model and should always be indicated when ordering spare parts. We recommend that you note the engine number of your motorcycle in the space below. Engine number Fig 3…

  • Page 23: Plate Positioning

    Plate positioning Fig 4…

  • Page 24
    9 ÷ 11 mm Fig 5…
  • Page 25
    Fig 6…
  • Page 26
    Fig 7…
  • Page 27
    9 Only Canada Fig 8…
  • Page 28
    9 (Only Canada) Fig 9…
  • Page 29: Noise And Exhaust Emission Control System Information

    Carbon monoxide does not react in the same way, Problems that may affect motorcycle but is toxic. Ducati utilizes lean carburetor settings emissions and other systems to reduce carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons. If you are aware of any of the following symptoms,…

  • Page 30: Your Warranty Rights And Obligations

    Your emission control system may include parts such You are responsible for presenting your as fuel-injection system, the ignition system, catalytic motorcycle to a Ducati dealer as soon as a converter, and engine computer. Also included may problem exists. The warranty repairs should be…

  • Page 31: California Evaporation Emission System

    California evaporation emission system This system consists of: 1) Warn air inlet; 2) Canister; 3) Dell’Orto jet; 4) Fuel tank; 5) Breather pipe; 6) Intake manifolds. Attention In the event of a fuel system malfunction, contact a Ducati Authorized Service Center. Fig 10…

  • Page 32: Ducati Limited Warranty On Emission Control System

    Air Resources Board. Any part or parts replaced under Ducati North America, Inc., 10443 Bandley Drive this warranty shall become the property of Ducati. In Cupertino, California, 95014 warrants that each new the state of California only, emissions related…

  • Page 33
    Ducati dealer. Ducati shall not be liable A. Repair or replacement required as a result of for any other expenses, loss or damage, whether…
  • Page 34
    This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. V. This warranty is in addition to the Ducati limited motorcycle warranty. VI. Additional information Any replacement part that is equivalent in performance and durability may be used in the performance of any maintenance or repairs.
  • Page 35: Instrument Panel (Dashboard)

    Instrument Panel (Dashboard) Dashboard on handlebar The instrument panel on handlebar consists of a LCD display (1) where main indications are shown (speed, engine rpm, engine coolant temperature and clock). 1) LCD display. 2) NEUTRAL LIGHT N (GREEN). Comes on when in neutral position. Fig 11 3) HIGH BEAM LIGHT (BLUE).

  • Page 36
    5) FUEL WARNING LIGHT (AMBER YELLOW). DTC intervention light Turns on when fuel is low and there are about 4 liters No intervention of fuel left in the tank. Spark advance cut On — STEADY 6) TURN INDICATOR LIGHTS (GREEN). Illuminates and flashes when the turn indicator is in Injection cut On — STEADY…
  • Page 37
    10) ABS LIGHT (AMBER YELLOW) (Fig 11). Engine off/ speed below 3 mph (5 km/h) Light off Light flashing Light steady ABS disabled with the menu func- ABS enabled but not working yet tion (**) Engine on/ speed below 3 mph (5 km/h) Light off Light flashing Light steady…
  • Page 38: Lcd Unit Functions

    LCD unit functions 1) SPEEDOMETER. Indicates road speed. 2) REV COUNTER. Indicates engine revs per minute. 3) CLOCK. 4) WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR. Indicates engine coolant temperature. Important Stop riding if the temperature reaches the maximum value, otherwise the engine might be Fig 12 damaged.

  • Page 39: Vehicle Speed Indicator

    Vehicle speed indicator This function displays vehicle speed (mph or km/h depending on the set measurement system). The instrument panel receives information about the actual speed (calculated in km/h) and displays the number increased by 5%. Maximum speed displayed is 186 mph (299 km/h). Over 186 mph (299 km/h) a series of dashes will be displayed “- — -”…

  • Page 40: Engine Rpm Indicator (Rpm)

    Engine rpm indicator (RPM) This function displays the rpm. The instrument panel receives the engine rpm information and displays it. This information on rpm is displayed progressively from left to right. Fig 14…

  • Page 41: Clock

    Clock This function allows displaying time indication. Time is always displayed according to the following sequence: AM 0:00 to 11:59; PM 12:00 to 11:59. In case of battery off (Batt-OFF), when the voltage is restored and upon next Key-On, clock will be reset and will automatically start counting from «0:00».

  • Page 42: Coolant Temperature

    Coolant temperature This function indicates engine coolant status. The temperature unit of measure can be selected (°F or °C). The reading is indicated as follows: if the reading is between -38°F and +102°F (- 39°C and +39°C) «LO» is shown on the instrument panel (steady);…

  • Page 43: Display Background Color (Automatic Adjustment)

    Display background color (Automatic adjustment) Instrument panel background color is set automatically according to exterior lighting conditions. When the sensor detects «poor lighting» (night), it switches to black background mode; vice versa when «significant» lighting is detected (day), it switches to white background mode.

  • Page 44: Dashboard On Tank

    Dashboard on tank Instrument panel on tank consists of a color TFT display housed inside tank fairing and displays trip information (set riding mode, odometer, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.) as well as the 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT «setting» menus to be used to enable and adjust the SIDE SIDE STAND…

  • Page 45
    Function buttons 1) CONTROL BUTTON. Button used to display and set instrument panel parameters with the position » «. 2) CONTROL BUTTON. Button used to display and set instrument panel parameters with the position » «. 3) HIGH-BEAM FLASHER FLASH BUTTON The high-beam flash button may also be used for LAP functions.
  • Page 46: Tft — Parameter Setting/Display

    TFT — Parameter setting/display 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT Attention CONS.AVG Operate on instrument panel only when the 10355 16.3 motorcycle is stopped. Do not operate on instrument KM/L GEAR panel while you are riding the motorcycle under no circumstances. Once check routine is over, instrument panel will always display the Odometer (TOT) on the left-hand side and the Average Consumption on the right-hand…

  • Page 47
    TRIP TIME — Trip time; AIR — Air temperature. Menu 2 displaying can be disabled through the «MENU 2» Function of the Setting menu.
  • Page 48: Total Distance Covered Indicator «Odometer

    Total distance covered indicator «Odometer» 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT This function allows displaying the indication of the CONS.AVG total distance traveled (Km or miles according to the 16.3 specific application). KM/L GEAR Upon Key-On, system will automatically access this function.

  • Page 49: Trip 1″ Meter

    «Trip 1» meter 03 DTC This function allows displaying the indication of the 162 HIGH SPORT partial distance traveled (Km or miles according to the specific application). When this function is accessed CONS.AVG TRIP1 9999.9 16.3 and button (1) is kept pressed for 3 seconds, trip KM/L meter will be reset.

  • Page 50: Trip 2″ Meter

    «Trip 2» meter This function allows displaying the indication of the 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT partial distance traveled (Km or miles according to the specific application). When this function is accessed CONS.AVG TRIP2 and button (1) is kept pressed for 3 seconds, trip 9999.9 16.3 meter will be reset.

  • Page 51: Range» Indicator — Estimate Of The Distance That Can Be Covered

    «RANGE» indicator — Estimate of the distance that can be covered This function estimates the distance that can be run depending on the quantity of fuel measured by the 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT probe in the tank and on the average consumption measured in the last period.

  • Page 52: Indicator «Cons. Avg» — Average Fuel Consumption

    Indicator «CONS. AVG» — Average fuel consumption This function indicates vehicle average fuel consumption. The calculation is made considering the quantity of 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT fuel used and the distance traveled since Trip 1 was last reset. When Trip 1 is reset, the value is reset and CONS.AVG 10355 16.3…

  • Page 53: Indicator «Cons.» — Instantaneous Fuel Consumption

    Indicator «CONS.» — Instantaneous fuel consumption This function indicates vehicle instantaneous fuel consumption. 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT The calculation is made considering the quantity of fuel used and the distance traveled during the last second. Value is indicated in «L / 100» (liters / 100 Km). CONS.

  • Page 54: Indicator «Speed Avg» — Average Speed

    Indicator «SPEED AVG» — Average speed This function indicates vehicle average speed. The calculation considers the distance and time since Trip1 was last reset. When Trip 1 is reset, the value is reset and the first value available is displayed 10 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT…

  • Page 55: Indicator «Trip Time» — Trip Time

    Indicator «TRIP TIME» — Trip time This function indicates vehicle trip time. The calculation considers the time since Trip 1 was last reset. When Trip 1 is reset, this value is reset as well. The count active phase occurs when the engine is 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT…

  • Page 56: Indicator «Air» — Air Temperature

    Indicator «AIR» — Air temperature This function allows displaying ambient temperature. Displaying range: -39°C ÷ +124°C. In case of sensor FAULT (-40°C, +125°C or 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT disconnected) a string of steady dashes «- — -» will be displayed and the «Engine/Vehicle Diagnosis — EOBD»…

  • Page 57
    When temperature reading drops until reaching 39°F (4°C), the ice warning will be enabled. This indication will be disabled as soon as temperature rises up to 43°F (6°C). Attention This warning does not exclude the possibility of icy road sections even at temperatures above 39°F (4°C);…
  • Page 58: Engaged Gear Indicator

    Engaged gear indicator This function allows displaying gears (A). Instrument panel receives the information and indicates the engaged gear or «N» for neutral. 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT Note In case of gear sensor «error», a dash «-» (not CONS.AVG 10355 16.3 flashing) will be displayed.

  • Page 59: Riding Mode Set» Indication

    TOURING or URBAN) (A) is blue if the parameters KM/L GEAR connected to the currently-set riding mode are the default ones (set by Ducati) or yellow if one or more parameters have been changed (customized) through the Setting menu, using «RIDING MODE» function. Fig 32…

  • Page 60: Indication If The «Lap» Function Is Active/Not Active

    Indication if the «LAP» function is active/not active This function indicates if the «LAP» (Lap time) function is enabled. 03 DTC When «LAP» is off, function is disabled. 162 HIGH SPORT «LAP» Function can be enabled through the «LAP» Function of the Setting menu. CONS.AVG 10355 16.3…

  • Page 61: Side Stand» Indication

    «SIDE STAND» indication This indication warns the rider that the side stand is 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT open. SIDE SIDE If side stand Sensor error is present on the CAN line, STAND CONS.AVG the display shows a stand down/open warning «SIDE 10355 16.3 STAND», turns on the EOBD light and displays the…

  • Page 62: Fuel Level» Indication

    «FUEL LEVEL» indication Suitable icons inform the rider of the quantity of fuel in the tank. This indication is only present if MENU 2 is active. With MENU 2 active, if a level sensor error is 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT triggered, no matter the fuel level output or SIDE…

  • Page 63
    Icon Icon backlighting Level Fuel quantity- EU Fuel quantity- US color version version Green Level 5 3.6 gallons 3.3 gallons ( 13.6 L) ( 12.5 L) Green Level 4 2.7 gallons 2.5 gallons ( 10.1 L) ( 9.4 L) Green Level 3 1.7 gallons 1.7 gallons…
  • Page 64
    Yellow / Black «Refueling necessa- < 0.3 gallons < 0.3 gallons ry» Day mode (blink) (<1.1 L) (<1.1 L) Black Fuel level sensor er- ror – Day mode White Fuel level sensor er- ror – Night mode…
  • Page 65: Riding Mode» Function (Riding Style Change)

    This function allows changing vehicle riding mode. no change will be made. A different traction control (DTC — Ducati Traction Control) intervention level and a different engine Attention power delivery (Engine) are associated to each riding Ducati recommends changing the Riding mode mode.

  • Page 66
    03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT RIDING MODE RIDING MODE CONS.AVG 10355 16.3 SPORT TOURING URBAN CLOSE THROTTLE TO ACTIVATE KM/L GEAR 03 DTC 162 HIGH TOURING RIDING MODE RIDING MODE CONS.AVG 10355 16.3 SPORT TOURING URBAN CLOSE THROTTLE TO ACTIVATE KM/L GEAR 03 DTC…
  • Page 67: Maintenance Indicator

    Maintenance indicator This function indicates that the vehicle is about to or has traveled a distance for which an Authorized Ducati Service Center should be contacted to have the general maintenance or oil change performed. Maintenance table Indicator Mileage Miles trav-…

  • Page 68
    Indicator Mileage Miles trav- count down count down Desmo serv- Oil service traveled eled -1000 Desmo -1000 Oil serv- service 72000 44739 83000 51574 84000 52195 95000 59030 96000 59651…
  • Page 69: First Warning — Oil Service 1000 Km

    (B) until «reset». 03 DTC 10355 SERVICE Attention GEAR Indication can be reset only by the Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center carrying out the maintenance operations. Fig 37 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT SERVICE CONS.AVG…

  • Page 70: Residual Range Indication When The Service Is Due

    Key-On for 2 seconds; while when 1000 km are left before threshold is reached, (B) and (D) (amber yellow) indication is enabled upon each Key-On for 5 seconds. Attention Indication can be reset only by the Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center carrying out the maintenance operations.

  • Page 71
    162 HIGH SPORT 162 HIGH SPORT 03 DTC 03 DTC — 1000 — 10500 10355 10355 GEAR GEAR 162 HIGH SPORT 162 HIGH SPORT 03 DTC 03 DTC — 10500 — 1000 10355 10355 GEAR GEAR Fig 39…
  • Page 72: Indication Of Range Reached For Service

    (B) and (D) until «reset». After reset, system will display the next service indication and the residual distance (as described in previous paragraph). Attention Indication can be reset only by the Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center carrying out the maintenance operations.

  • Page 73
    03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT 162 HIGH SPORT 03 DTC SERVICE CONS.AVG 10355 16.3 10355 SERVICE KM/L GEAR GEAR 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT 162 HIGH SPORT DESMO 03 DTC SERVICE CONS.AVG DESMO 10355 10355 16.3 SERVICE KM/L GEAR GEAR Fig 40…
  • Page 74: Warning Indication (Alarms/Signals)

    Warning indication (Alarms/Signals) Instrument panel activates, in real time, some warnings / malfunctions which do not nevertheless affect motorcycle correct and safe operation. Upon Key-On (once check routine is completed) one or more «warnings» are displayed, if active. As soon 162 HIGH SPORT as one «warning»…

  • Page 75
    The following «warnings» could be displayed: «Low» battery level (LOW BATTERY); «Disabled» Traction Control (DTC OFF); Hands Free (HF) Key «not acknowledged»; «Low» battery level of Hands Free (HF) key; «High» engine coolant temperature (HIGH TEMP); Steering unlock error; Steering still locked (Unlock error).
  • Page 76: Low» Battery Level

    It is activated when the battery voltage is equal to or less than 11.0 Volt. Note In this case, Ducati recommends charging the battery as soon as possible with the specific device, BATTERY since it may not be possible to start the vehicle.

  • Page 77: Traction Control (Dtc) Deactivated

    Traction Control (DTC) deactivated The activation of this (amber yellow) “warning” indicates that DTC (Ducati Traction Control) has been turned off. Note In this case, Ducati recommends being very careful when riding because vehicle behavior will be different as opposed to operating with the Traction Control activated.

  • Page 78: Hands Free (Hf) Key Not Recognized

    Hands Free system does not detect the active key near the vehicle. Note In this case, Ducati recommends checking that the active key is near the vehicle (and has not been lost) and that it functions properly.

  • Page 79: Low» Hands Free (Hf) Key Battery Level

    Note In this case, Ducati recommends replacing the battery as soon as possible. Replace the battery as described in the paragraph «Replacing the active key battery» page 129.

  • Page 80: High» Engine Coolant Temperature

    The activation of this «warning» (amber yellow) indicates that engine coolant temperature is high. Warning is activated when temperature reaches 250°F (121°C). Note In this case, Ducati recommends stopping and shutting off the engine immediately; ensure that fans are on. Fig 46…

  • Page 81: Steering Release Error — Steering Still Locked

    In this case, Ducati recommends turning the ERROR vehicle off and on (Key-Off / Key-On) holding the handlebar pressed down to the end stop. If the signal remains (and the steering does not “release”) contact a Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center. Fig 47…

  • Page 82: Dashboard Diagnosis

    Dashboard diagnosis This function allows detecting any vehicle abnormal behavior. Instrument panel activates, in real time, any vehicle abnormal behavior (ERRORS). 162 HIGH SPORT Upon Key-On (once check routine is completed) one HANDS or more «ERRORS» are displayed in red (if active, 03 DTC FREE only).

  • Page 83
    Attention When one or more errors are displayed, always contact a Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center. WARNING ERROR MESSAGE ERROR LIGHT BBS/DTC Black Box / Traction Control Control Unit GEAR GEAR SENSOR Gear sensor SENSOR FUEL FUEL SENSOR Fuel level sensor…
  • Page 84
    WARNING ERROR MESSAGE ERROR LIGHT SIDE SIDE STAND Side stand switch error STAND DEVICE DSB SLAVE Handlebar instrument panel not working SLAVE DEVICE DDA DDA error DEVICE DBS MASTER Tank instrument panel not working MASTER Fan relay CAN LINE CAN communication line LINE…
  • Page 85
    WARNING ERROR MESSAGE ERROR LIGHT BATTERY Battery voltage (HIGH or LOW) BATTERY DEVICE ABS ABS control unit not working STOP STOP LIGHT Rear stop light LIGHT DEVICE ECU ECU not working ACCELER POSITION Wrong accelerator position Motor relay or throttle motor not working…
  • Page 86
    WARNING ERROR MESSAGE ERROR LIGHT PRESSURE SENSOR Pressure sensor ENGINE TEMP. Engine temperature sensor T-AIR SENSOR Air temperature sensor FUEL INJECT. Injection relay COIL Coil INJECTOR Injector…
  • Page 87
    WARNING ERROR MESSAGE ERROR LIGHT PICK UP Timing/rpm sensor LAMBDA Lambda sensor ECU GENERIC ECU error HF communication problem HANDS FREE GENERIC Hands Free Control Unit error…
  • Page 88: Setting» Menu

    «Setting» menu CLOCK SET UNITS This menu is used to enable/disable and set some motorcycle functions. EXIT To access the «setting menu» press button (2) for 3 seconds. To quit the setting menu, use button (1) or button (2) to select the «EXIT» indication and press the reset When inside this menu no other function can be button (4).

  • Page 89
    MENU RIDING MODE BATTERY MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT MENU RIDING MODE BATTERY MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT MENU 2 EXIT Fig 49…
  • Page 90: Riding Mode» Customization

    Control) and «ENGINE». Any parameter change made is saved and remains in the memory also after a Battery-Off. To change DTC parameters, refer to «DTC (Ducati Traction Control)» paragraph page 91. To change Engine parameters, refer to «ENGINE (Engine power control)» paragraph page 96.

  • Page 91
    MENU RIDING MODE BATTERY MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT RIDING MODE SPORT TOURING URBAN EXIT RIDING MODE SPORT TOURING URBAN EXIT TOURING DEFAULT ENGINE EXIT Fig 50…
  • Page 92
    Note If parameters were not changed (customized) or if parameters are restored through the «DEFAULT» function, once Setting menu is quit, the «background» indicating riding mode (SPORT, TOURING or URBAN) 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT of «main» screen will turn blue. CONS.AVG Attention 10355…
  • Page 93: Dtc (Ducati Traction Control) Setting Function

    EXIT option will be highlighted This function allows you to customize the level of automatically. DTC intervention (Ducati Traction Control) or disable To exit the setting function, press the reset button (4) it for every riding mode.

  • Page 94
    RIDING MODE SPORT SPORT TOURING URBAN DTC OFF MEMORY ENGINE EXIT EXIT SPORT SPORT DTC OFF MEMORY ENGINE DEFAULT ENGINE EXIT EXIT SPORT DTC OFF MEMORY ENGINE EXIT SPORT DTC OFF MEMORIZED ENGINE EXIT SPORT DTC OFF MEMORIZED ENGINE EXIT Fig 52…
  • Page 95
    The DTC intervention increases, passing from level 1 to level 8. The following table indicates the most suitable level of DTC intervention for the various riding types as well as the default settings in the «RIDING MODE» that can be selected by the rider: DTC LEVEL RIDING MODE DEFAULT?
  • Page 96
    Tips on how to select the sensitivity level Between level 8 and level 1 there are an additional 6 intermediate levels. The level of DTC intervention decreases in equal steps from level 8 to level 1. Attention Levels 1 and 2 are specifically designed for OFF- The 8 levels of the DTC system your motorcycle ROAD conditions and do not ensure a suitable control is equipped with were calibrated with original…
  • Page 97
    The relation of the DTC intervention level to the circuit Once you have found a satisfactory setting for all the characteristics: corners except one or two slow ones, where the If all the corners on the track/circuit can be taken at a system tends to kick in and control too much, you can similar speed, it will be easier to find an intervention try to modify your riding style slightly to a «rougher»…
  • Page 98: Engine Setting Function (Engine Power Control)

    ENGINE setting function (Engine Power Now store the new setting by keeping the reset button (4) pressed for 3 seconds with «MEMORY» Control) highlighted. This function allows customizing ENGINE power and If setting has been stored successfully, delivery. «MEMORIZED» will appear in green for 2 seconds, To gain access to this function display the «setting»…

  • Page 99
    RIDING MODE SPORT HIGH ENGINE SPORT TOURING URBAN MEMORY ENGINE 162 HIGH HIGH MIDDLE 162 HIGH 162 LOW EXIT EXIT 100 HP SPORT SPORT MEMORY ENGINE 162 HIGH 162 HIGH 162 LOW DEFAULT ENGINE EXIT 100 HP EXIT SPORT MEMORY ENGINE 162 HIGH 162 HIGH…
  • Page 100: Default Function (Resetting Ducati Default Parameters)

    SPORT TOURING URBAN This function resets the parameters set by Ducati for EXIT each riding mode. To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 86; using button (1) or (2) select the «RIDING MODE» function SPORT and press the reset button (4) to go to next page.

  • Page 101
    Important This procedure restores the parameters for all riding modes. To exit the setting function, press the reset button (4) when «EXIT» is highlighted.
  • Page 102: Menu 2 On/Off Function

    Menu 2 On/Off function This function allows disabling «OFF» Menu 2 (B) / re- enabling «ON» Menu 2 (A). When Menu 2 is disabled, the average consumption (CONS.AVG), the instant consumption (CONS.), the 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT average speed (SPEED AVG), the trip time (TRIP TIME) and the air temperature (AIR) functions will no CONS.AVG longer be displayed on «main screen».

  • Page 103
    To gain access to this function display the «setting» MENU menu page 86, use buttons (1) or (2) to select the RIDING MODE BATTERY «MENU 2» function and press the reset button (4) to MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT shift to next page.
  • Page 104: Background Setting Function For The Dashboard On Tank — Dashboard

    Background setting function for the «AUTO» setting: instrument panel background is set automatically according to exterior lighting conditions dashboard on tank — DASHBOARD 1 (detected by a sensor) and will be «black» for a more This function allows setting the «background» of the dimmed visibility with poor exterior lighting and instrument panel on tank.

  • Page 105
    DASHBOARD 1 MENU RIDING MODE BATTERY NIGHT MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK EXIT AUTO BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT BACK LIGHT DASHBOARD 1 DASHBOARD 1 DASHBOARD 2 NIGHT EXIT EXIT AUTO DASHBOARD 1 NIGHT EXIT AUTO DASHBOARD 1 NIGHT EXIT AUTO Fig 57…
  • Page 106: Backlighting Setting Function For The Dashboard On Handlebar — Dashboard

    Backlighting setting function for the for dimmed visibility — recommended with poor exterior lighting. dashboard on handlebar — DASHBOARD 2 Select «MIN» setting and the background of the This function allows backlighting setting of the instrument panel on handlebar permanently sets instrument panel on handlebar.

  • Page 107
    DASHBOARD 2 MENU RIDING MODE BATTERY MIDDLE MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK EXIT BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT BACK LIGHT DASHBOARD 2 DASHBOARD 1 DASHBOARD 2 MIDDLE EXIT EXIT DASHBOARD 2 MIDDLE EXIT DASHBOARD 2 MIDDLE EXIT Fig 58…
  • Page 108: Digital Rpm Indication Function

    Digital RPM indication function This function displays the number of RPM for improved accuracy when setting idle rpm. MENU To access the function it is necessary to view the RIDING MODE BATTERY «setting» menu page 86; using button (1) or (2) select MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK…

  • Page 109: Lap Activation/Deactivation Function (Lap Time)

    LAP Activation/Deactivation function (lap time) This function allows enabling/disabling LAP (lap time) function. To gain access to this function display the «setting» menu page 86, use buttons (1) or (2) to select the «LAP» function and press the reset button (4) to shift to next page.

  • Page 110
    MENU RIDING MODE BATTERY MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT LAP DATA LAP DATA EXIT EXIT LAP DATA LAP DATA EXIT EXIT Fig 60…
  • Page 111: Lap Registration Function

    LAP registration function active, the current «lap» will not be recorded). If the time is never «stopped», it will roll over upon reaching This function describes the «LAP» time recording 9 minutes, 59 seconds and 99 hundredths; the lap procedure. timer starts counting from 0 (zero) and will keep If the function was Enabled (see «LAP enabling / running until the recording function is disabled.

  • Page 112
    03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT CONS.AVG 10355 16.3 KM/L GEAR 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT CONS.AVG 10355 16.3 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT KM/L GEAR START CONS.AVG 10355 16.3 KM/L GEAR 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT LAP 30 — 2’55”32 CONS.AVG 10355 16.3…
  • Page 113: Stored Lap Display Function

    Stored LAP display function Note This function displays the stored LAPs. To access the The MAX stored speed is the displayed one function it is necessary to view the “setting” menu (increased by 5%). page page 86; using button (1) or (2) select the “LAP” If no lap times are saved in memory, “NO LAP”…

  • Page 114
    MENU RIDING MODE BATTERY MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT LAP DATA LAP N.01 PREV TIME: 3’55”22 NEXT SPEED : 192 K ERASE EXIT : 6850 LAP DATA LAP DATA EXIT LAP N.30 PREV TIME: 2’43”38 NEXT SPEED : 212 K…
  • Page 115: Stored Lap Erase Function

    Stored LAP erase function This function erases the stored LAPs. To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 86; using button (1) or (2) select the «LAP» function and press the reset button (4) to go to next page.

  • Page 116
    MENU RIDING MODE BATTERY LAP DATA MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT LAP N.30 PREV TIME: 2’43”88 NEXT SPEED : 212 K EXIT ERASE : 7550 LAP DATA PREV LAP DATA PLEASE WAIT… NEXT EXIT EXIT ERASE LAP DATA PREV…
  • Page 117: Battery Voltage Indicator (Battery)

    Battery voltage indicator (BATTERY) This function describes the battery voltage indicator. To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 86; using button (1) or (2) select the «BATTERY» function and press the reset button (4) to confirm. The information will be displayed as follows: if battery voltage is between 11.8 and 14.9 Volt the reading will be displayed steady;…

  • Page 118
    MENU RIDING MODE BATTERY MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT BATTERY 12.3 VOLT EXIT Fig 64…
  • Page 119
    if battery voltage is equal to or less than 10.9 Volt, «LOW» is shown flashing and the «Vehicle/Engine Diagnosis — EOBD» light comes on; if battery voltage is equal to or greater than 16.1 Volt, «HIGH» is shown flashing and the «Vehicle/ Engine Diagnosis — EOBD»…
  • Page 120: Clock Setting Function

    Clock setting function hold button (2) down , the count increases cyclically in steps of 1 minute every second. This function sets the clock. To access the function it if the button (2) is held down for more than 5 seconds is necessary to view the «setting»…

  • Page 121
    MENU RIDING MODE BATTERY MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT CLOCK SETTING EXIT CLOCK SETTING EXIT CLOCK CLOCK SETTING SETTING EXIT EXIT Fig 66…
  • Page 122: Units Of Measurement Modification Function

    Units of measurement modification function This function allows changing the units of measurement of the displayed values. MENU To gain access to this function display the «setting» RIDING MODE BATTERY menu page 86, use buttons (1) or (2) to select the MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK…

  • Page 123
    «SPEED» setting To quit the setting function, press the reset button (4) with «EXIT» highlighted. This function allows you to change the speed «TEMP» setting measurement units (and therefore those of distance traveled). This function allows you to change the units of The currently set unit of measurement is highlighted measurement of the temperature.
  • Page 124
    This function allows changing the units of CONS. and CONS. AVG: mpg USA measurement of the Average and Instant Fuel To quit the setting function, press the reset button (4) Consumption. with «EXIT» highlighted. The currently set unit of measurement is highlighted in green on the display;…
  • Page 125
    SETTING UNITS SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED TEMPERATURE CONSUMPTION Km/h Km/h Km/h EXIT EXIT EXIT EXIT SETTING UNITS TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE SPEED TEMPERATURE CONSUMPTION °C °C °C EXIT °F EXIT °F EXIT °F EXIT SETTING UNITS CONSUMPTION SPEED TEMPERATURE CONSUMPTION L/100 Km mpg (UK) Km/L mpg (USA)
  • Page 126: Abs Disabling Function

    Note If the disabling request was not met, it is recommended to repeat the procedure. If the problem persists, contact your Ducati dealer or Authorized Service Center. To exit the setting function, press the reset button (4) when «EXIT» is highlighted.

  • Page 127
    MENU RIDING MODE BATTERY MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT EXIT EXIT PLEASE WAIT… EXIT EXIT EXIT Fig 69…
  • Page 128: The Immobilizer System

    The Immobilizer system For improved anti-theft protection, the motorcycle is equipped with an IMMOBILIZER, an electronic system that inhibits engine operation whenever the ignition switch is turned off. The grip of each ignition key contains an electronic device that modulates the output signal from a special antenna located under the seat when the ignition is switched On.

  • Page 129: Keys

    Keys The Owner receives a set of keys comprising: 1 active key (1). 1 passive key (2). The keys contain the code used by the «Hands Free» system for the Key-On, in different modes. The active key (1) is the one that is normally used: press button (A) to fully open the metal part, i.e.

  • Page 130
    The key contains a battery that must be replaced when the low key battery «warning» is displayed as soon as the instrument panel is turned on. Note In this case, replace the battery as soon as possible. When the charge level goes below a certain limit, the key can only work in passive mode, like the passive key: in this case, the instrument panel will not display any message.
  • Page 131: Replacing The Battery In The Active Key

    Replacing the battery in the active key Only use 3 Volt CR 2032 lithium ion batteries. Note The keys do not need to be reprogrammed after replacing the battery. Remove the metal part of the battery. Use a large sized coin to pry open the shells of the plastic grip (2 Euro coin) as shown in the figure.

  • Page 132
    Once the plastic shells have been separated, remove the printed circuit board (1) prying it up GENTLY with a small flat screwdriver, as shown in the figure. Important Insert the point of the flat screwdriver just under the printed circuit board and be very careful not to damage it.
  • Page 133
    Remove the battery (2) from the printed circuit board (1) and replace it with a new one. Pay attention to polarity: the positive pole (+) must face upward. Important Only use the required type of battery. Reinsert the printed circuit board (1) from the side with the battery (2) into the plastic shell.
  • Page 134
    Apply slight pressure on the antenna (3) of the printed circuit board until you hear a click. Align the two shells of the grip and press on the area indicated by the arrows to close them. Make sure that you hear a “click” upon closing and that the key is well closed.
  • Page 135: Duplicate Keys

    Duplicate keys Immobilizer override procedure If you need any duplicate keys, contact the Ducati This procedure makes it possible to «temporarily» turn Service network with all the keys you have left. on the motorcycle if the HF (Hands Free) System is The Ducati Service Center will program all the new not working.

  • Page 136
    PIN CODE activation function To store the entered PIN, press the reset button (4) for 3 seconds with «MEMORY» indication highlighted To access the function it is necessary to view the in green. As a confirmation of PIN storage, the display «setting»…
  • Page 137
    MENU RIDING MODE BATTERY MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT PIN CODE PIN CODE INSERT NEW PIN CODE INSERT NEW PIN CODE _ _ _ _ MEMORY EXIT 2 5 1 8 MEMORY EXIT PIN CODE PIN CODE INSERT NEW PIN CODE INSERT NEW PIN CODE…
  • Page 138
    PIN CODE change function Press the reset button (4); each time you press the button (2) the displayed number increases from «0» to This function changes your four number PIN CODE. «9» and then returns to «0»; to confirm the number, To access the function it is necessary to view the press the reset button (4).
  • Page 139
    MENU RIDING MODE BATTERY MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK BACK LIGHT SET UNITS EXIT PIN CODE PIN CODE MODIFY PIN CODE MODIFY PIN CODE OLD PIN _ _ _ _ CORRECT EXIT NEW PIN _ _ _ _ MEMORY OLD PIN 2 5 1 8 CORRECT EXIT…
  • Page 140
    To store the new entered PIN, press the reset button (4) for 3 seconds with «MEMORY» indication highlighted in green. As a confirmation of the new PIN storage, the display will show message «MEMORIZED» for about 2 seconds, then «EXIT» is automatically highlighted. To exit the setting function, press the reset button (4) when «EXIT»…
  • Page 141: Light Control

    Light control Headlight control This function allows you to reduce current consumption from the battery by automatically managing headlight switching-off. At Key-On, the high beam and low beam lights are off. When the engine is started, the low beam lights turn on automatically;…

  • Page 142
    Turn indicators (automatic reset) The instrument panel controls the automatic reset of the turn indicators. After activating one of the two turn indicators, they can be deactivated using the reset button (4). If the turn indicator is not “reset» manually, the instrument panel will automatically switch it off after the motorcycle has traveled 0.3 miles (500 m) from the time the turn indicator was activated.
  • Page 143
    “Parking” function This function activates the “PARKING” mode. The “PARKING” function activates the front and rear parking lights when the vehicle is turned off so it is visible when parked. The function is activated by pressing the button (2) for 3 seconds during the first 60 seconds after the motorcycle was turned off.
  • Page 144
    Important The frequent use of this function can considerably reduce the battery charge. We recommend using this function only when really necessary. Ducati recommends using this function only when really necessary.
  • Page 145
    Warning reading “Press the ignition button to lock the steering”. KEEP This indicates that rider must hold button depressed to engage the steering lock. PRESSED Indication is active if button (8) is pressed for 1 second. LOCK Fig 85 Fig 86…
  • Page 146
    “Steering lock” on indication This function tells you that the steering lock was turned on. The steering lock can be turned on during the first 60 seconds after turning off the vehicle by pressing down the “RUN” button. If the steering lock was enabled correctly, the instrument panel will show the indication in the display for 5 seconds.
  • Page 147
    Indication of incorrect position of the red button. This message tells you that the button should be returned to the «top» position in order to ensure that there is not an excessive current absorption by the system. RED SWITCH NOT RELEASED Important This could lead to battery discharge within a short time.
  • Page 148
    If the warning remains active once button (8) is no longer depressed, you shall take button (8) to “top” position. In this case, report the fault to Dealer or Authorized Service Center. Fig 90 Fig 91…
  • Page 149: Other Functions

    Other functions If «OFF» indication is zoomed, the heated handgrips are switched off. This function allows enabling and adjusting the If «LOW» indication is zoomed, the heated handgrips heated handgrips. are activated in their lowest setting. To enable the «H.GRIPS» control menu for the heated If «MEDIUM»…

  • Page 150
    162 HIGH SPORT 03 DTC O FF 10355 MEDIUM HIGH GEAR 162 HIGH SPORT 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT L O W 03 DTC 03 DTC CONS.M. L O W 10355 10355 16.3 MEDIUM HIGH GEAR KM/L GEAR 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT 162 HIGH…
  • Page 151
    03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT 50355 MEDIUM HIGH 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT SPORT 50355 L O W 50355 162 HIGH L O W MEDIUM 03 DTC HIGH G EAR 03 DTC 162 HIGH SPORT SPORT 50355 M E D I U M 50355 162 HIGH M E D .
  • Page 152
    ON indication is still active. Heating will automatically turn on when engine is started again. Attention Ducati recommends NOT to use the heated handgrips when ambient temperature is above 15° ÷ 20°C since they might get damaged. Note…
  • Page 153: Controls

    Controls Position of motorcycle controls Attention This section shows the position and function of the controls used to ride the motorcycle. Be sure to read this information carefully before you use the controls. 1) Instrument panel on handlebar. 2) «Hands free» system. 3) Instrument panel on tank.

  • Page 154: Hands Free» System

    Hands Free» system The Hands free system consists of: 1) Hands free lock; 2) Antenna; 3) Active key; 4) Passive key; 5) Tank filler plug. The «Hands free» button (7, Fig 97) is located on the tank front end. Fig 95…

  • Page 155
    Hands free system «Key-On» and «Key-Off» Key-On consists in turning on the hands free system and all electronic devices. Key-Off consists in turning off the hands free system and all electronic devices, and ensures engine is turned off. Key-On is done using button (6) on the right switch on the handlebar or using the emergency button (7) on the Hands free lock.
  • Page 156
    Key-On can only occur in the presence of one of the two keys (3) or (4) or using the pin code. Key-Off can also occur without any key (3) or (4). Key-Off occurs when the speed of the motorcycle is equal to zero, by pressing button (6) on the handlebar or by pressing the Hands free button (7).
  • Page 157
    Key-On/Key-Off using the red button on the handlebar with the active key A Key-On can be performed by pressing the red button (6) on the handlebar in the HANDS FREE ON/ OFF position and in the presence of the active key (3, Fig 95).
  • Page 158
    Key-On/Key-Off using the button on the Hands free lock with active key. Key-On can be performed by pressing button (7) on the Hands free lock (1, Fig 95) and with the presence of the active key (3, Fig 95). Note The active key (3) has a range of approx.
  • Page 159
    Key-On/Key-Off using the red button on the handlebar with the passive key A Key-On can be performed by pressing the red button (6) on the handlebar in the HANDS FREE ON/ OFF position and in the presence of the passive key (4, Fig 95).
  • Page 160
    Key-On/Key-Off using the button on the Hands free lock with the passive key Key-On can be performed by pressing button (7) on the Hands free lock and with the presence of the passive key (4, Fig 95). Note The passive key has a range of a few cm, therefore the key must be positioned near the antenna.
  • Page 161
    Key-On/Key-Off using the pin code (immobilizer override) Key-On can be performed by pressing button (7) on the hands free lock (1, Fig 95) without the presence of the keys (3, Fig 95) and (4, Fig 95) and entering the pin code on the instrument panel. Key-Off can be performed by pressing button (6) on the handlebar / Hands Free button (7) / engine off, no key in the range.
  • Page 162
    If this procedure is necessary in order to start return to the four dashes «- — — -» indication to allow you the vehicle, contact an Authorized Ducati Service to enter the code again. Center as soon as possible to fix the problem.
  • Page 163
    PIN CODE INSERT PIN CODE _ _ _ _ 2 5 _ _ 2 5 1 _ 0 _ _ _ 2 5 1 _ 2 _ _ _ 2 5 1 8 2 _ _ _ PIN CODE INSERT PIN CODE 2 5 _ _ 2 5 1 8 CORRECT…
  • Page 164: Left-Hand Switch

    Left-hand switch 1) Dip switch, two-position light selector switch: (A) any time it is pressed down light switch from low beam on to low beam and high beam on (B) pushed to the side = high beam flasher (FLASH), «Start-Stop lap» function. 2) Button = 3-position turn indicator switch: central position = off;…

  • Page 165: Clutch Lever

    Clutch lever Lever (1) disengages the clutch. It features a dial adjuster (2) for lever distance from the twistgrip on handlebar. The lever distance can be adjusted through 10 clicks of the dial (2). Turn clockwise to increase lever distance from the twistgrip. Turn the adjuster counterclockwise to decrease lever distance.

  • Page 166: Right-Hand Switch

    Right-hand switch 1) Red ON/OFF switch. 2) Black ENGINE START button. The switch (1) has three positions: A) center: RUN OFF. In this position, the engine cannot be started and all electronic devices are off. B) pushed down: ON/OFF. In this position, the system can be turned on (key-on) and off (key-off).

  • Page 167: Throttle Twistgrip

    Throttle twistgrip The twistgrip (1) on the right handlebar opens the throttles. When released, it will spring back to the initial position (idling speed). Fig 111…

  • Page 168: Front Brake Lever

    Front brake lever Pull in the lever (1) towards the twistgrip to operate the front brake. The system is hydraulically operated and you just need to pull the lever gently. The control lever (1) features a dial adjuster (2) for lever distance from the twistgrip on handlebar adjustment.

  • Page 169: Rear Brake Pedal

    Rear brake pedal Push down the pedal (1) to operate the rear brake. The system is hydraulically operated. Fig 113…

  • Page 170: Gear Change Pedal

    Gear change pedal When released, the gear change pedal (1) automatically returns to rest position N in the center. This is indicated by the instrument panel light N (2, Fig 11) coming on. The pedal can be moved: down = press down the pedal to engage the 1 gear and to shift down.

  • Page 171: Adjusting The Position Of The Gearchange And Rear Brake Pedals

    Adjusting the position of the gearchange and rear brake pedals The position of the gearchange and rear brake pedals in relation to the footrests can be adjusted to suit the requirements of the rider. Adjust the pedals as follows: Gear change pedal hold the linkage (1) and slacken the lock nuts (2) and (3).

  • Page 172
    Rear brake pedal Loosen counter nut (7). Turn pedal stroke adjusting screw (6) until pedal is in the desired position. Tighten the counter nut (7). Operate the pedal by hand to check that there is 0.12÷0.24 in (3÷6 mm) of free play before the brake bites.
  • Page 173: Main Components And Devices

    Main components and devices Position on the vehicle 1) Tank filler plug. 2) Seat lock. 3) Side stand. 4) Rear-view mirrors. 5) Front fork adjusters. 6) Rear shock absorber adjusters. 7) Catalytic converter. 8) Exhaust silencer. Fig 117…

  • Page 174: Tank Filler Plug

    Tank filler plug Note To open or close the tank filler plug using the active key, set the metal part in the middle position. Opening Lift the cover (1) and insert the active or passive key into the lock. Turn the key clockwise 1/4 turn to unlock. Lift the plug (2).

  • Page 175
    Note The plug can only be closed with the key in. Attention Always make sure you have properly refitted and closed the plug after refueling.
  • Page 176: Seat Lock

    Seat lock Work latch (1) to remove the seat and access the CLOSE underseat compartment and reach any other device under it. Removing the seat Insert the active or passive key in the lock (1), turn clockwise while pressing down at the latch to help release the pin.

  • Page 177
    Helmet cable Note The helmet cable is inside the tool box. Route cable through helmet and engage cable end into pin (3). Leave the helmet hanging and refit the seat to hold it in place. Attention This device protects the helmet against theft when the motorcycle is parked.
  • Page 178
    Refitting the seat Make sure that all elements are correctly positioned and fastened to the compartment under the seat. Insert the brackets (4) of the seat base in the projecting parts (5) of the frame, then push the rear end of the seat until you hear the bolt in the lock click into place.
  • Page 179: Side Stand

    Side stand Important Use the side stand to support the motorcycle only during short stops. Before lowering the side stand, make sure that the supporting surface is hard and flat. Do not park on soft or pebbled ground or on asphalt melted by the sun, etc.

  • Page 180
    Note The engine can be started with the side stand down and the gearbox in neutral. If starting with a gear engaged, pull in the clutch lever (in this case the side stand must be up).
  • Page 181: Passenger Grabhandle

    Passenger grabhandle Passenger grab handle (1, Fig 125) is located inside the tail guard; to take it out, remove the seat (see «Removing the seat» on page page 174), pull knob (2, Fig 125) while taking out the grab handle (1, Fig 125) from its housing until it is fully extended.

  • Page 182: Adjusting The Front Fork

    Adjusting the front fork The front fork used on this motorcycle has rebound, compression and spring preload adjustment. Use the external screw adjusters: 1) to adjust the rebound damping(Fig 127); 2) to adjust the preload of the inner springs (Fig 127); 3) to adjust the compression damping (Fig 128).

  • Page 183
    To change preload of the spring inside each fork leg, turn the hex. adjuster (2, Fig 127) with a hexagon wrench of 0.87 in (22 mm), starting from the fully open (clockwise) position. From reference (A, Fig 127), every full turn clockwise corresponds to 0.04 in (1 mm) of preload of the spring, up to a maximum of 0.59 in (15 mm), corresponding to 15 full turns.
  • Page 184: Adjusting The Rear Shock Absorber

    Adjusting the rear shock absorber The rear shock absorber has external controls that enable you to adjust the setting to suit the load on the motorcycle. The adjuster (1, Fig 129), located on the lower mount which fastens the shock absorber to the swinging arm, adjusts the damping during the rebound phase (return).

  • Page 185
    The knob (3, Fig 131), located on the expansion reservoir of the shock absorber, adjusts the damping during the compression phase. Turn the adjusters (1) with a screwdriver or the knobs (2) and (3) clockwise to obtain a harder setting or increase preload. Turn them counter-clockwise to obtain the opposite setting.
  • Page 186
    CHOOSING THE SUSPENSION SETTING The values in the table are indicative. They have been calculated considering a dressed rider weighing 176 — 198 lb (80-90kg) and a dressed passenger weighing 154 — 176 lb (70-80kg). Front fork Range Standard Sport use Comfort use Rider + Passen- Compression…
  • Page 187: Riding The Motorcycle

    Riding the motorcycle For all mechanical parts of the motorcycle to adapt to one another and above all not to adversely affect the life of basic engine parts, it is advisable to avoid harsh accelerations and not to run the engine at high rpm for too long, especially uphill.

  • Page 188
    During the entire Break-in period, carefully observe the indications on the scheduled maintenance chart and servicing recommendations in the Warranty Booklet. Failure to follow these instructions releases Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. from any liability whatsoever for any engine damage or shorter engine life. Fig 132…
  • Page 189: Pre-Ride Checks

    Make sure lights, indicators and horn work and passenger. properly. In case of light malfunction, contact a Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center. Before riding, perform a thorough check-up on your KEY LOCKS bike as follows:…

  • Page 190
    When the vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h, the warning light switches off to indicate the correct operation of the ABS system. Attention In case of malfunction, do not ride the motorcycle and contact a Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center. Fig 133…
  • Page 191
    Check that the front (1) and rear (2) phonic wheels are clean. Attention Clogged reading slots would compromise system proper operation. It is advisable to disable ABS in case of a very muddy road surfaces, as in these conditions the system might be subject to sudden failure.
  • Page 192: Engine On/Off

    Engine on/off Attention Before starting the engine, become familiar with the controls you will need to use when riding. Attention Never start or run the engine indoors. Exhaust gases are poisonous and may lead to loss of consciousness or even death within a short time. In the presence of the active or passive key, perform Fig 136 a Key-On (turning on the «Hands Free”…

  • Page 193
    Attention The side stand must be fully up (in a horizontal position), as its safety sensor prevents engine start when down. After Key-On, but with the engine not yet started, the system will perform a Key-Off automatically if the presence of the active key is not detected within 10 seconds.
  • Page 194
    Note To turn on the “Hands Free” system and all electronic onboard systems, refer to “Hands Free System”.
  • Page 195: Moving Off

    Moving off Attention 1) Disengage the clutch by squeezing the clutch Avoid harsh accelerations, as this may lead to lever. misfiring and transmission snatching. The clutch 2) Push down the gear change lever firmly with the lever should not be pulled longer than necessary after tip of your foot to engage first gear.

  • Page 196: Abs System

    ABS system and does not control both the front and rear brake at the same time. If desired, the system can be Using the brakes correctly under adverse conditions deactivated from the instrument panel by using the is the hardest – and yet the most critical — skill to «ABS disabling function»…

  • Page 197: Stopping The Motorcycle

    Stopping the motorcycle Reduce speed, shift down and release the throttle twistgrip. Shift down to engage first gear and then neutral. Apply the brakes and bring the motorcycle to a complete stop. Turn off the engine moving the red switch downward (1).

  • Page 198: Parking

    While if it fails to engage, after 5 seconds the instrument panel displays the message: «RED SWITCH NOT RELEASED». If this is the case, release the switch and try locking the steering again within 60 seconds from Key-off. In case of failed locking, contact a Ducati authorized Service Center.

  • Page 199
    Press button (2, Fig 141) for at least 3 seconds: the indication of the activated function (Fig 142) will appear on the round display of the instrument panel for 5 seconds and the lights will remain on for 2 hours. After this period of time, they will turn off automatically.
  • Page 200
    Attention The exhaust system might be hot, even after engine is switched OFF; pay particular attention not to touch exhaust system with any body part and do not park the motorcycle next to inflammable material (wood, leaves etc.). Attention Using padlocks or other locks designed to prevent motorcycle motion, such as brake disk locks, rear sprocket locks, etc.
  • Page 201: Refueling

    Refueling Never overfill the tank when refueling. Fuel should never be touching the rim of filler recess. Attention Use fuel with a minimum octane rating of 90 (RON+MON)/2 Attention The vehicle is compatible only with fuel having a maximum ethanol content of 10% (E10). Using fuel with ethanol content over 10% is prohibited.

  • Page 202: Tool Kit And Accessories

    Tool kit and accessories The tool kit (2) is located under the seat (1) while the Owner’s Manual is housed in the compartment under the seat. The tool kit includes: fuse pliers; two helmet anti-theft cables; screwdriver;; screwdriver handle; 0.55/0.62 in (14/16 mm) box wrench; 0.31/0.39 in (8/10 mm) wrench;…

  • Page 203: Main Maintenance Operations

    Main maintenance operations Change the air filter Important Have the air filter maintenance performed at a Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center. Check and top up the coolant level Fig 145 Check coolant level in the expansion tank on the right side of the vehicle.

  • Page 204: Check Brake And Clutch Fluid Level

    Brake and clutch fluid must be topped up and changed at the intervals specified in the scheduled maintenance table contained in the Warranty Booklet; please contact a Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center. Fig 146 Important All brake and clutch lines should be changed every four years.

  • Page 205
    If you note too much play on brake lever or pedal and brake pads are still in good condition, contact your Attention Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center to have Clutch fluid level will increase as clutch plate the system inspected and any air drained out of the friction material wears down.
  • Page 206: Check Brake Pads For Wear

    Friction material wear beyond this limit would lead to metal support contact with the brake disk and compromise braking efficiency, disk integrity and rider safety. Fig 148 Important Have the brake pads replaced at a Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center. Fig 149…

  • Page 207: Lubricate Cables And Joints

    Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center. To avoid this kind of problem with the throttle cable, unscrew the two retaining screws (1), to open the case and then grease cable ends and pulley (2) with SHELL Advance Grease or Retinax LX2 grease.

  • Page 208
    To ensure smooth operation of the side stand pivot, remove dirt and apply SHELL Alvania R3 grease to all friction points.
  • Page 209: Adjust Throttle Control Free Play

    Adjust throttle control free play 0.06÷0.08 in The throttle twistgrip must have a free play of 1,5÷2 mm 0.06-0.08 in (1.5-2.0 mm) in all steering positions, measured on the outer edge of the twistgrip. If necessary, adjust it using the adjusters (1 and 2) located on the steering tube on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

  • Page 210: Charge The Battery

    Before charging the battery, it is best to remove it from the motorcycle. Important The battery is housed in the cowling, ALWAYS contact a Ducati Dealer or an Authorized Service Center for its removal. Remove the left cowling (1) by loosening: side screw (2) retaining the electrical components compartment;…

  • Page 211
    screw (5) retaining the central cowling to left cowling; screws (6) and remove the battery mounting cover (7). Fig 155 Fig 156…
  • Page 212
    Slide out the battery (8) from its housing and, always starting from the negative terminal (-), loosen the screws (9). Remove the positive cable (10), the ABS positive cable (11) from the positive terminal and the negative cable (12) from the negative terminal. Attention The battery produces explosive gases: keep it away from heat sources…
  • Page 213
    Lay down the ABS positive cable (11), onto positive cable (10) and start screw (9) in its thread on these cables. Fig 158…
  • Page 214
    Connect the positive cable (10), previously assembled to ABS cable (11), to battery positive terminal, and negative cable (12) to battery negative terminal by starting the other screw (9) in its thread. Tighten the terminal screws (9) to a torque of 5 Nm ±10% and apply grease onto the battery terminals to prevent oxidation.
  • Page 215
    Refit battery mounting cover (7) and fasten tightening the screws (6) to a torque of 10 Nm ±10%. Fig 161…
  • Page 216
    Refit the left cowling (1) as follows: start the side screw (2) retaining the electrical components compartment in its thread; start the top screw (3) retaining the electrical components compartment in its thread; start the bottom screw (4) retaining the central cowling in its thread;…
  • Page 217
    start the screw (5) retaining the central cowling to left cowling in its thread. Tighten the screws (2, Fig 162), (3, Fig 162), (4, Fig 162) and (5, Fig 163) to a torque of 10 Nm ±10%. Fig 163…
  • Page 218: Charge And Maintenance Of The Battery During Winter Storage

    Charge and maintenance of the battery during winter storage Your motorcycle is equipped with a connector (1) to which you can connect a special battery charger (2) (Battery maintainer kit part no. 69924601A — various countries; Battery maintainer kit part no. 69924601AX — for Japan, China and Australia only) available from our sales network.

  • Page 219
    Note When the motorcycle is left unused (approximately for more than 30 days) we recommend owners to use the Ducati battery charge maintainer (Battery maintainer kit part no. 69924601A — various countries; Battery maintainer kit part no. 69924601AX — for Japan, China and Australia only) since its electronics monitors the battery voltage and features a maximum charge current of 1.5 Ah.
  • Page 220: Check Drive Chain Tension

    Check drive chain tension Important Have chain tension adjusted by a Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center. Turn the rear wheel until you find the position where chain is tightest. Set the vehicle on the side stand. Push down the chain at the point of measurement and release.

  • Page 221
    Attention Correct tightening of swinging arm screws (1) is critical to rider and passenger safety. Important Improper chain tension will lead to rapid wear of transmission parts. Fig 167…
  • Page 222: Chain Lubrication

    Chain lubrication The chain fitted on your motorcycle has O-rings to protect its moving parts from dirt and to hold the lubricant inside. The seals might be irreparably damaged if the chain is cleaned using any solvent other than those specific for O-ring chains or washed using steam or water cleaners.

  • Page 223: Replace The High And Low Beam Bulbs

    The headlight is a full LED unit. Fig 168 Important Attention Have the headlight bulbs replaced at a Ducati The headlight might fog up if the vehicle is used Dealer or Authorized Service Center. under the rain or after washing. Switch headlight on…

  • Page 224: Beam Setting

    Beam setting To check the headlight aim, place the motorcycle upright with the tires inflated to the correct pressure and one person sitting astride the motorcycle. The motorcycle should be perfectly vertical, with its longitudinal axis at right angles to a wall or screen at a distance of 32.8 feet (10 meters).

  • Page 225
    To vertically align the low beam, turn the screws (1). To vertically align the high beam, turn the screw (2). Fig 170…
  • Page 226: Adjust Rear-View Mirrors

    Adjust rear-view mirrors The rear-view mirror can be adjusted manually by pressing on points (A). Fig 171…

  • Page 227: Tubeless Tyres

    Check and set tire pressure when tires are cold. When traveling very bumpy roads, increase tire Have the tires replaced at a Ducati Dealer or pressure by 0.2÷0.3 bar to preserve the roundness of Authorized Service Center. Correct removal and the front rim.

  • Page 228
    Minimum tread depth Measure tread depth (S, Fig 172) at the point where tread is most worn down: It should not be less than 0.08 in (2 mm), and in any case not less than the legal limit. Important Visually inspect the tires at regular intervals for cracks and cuts, especially on sidewalls, bulges or large spots which are indicative of internal damage.
  • Page 229: Check Engine Oil Level

    Refit the plug. Important Engine oil and oil filters must be changed by a Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center at the Fig 173 intervals specified in the scheduled maintenance chart contained in the Warranty Booklet.

  • Page 230
    Viscosity SAE 15W-50 The other viscosity degrees indicated in the table can be used if the local average temperature is within the limits specified for that oil viscosity. 20W–40 20W–50 15W–40 15W–50 10W–40 10W–30 –10 40 C Fig 174…
  • Page 231: Clean And Replace The Spark Plugs

    The condition of the spark plugs provides a good indication of how well the engine is running. Have the spark plugs inspected or replaced at a Ducati Dealer or Authorized Service Center. Fig 175…

  • Page 232: Clean The Motorcycle

    Clean the motorcycle Important Do not wash your motorcycle right after use. When the motorcycle is still hot, water drops will Note evaporate faster and spot hot surfaces. To preserve the finish of metal parts and Never clean the motorcycle using hot or high- paintwork, wash and clean your motorcycle at regular pressure water jets.

  • Page 233
    Attention The headlight might fog up due to washing, rain or moisture. Switch headlight on for a short time to dry up any condensate. Carefully clean the phonic wheels of the ABS to ensure system efficiency. Do not use aggressive products in order to avoid damaging the phonic wheels and sensors.
  • Page 234: Storing The Motorcycle

    If the motorcycle is to be left unridden over long Periodically carry out the required checks and replace periods, you should perform the following parts as necessary using Ducati original spare parts procedures before storing it away: to be in compliance with regulations in the given clean the motorcycle;…

  • Page 235: Scheduled Maintenance Chart

    Scheduled maintenance chart Scheduled maintenance chart: operations to be performed by the Dealer List of operations and type of interven- Km. x1000 Time tion (months) mi. x1000 0.6 [set mileage (km/mi) or time interval *] Reading of the error memory with DDS and check of software version update on control units Check whether there are technical updates and recall campaigns…

  • Page 236
    List of operations and type of interven- Km. x1000 Time tion (months) mi. x1000 0.6 [set mileage (km/mi) or time interval *] Check the proper tightening of brake caliper bolts and brake disk carrier bolts Check front and rear wheel nuts tightening Check frame-to-engine fasteners tightening Check wheel hub bearings Check and lubricate the rear wheel shaft…
  • Page 237
    List of operations and type of interven- Km. x1000 Time tion (months) mi. x1000 0.6 [set mileage (km/mi) or time interval *] Visual check of the fuel lines Check rubbing points, clearance, freedom of movement and positioning of hoses and electric wiring in view Lubricate the levers at the handlebar and pedal controls Change coolant Check the coolant level and circuit for damage…
  • Page 238: Scheduled Maintenance Chart: Operations To Be Performed By The Customer

    Scheduled maintenance chart: operations to be performed by the customer Km. x1000 List of operations and type of intervention [set mileage (km/mi) or time mi. x1000 interval *] Months Check engine oil level Check brake and clutch fluid level Check tire pressure and wear Check the drive chain tension and lubrication Check brake pads.

  • Page 239: Technical Data

    Weights Weight in running order without fluids and battery: 462.97 lb — (210 kg) (Diavel ABS); 451.95 lb — (205 kg) (Diavel Carbon ABS). Carrying full load: 881.85 lb. — (400 kg). Attention Failure to observe weight limits could result in…

  • Page 240: Overall Dimensions

    Overall dimensions 860 mm — 33.86 in 516 mm — 20.31 306 mm — 12.05 in 130 mm — 5.19 in 1580 mm — 62.20 in 2235 mm — 87.99 in Fig 176…

  • Page 241: Top-Ups

    Top-ups TOP-UPS TYPE Fuel tank, including a reserve of 1.32 gal- Unleaded fuel with a minimum octane rat- 17 cu. dm (liters) ing of 90 (RON+MON)/2. lons (4 dm 4.5 gallons Sump and filter SHELL — Advance 4T Ultra 4 cu. dm (liters) 1.6 gallons Front/rear brake and clutch circuits SHELL Advance Brake DOT 4…

  • Page 242
    Attention The vehicle is compatible only with fuel having a maximum ethanol content of 10% (E10). Using fuel with ethanol content over 10% is prohibited. Using it could result in severe damage of the engine and motorcycle components. Using fuel with ethanol content over 10% will render the Warranty null and void.
  • Page 243: Timing System

    Timing system DESMODROMIC with four valves per cylinder, operated by eight rocker arms (4 opening rockers and 4 closing rockers) and two overhead camshafts. It is operated by the crankshaft through spur gears, belt rollers and toothed belts. Desmodromic timing system 1) Opening (or upper) rocker;…

  • Page 244: Performance Data

    Important with ethanol content over 10% will render the Failure to follow these instructions will release Warranty null and void. Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. from any liability for any engine damage or shortened engine life. Spark plugs Make: NGK Type: MAR9A-J Fuel system MITSUBISHI indirect electronic injection.

  • Page 245: Brakes

    Brakes Master cylinder type: PS 13. Separate-action anti-lock brake system operated by Attention hall-type sensors mounted to each wheel with phonic wheel detection: The brake fluid used in the brake system is ABS can be disabled. corrosive. In the event of accidental contact with eyes or skin, Front wash the affected area with generous quantities of Semi-floating drilled twin-disc.

  • Page 246: Transmission

    Front chain sprocket/clutch gearwheel ratio: 33/61 S.p.A. will be pleased to provide information about 6-speed gearbox with constant mesh gears, gear the special ratios available. Contact a Ducati Dealer or change pedal on left side of motorcycle. Authorized Service Center.

  • Page 247: Wheels

    Wheels Wheel travel: 4.7 in (120 mm). Fourteen-spoke, light-alloy rims (Diavel ABS). Rear Nine-spoke, light-alloy rims (Diavel Carbon). The shock absorber is adjustable in rebound and Front compression and has remote control for spring preload. Its upper section is pivot-connected to the Size: MT 3.50×17“.

  • Page 248
    Rims, Black. Diavel ABS Carbon Red and Matt Carbon Primer code L0040652 (Lechler). Varnish code LM06017 (Lechler). Frame, Ducati Red code 81784 (Inver). Rear subframe, Graphite Gray code 36345 (Inver). Rims, Black. Diavel ABS Carbon Star White & Matt Carbon Primer code 873.AL001 (Palinal).
  • Page 249: Electrical System

    Electrical system Note Basic electric items are: For bulb replacement instructions, please read Headlight: «Replacing the high and low beam bulbs». LED low beam light type: No. 4 LEDs (13.5V — 24.3W); LED high beam light type: No. 5 LEDs (13.5V — 18.9W);…

  • Page 250
    Fuses There are twelve fuses that protect the electric components located inside the front and rear fuse boxes, and one on the electric solenoid starter. There are three spare fuses (S) in every box. Refer to the table below to identify the circuits protected by the various fuses and their ratings.
  • Page 251
    Rear left fuse box key (A) El. item Rat. Throttle opening relay (ETV) 15 A Injection relay 20 A Key-sense 15 A 10 A Instrument panel 10 A Rear right fuse box key (B) El. item Rat. Diagnosis/Recharge 7.5 A Navigator/Alarm 7.5 A Black Box System (BBS)
  • Page 252
    Note To access the main fuse, remove the left belly fairing. The main fuse (C, Fig 180), is positioned next to the battery, on the solenoid starter (D, Fig 180). Remove the fuse cap (E, Fig 180), to reach it. A blown fuse is identified by the interrupted center link (F, Fig 181).
  • Page 253
    Injection /electric system diagram key Anti-theft system alarm Exhaust valve actuator Right-hand switch Gear sensor Immobilizer Rear speed sensor Hands Free relay ABS control unit Hands free Accelerator position sensor (APS) LH fuse box Potentiometer motor / ride-by-wire (TPS/ETV) RH fan Timing/rpm sensor LH fan Vertical MAP sensor…
  • Page 254
    Front speed sensor Note Front left turn indicator The electric system wiring diagram is at the end Instrument panel on handlebar of this manual. Instrument panel on tank Front right turn indicator Heated handgrip control unit (optional) High / Low beam Parking light Heated handgrips (optional) Wire color coding…
  • Page 255: Routine Maintenance Record Routine Maintenance Record

    Routine maintenance record Routine maintenance record DUCATI SERVICE MILEAGE DATE 1000 15000 9000 30000 18000 45000 27000 60000 36000…

  • Page 257
    Bk/W Gr/R Gr/R HALL HALL PUSH PUSH PUSH FREE FREE PUSH PUSH 11 12 RB BW RB BY R Bk R Bk Gr SET DOWN SET UP TURN HORN HI BEAM PASSING 41 40 DIAVEL ABS / DIAVEL CARBON ABS…

На этом сайте используются различные типы файлов cookie, в том числе для аналитики и для
сбора пользовательских данных (как с этого сайта, так и с других). Это позволяет
показывать вам рекламу в соответствии с вашими предпочтениями, которые вы продемонстрировали
в интернете. Если вы хотите узнать об этом подробнее или отказаться от некоторых
или всех файлов cookie, нажмите здесь. Если вы закроете это окно, нажмёте ОК или
воспользуетесь любой функцией этого сайта, тем самым вы даёте согласие на использование
файлов cookie.

OK

Руководства по эксплуатации

Документы, которые прилагаются к вашему мотоциклу, содержат полезную информацию о вашем
Ducati: от кода цвета до спецификаций некоторых электронных и механических
компонентов, а также подробности о важном сервисном обслуживании. Вы можете
скачать электронную версию вашего руководства по эксплуатации, и помните, что вы можете
в любое время обратиться в службу сервиса Ducati, чтобы провести техобслуживание
вашего мотоцикла.

Monster 1200 R (E4) RUS MY18 ED01

Monster 797-797 Plus (E4) RUS MY18

Monster 821 (E4) RUS MY18

XDiavel-XDiavel S (E4) RUS MY18

Superbike 959 Panigale (E4) RUS MY18

Panigale V4 (E4) RUS MY18

Panigale V4 S (E4) RUS MY18

SBK V4 Speciale (E4) RUS MY18

1299 Panigale R Final Edition

SBK Panigale R Final Edition (E4) RUS MY18

Supersport-Supersport S (E4) RUS MY18

Supersport-Supersport S (E4) RUS MY18

SCR 800Cafe Racer (1604) RUS MY19

Scrambler 1100 (E4) RUS MY19

Scrambler Desert Sled (E4) RUS MY19

Scrambler Street Classic (E4) RUS MY18

инструкцияDucati Diavel 1260 S (2021)

Посмотреть инструкция для Ducati Diavel 1260 S (2021) бесплатно. Руководство относится к категории Мотоциклы, 1 человек(а) дали ему среднюю оценку 9.8. Руководство доступно на следующих языках: английский. У вас есть вопрос о Ducati Diavel 1260 S (2021) или вам нужна помощь? Задайте свой вопрос здесь

  • Table of Contents
  • General Information
  • Main components and devices
  • Controls
  • Riding the motorcycle
  • Instrument panel (Dashboard)
  • Main use and maintenance operations
  • Scheduled maintenance chart
  • Specifications
  • Open source software
  • Declarations of conformity
  • 2Copertina_X_USA_5mm_DOPPIO indirizzo_P65Warnings.pdf

Нужна помощь?

У вас есть вопрос о Ducati а ответа нет в руководстве? Задайте свой вопрос здесь Дай исчерпывающее описание проблемы и четко задайте свой вопрос. Чем детальнее описание проблемы или вопроса, тем легче будет другим пользователям Ducati предоставить вам исчерпывающий ответ.

Количество вопросов: 0

Логотип Ducati
Главная
Ducati
Diavel 1260 S (2021)
Мотоцикл
английский
Руководство пользователя (PDF)

Не можете найти ответ на свой вопрос в руководстве? Вы можете найти ответ на свой вопрос ниже, в разделе часто задаваемых вопросов о Ducati Diavel 1260 S (2021).

Как перевести мили в километры?

В чем разница между топливом E10 и E5?

Какова рекомендуемая частота замены масляного фильтра в двигателе Ducati?

Как часто следует менять масло в двигателе Ducati?

Как удалить ржавчину с устройства Ducati Мотоцикл?

Инструкция Ducati Diavel 1260 S (2021) доступно в русский?

Не нашли свой вопрос? Задайте свой вопрос здесь

Нет результатов

Triumph Tiger 1200 XCA (2020)
Triumph Tiger 1200 XCA (2020)

инструкция270 страниц(ы)

Triumph Tiger 1200 GT Pro (2023)
Triumph Tiger 1200 GT Pro (2023)

инструкция214 страниц(ы)

Triumph Tiger 1200 Desert (2021)
Triumph Tiger 1200 Desert (2021)

инструкция270 страниц(ы)

Triumph Tiger 1200 GT Explorer (2023)
Triumph Tiger 1200 GT Explorer (2023)

инструкция214 страниц(ы)

Triumph Street Triple S (2020)
Triumph Street Triple S (2020)

инструкция269 страниц(ы)

Triumph Bonneville T120 (2021)
Triumph Bonneville T120 (2021)

инструкция220 страниц(ы)

Triumph Tiger 1200 XRT (2020)
Triumph Tiger 1200 XRT (2020)

инструкция270 страниц(ы)

Triumph Scrambler 1200 XC (2021)
Triumph Scrambler 1200 XC (2021)

инструкция214 страниц(ы)

Triumph Tiger 1200 Alpine (2021)
Triumph Tiger 1200 Alpine (2021)

инструкция270 страниц(ы)

Triumph Tiger 1200 Rally Explorer (2022)
Triumph Tiger 1200 Rally Explorer (2022)

инструкция214 страниц(ы)

Посмотреть все Ducati руководства Посмотреть все Ducati Мотоцикл руководства

Ducati Diavel: Available Instructions

Note for Owners:

Guidesimo.com webproject is not a service center of Ducati trademark and does not carries out works for diagnosis and repair of faulty Ducati Diavel equipment. For quality services, please contact an official service center of Ducati company. On our website you can read and download documentation for your Ducati Diavel device for free and familiarize yourself with the technical specifications of device.

  • KYMCO AK 550

    KYMCO Repair Manual AK 550 KYMCO AK 550 Service Manual Using this manual This manual has been designed to assist trained mechanics in servicing the models listed above. If you do not have the proper training or tools to perform a particular task it is best if you seek out a service professional. This manual was written using the latest informat …

    AK 550 Motorcycle, 461

  • Kawasaki KLX450R —

    KLX 450RLIME GREENFOR MORE INFORMATION VISIT www.kawasaki.caDesigned for the rigors of the off-road world, the KLX450R delivers a wide spread of power with high-traction torque and superior throttle control, combined with the enhanced durability and comfort that’s required in unforgiving off-road environments.KEY FEATURESKEY FEATURES2010 KLX™ 450R2010 KLX™ 450ROFFROAD Contains both electric …

    KLX450R — Other, 2

  • Honda CRF450R

    FOR COMPETITION USE ONLYThis Motorcycle is designed, manufactured and sold for closed-course competition use only. It does not conform toFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or U.S. EPA Noise and Emission Standards. Operation on public streets,roads, highways or for off-road recreation is illegal.State and federal laws prohibit operation of this vehicle except in an organized racing or competiti …

    CRF450R Motorcycle, 177

  • Honda CBR1000ST

    This manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicleand should remain with the vehicle when it is resold.This publication includes the latest production information availablebefore printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right to makechanges at any time without notice and without incurring anyobligation.No part of this publication may be reproduced without writtenpermission.The ve …

    CBR1000ST Motorcycle, 251

Popular Motorcycle User Guides:

Ducati Diavel 2014 Owner's Manual PDF

Summary of Content for Ducati Diavel 2014 Owner’s Manual PDF

This manual forms an integral part of the motorcycle and must be kept with it whole its service life. If the motorcycle is resold, the manual must always be handed over to the new owner. This manual must be preserved with care. If it lost or becomes damaged, contact a Ducati Dealer or authorised Service Centre without delay to obtain a new copy of the manual.

The quality standards and safety of Ducati motorcycles are steadily improved as new design solutions, equipment and accessories are developed. While the information contained in this manual is current at the time of going to print, Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. reserves the right to make changes at any time without notice and without any obligations. For this reason, the illustrations in this manual might differ from your motorcycle.

Any and all reproduction or spreading of the contents herein in whole or in part is forbidden. All rights reserved to Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. Any request for written authorisation to do so shall be addressed to this company, specifying the reasons for request.

Enjoy your ride!

2

Table of contents

Foreword 7 Safety guidelines 7 Safety alerts 8 Permitted use 9 Rider’s obligations 10 Rider training 11 Riding gear 11 Best practices for motorcycle safety 12 Refuelling 14 Carrying the maximum load allowed 15 Dangerous products — warnings 16 Vehicle identification number 18 Engine identification number 19

Instrument panel (Dashboard) 20 Instrument panel on handlebar 20

LCD — Main functions 23 Vehicle speed indicator 24 Engine rpm indicator (RPM) 25 Clock 26 Coolant temperature 27 Display background colour (Automatic adjustment) 28 Instrument panel on fuel tank 29 TFT — Parameter setting/display 31 Total distance covered indicator «Odometer 33 «Trip 1» meter 34 «Trip 2» meter 35 «RANGE» indicator — Estimate of the distance that can be covered 36 Indicator «CONS. AVG» — Average fuel consumption 37 Indicator «CONS.» — Instantaneous fuel consumption 38 Indicator «SPEED AVG» — Average speed 39 Indicator «TRIP TIME» — Trip time 40 Indicator «AIR» — Air temperature 41 Engaged gear indicator 43 «Riding Style set» indication 44 Indication if the «LAP» function is active/not active 45 «SIDE STAND» indication 45

3

«FUEL LEVEL» indication 47 «Riding Mode» function (riding style change) 50 Maintenance indicator 52 Maintenance table 52 First warning — OIL SERVICE 1000 Km 54 Residual range indication when the SERVICE is due 55 Indication of range reached for SERVICE 57 Warning indication (Alarms/Signals) 59 «Low» battery level 61 Traction Control (DTC) deactivated 62 Hands Free key (HF) not recognised 63 «Low» Hands Free key (HF) battery level 64 «High» engine coolant temperature 65 Steering release error — Steering still locked 66 Instrument panel diagnosis 67 «Setting» menu 73 «Riding Mode» customisation 75 DTC (Ducati Traction Control) setting function 78 ENGINE setting function (Engine Power Control) 83 DEFAULT function (Resetting Ducati default parameters) 85 Menu 2 On/Off function 87

Background setting function for the instrument panel on tank — DASHBOARD 1 89 Backlighting setting function for the instrument panel on handlebar — DASHBOARD 2 91 Digital RPM indication function 93 LAP Activation/Deactivation function (lap time) 94 LAP registration function 96 Stored LAP display function 98 Stored LAP erase function 100 Battery voltage indicator (BATTERY) 102 Clock setting function 105 Units of measurement modification function 107 ABS disabling function 111 The Immobilizer system 113 Keys 114 Replacing the battery in the active key 116 Duplicate keys 120 Immobilizer override procedure 120 Light control 126 Other functions 134

Controls 138 Position of motorcycle controls 138 «Hands free» system 139

4

Left-hand switch 149 Clutch lever 150 Right-hand switch 151 Throttle twistgrip 152 Front brake lever 153 Rear brake pedal 154 Gear change pedal 155 Adjusting the position of the gearchange and rear brake pedals 156

Main components and devices 158 Position on the vehicle 158 Tank filler plug 159 Seat lock 161 Side stand 164 Passenger grabhandle 166 Adjusting the front fork 167 Adjusting the rear shock absorber 169

Riding the motorcycle 172 Running-in recommendations 172 Pre-ride checks 174 Engine on / off 177 Moving off 180

Braking 180 ABS system 181 Stopping the motorcycle 182 Parking 183 Refuelling 186 Tool kit and accessories 187

Main maintenance operations 188 Change the air filter 188 Check and top up the coolant level 188 Check brake and clutch fluid level 188 Check brake pads for wear 191 Lubricate cables and joints 192 Adjust throttle control free play 194 Charge the battery 195 Charge and maintenance of the battery during winter storage 203 Check drive chain tension 205 Chain lubrication 207 Replace the high and low beam bulbs 208 Beam setting 209 Adjust rear-view mirrors 211 Tubeless tyres 212 Check engine oil level 214 Clean and replace the spark plugs 216

5

Clean the motorcycle 217 Storing the motorcycle 219 Important notes 219

Scheduled maintenance chart 220 Scheduled maintenance chart: operations to be performed by the Dealer 220 Scheduled maintenance chart: operations to be performed by the customer 223

Technical data 224 Weights 224 Overall dimensions 225 Top-ups 226 Engine 227 Timing system 228 Performance data 229 Spark plugs 229 Fuel system 229 Brakes 230 Transmission 231 Frame 231 Wheels 232 Tyres 232

Suspensions 232 Exhaust system 232 Available colours 232 Electrical system 234

Routine maintenance record 240 Routine maintenance record 240

6

Foreword

Safety guidelines We would like to welcome you among Ducati enthusiasts, and congratulate you on your excellent choice of motorcycle. We think you will ride your Ducati motorcycle for long journeys as well as short daily trips. Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. wishes you smooth and enjoyable riding.

Your motorcycle is the result of Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A.’s on-going research and development efforts. It is important that you preserve its quality standard by strictly observing the maintenance plan and using genuine spare parts. This manual provides instructions on minor maintenance operations. Major maintenance operations are described in the Service Manual available to Ducati Authorised Service Centres. In your own interest, for your safety and in order to guarantee product reliability, you are strongly advised to refer to our authorised Dealers and Service Centres

for any operations listed in the scheduled maintenance chart, see page 220.

Our highly skilled staff have access to special implements and appropriate equipment required to perform any servicing job at best, and use Ducati original spare parts only as the best guarantee for full interchangeability, smooth running and long life.

All Ducati motorcycles come with a Warranty Card. The warranty does not apply to motorcycles used in racing competitions. Tampering with or altering any components, even partially, will make the warranty null and void effective immediately. Improper or poor maintenance, using other than original spare parts or parts not expressly approved by Ducati may invalidate your warranty rights and lead to damage or loss of performance.

Your safety and that of other road users are very important. Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. recommends that you ride responsibly. Before using your motorcycle for the first time, read this entire manual carefully and closely follow the guidelines outlined in it. The manual provides full information on proper motorcycle operation and

7

maintenance. In case of any doubts, please call a Dealer or Authorised Service Centre.

Safety alerts To alert you to potential hazards that could potentially harm you or other persons, the following safety alerts have been used:

— Safety labels on motorcycle; — Safety messages preceded by a warning symbol

and the word WARNING or IMPORTANT.

Warning Failure to comply with these instructions may

put you at risk and result in severe injury to rider or other persons or even death.

Important Possibility of damaging the motorcycle and/or

its components.

Note Additional information concerning the job being

carried out.

The terms RIGHT and LEFT refer to the motorcycle viewed from the riding position.

8

Permitted use This motorcycle must be ridden on asphalt or on flat and even surfaces, only. This motorcycle may not be used for riding on dirt trails or for off-road riding.

Warning Off-road riding may lead to loss of control and

result in vehicle damage, personal injuries or even death.

Warning This motorcycle may not be used to tow any

trailers or with a side-car attached; this can lead to loss of control and result in an accident.

This motorcycle carries the rider and can carry a passenger.

Warning The total weight of the motorcycle in running

order including rider, passenger, luggage and additional accessories should not exceed 400kg/ 882lb.

9

Rider’s obligations All riders must hold a valid licence.

Warning Riding without a licence is illegal and is

prosecuted by law. Always make sure you have your licence with you when riding. Do not let inexperienced riders or persons without a valid licence use your motorcycle.

Do not ride under the influence of alcohol and/or drugs.

Warning Riding under the influence of alcohol and/or

drugs is illegal and is prosecuted by law.

Do not take prescription or other drugs before riding unless you have consulted your doctor about their side effects.

Warning Some medications and drugs may cause

drowsiness or other effects that slow down reaction time and the rider’s ability to control the motorcycle, possibly leading to an accident.

Some states require vehicle insurance.

Warning Check your state laws. Obtain insurance

coverage and keep your insurance document secure with the other motorcycle documents.

To protect rider and passenger safety, some states mandate the use of a certified helmet.

Warning Check your state laws. Riding without a helmet

may be punishable by law.

Warning Riders without helmets are more likely to suffer

severe bodily injury or die if they are in an accident.

10

Warning Check that your helmet complies with safety

specifications, permits good vision, is the right size for your head, and carries a certification label indicating that it conforms to the standards in force in your state. Road traffic laws differ from state to state. Learn about traffic laws in your state before riding and always obey them.

Rider training Accidents are frequently due to inexperience. Driving a motorcycle is different from driving other vehicles and requires specific riding and braking techniques.

Warning Poor training or improper operation of the

vehicle can lead to loss of control, death or severe damage.

Riding gear Riding gear is very important for safety. Unlike cars, a motorcycle offers no impact protection in an accident.

Proper riding gear includes helmet, eye protection, gloves, boots, long sleeve jacket and long pants.

— The helmet must have the requirements listed in page 10; if your helmet does not have a visor, use suitable eye wear;

— Use five-finger gloves made from leather or abrasion-resistant material;

— Riding boots or shoes must have non-slip soles and offer ankle protection;

— Jacket, pants or riding suit must be made from leather or abrasion-resistant material and have high-visibility colours and inserts.

Important Never wear loose clothing, items or accessories

that may become tangled in motorcycle parts.

Important For your safety, always wear suitable protective

gear, regardless of season and weather.

Important Have your passenger wear proper protective

clothing.

11

Best practices for motorcycle safety These few simple operations are critical to people safety and to preserving the full performance of your motorcycle. Never forget to perform them before, while and after riding.

Important Closely follow the indications provided at

chapter «Riding the motorcycle» during the running-in period. Failure to follow these instructions releases Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. from any liability whatsoever for any engine damage or shorter engine life.

Warning Before riding your motorcycle, become familiar

with the controls you will need to use when riding.

Perform the checks recommended in this manual before each ride (see page page 166).

Warning Failure to carry out these checks before riding

may lead to motorcycle damage and injury to rider and/or passenger.

Warning Start the engine outdoors or in a well ventilated

area. The engine should never be started or run indoors. Exhaust gases are poisonous and may lead to loss of consciousness or even death within a short time. Use proper body position while riding and ensure your passenger does the same.

Important Rider must hold the handlebar with both hands

at ALL TIMES while riding.

Important Both rider and passenger should keep their feet

on the footpegs when the motorcycle is in motion.

Important The passenger should always hold on to the

grab handle located inside the tail guard.

Refer to paragraph «Grab Handle» on page 166.

12

Important Be very careful when tackling road junctions, or

when riding in areas near exits from private grounds, car parks or on slip roads to access motorways.

Important Be sure you are clearly visible and do not ride

within the blind spot of vehicles ahead.

Important ALWAYS signal your intention to turn or pull to

the next lane in good time using the suitable turn indicators.

Important Park your motorcycle where no one is likely to

knock against it, and use the side stand. Never park on uneven or soft ground, or your motorcycle may fall over.

Important Visually inspect the tyres at regular intervals for

detecting cracks and cuts, especially on the side walls, bulges or large spots that are indicative of internal damage. Replace them if badly damaged. Remove any stones or other foreign bodies caught in the tread.

Warning Engine, exhaust pipes and silencers stay hot

long after the engine is switched off; pay particular attention not to touch the exhaust system with any body part and do not park the vehicle next to flammable material (wood, leaves etc.).

Warning Always remove the key when you leave your

motorcycle unattended and make sure it is not accessible to persons not authorised to use the motorcycle.

13

Refuelling Refuel outdoors with the engine turned off. Do not smoke or use open flames when refuelling. Be extremely careful not to spill fuel on the engine or on the exhaust pipe. Never fill the tank completely. Fuel should never be touching the rim of filler recess. While refuelling, avoid inhaling fuel vapours and avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothing.

Warning The motorcycle is only compatible with fuel

having a maximum content of ethanol of 10% (E10). Using fuel with ethanol content over 10% is forbidden. Using it could result in severe damage of the engine and motorcycle components. Using fuel with ethanol content over 10% will make the warranty null and void.

Warning In the event of illness after prolonged breathing

of fuel vapours, stay outdoors and seek medical advice. In the event of contact with eyes, flush with plenty of water. After contact with skin, wash immediately with water and soap.

Warning Fuel is highly inflammable. Clothing with spilled

fuel on it should be removed as possible.

14

Carrying the maximum load allowed Your motorcycle is designed for long-distance riding, carrying the maximum load allowed in full safety. Even weight distribution is critical to preserving these safety features and avoiding trouble when performing sudden manoeuvres or riding on bumpy roads.

Warning Do not exceed the total permitted weight for the

motorcycle and pay attention to information provided below regarding load capacity.

Information about carrying capacity

Important Arrange your luggage or heavy accessories in

the lowest possible position and close to motorcycle centre.

Important Never fix bulky or heavy objects to the

handlebar or to the front mudguard as this would affect stability and cause danger.

Important Be sure to secure the luggage to the supports

provided on the motorcycle as firmly as possible. Improperly secured luggage may affect stability.

Important Do not insert any objects you may need to carry

into the gaps of the frame as these may foul moving parts.

Warning Make sure the tyres are inflated to the proper

pressure and that they are in good condition.

Refer to paragraph «Tyres» on page 212.

15

Dangerous products — warnings Used engine oil

Warning Prolonged or repeated contact with used engine

oil may cause skin cancer. If working with engine oil on a daily basis, we recommend washing your hands thoroughly with soap immediately afterwards. Keep away from children.

Brake lining debris

Never attempt to clean the brake assembly using compressed air or a dry brush.

Brake fluid

Warning Spilling brake fluid onto plastic, rubber or

painted parts of the motorcycle may cause damages. Protect these parts with a clean shop cloth before proceeding to service the system. Keep away from children.

Warning The brake fluid used in the brake system is

corrosive. In the event of accidental contact with eyes or skin, wash the affected area with abundant running water.

Coolant

Engine coolant contains ethylene glycol, which may ignite under particular conditions, producing invisible flames. Although the flames from burning ethylene glycol are not visible, they are still capable of causing severe burns.

Warning Take care not to spill engine coolant on the

exhaust system or engine parts.

These parts may be hot and ignite the coolant, which will subsequently burn with invisible flames. Coolant (ethylene glycol) is an irritant and is poisonous when ingested. Keep away from children. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The coolant will be scalding hot and is under high pressure.

16

The cooling fan operates automatically: keep hands well clear and make sure your clothing does not snag on the fan.

Battery

Warning The battery gives off explosive gases; never

cause sparks or allow naked flames and cigarettes near the battery. When charging the battery, ensure that the working area is properly ventilated.

17

Vehicle identification number

Note These numbers identify the motorcycle model

and should always be indicated when ordering spare parts.

It is recommended to record the frame number of your motorcycle in the space below.

Frame number

Fig. 1

18

Engine identification number

Note These numbers identify the motorcycle model

and should always be indicated when ordering spare parts.

It is recommended to record the number of your motorcycle’s engine in the space below.

Engine number

Fig. 2

19

Instrument panel (Dashboard)

Instrument panel on handlebar The instrument panel on handlebar consists of a LCD display (1) where main indications are shown (speed, engine rpm, engine coolant temperature and clock).

1) LCD display. 2) NEUTRAL LIGHT N (GREEN). Comes on when in neutral position. 3) HIGH BEAM LIGHT (BLUE). Comes on when high beams are on. 4) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LIGHT (RED). Comes on when engine oil pressure is too low. It must turn on at «Key-On», but must turn OFF a few seconds after the engine has started. It may shortly come on when the engine is hot, however, it should go out as the engine revs up.

1

6 9 7 2 4 5 3 68

Fig. 3

Important If the ENGINE OIL light stays ON, stop the

engine or it may suffer severe damage.

20

5) FUEL WARNING LIGHT (AMBER YELLOW). Comes on when fuel is low and there are about 4 litres of fuel left in the tank. 6) TURN INDICATOR LIGHTS (GREEN). The light of the turn indicator in operation illuminates and flashes. 7) «ENGINE/VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS — EOBD» LIGHT (AMBER YELLOW). It turns on in the case of «engine» and/or «vehicle» errors and in some cases will lock the engine. 8) «OVER REV» LIMITER / «DTC» TRACTION CONTROL LIGHT (RED).

Over rev light

No rev limitation Off

1st threshold — no. RPM before the limit- er threshold (*)

On — STEADY

Limiter (Overrev) kicks in (*)

On — Flashing

(*) each calibration of the engine control unit, depending on model, may have a different setting for the thresholds before the rev limiter kicks in and the rev limiter threshold.

DTC intervention light

No intervention Off

Spark advance cut On — STEADY

Injection cut On — STEADY

Note Should both lights for Over rev Function

activation and DTC intervention come on, instrument panel will give priority to Over rev Function.

21

10) ABS LIGHT (AMBER YELLOW) (Fig. 3). Engine OFF / speed below 5 Km/h

Light OFF Light flashing Light steady on

— ABS disabled with the menu func- tion (**)

ABS enabled, but not functioning yet

Engine on / speed below 5 Km/h

Light OFF Light flashing Light steady on

— ABS disabled with the menu func- tion

ABS enabled, but not functioning yet

Engine on / speed above 5 km/h

Light OFF Light flashing Light steady on

ABS enabled and functioning ABS disabled with the menu func- tion

ABS disabled and not functioning due to a problem

(**) the ABS can be considered as really disabled only when light continues flashing even after engine starting.

22

LCD — Main functions 1) SPEEDOMETER. Indicates vehicle speed. 2) REV COUNTER. Shows the engine rotation speed/minute (rpm). 3) CLOCK. 4) WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR. Indicates engine coolant temperature.

Important Do not ride the motorcycle if temperature

reaches the max. value as engine could suffer severe damage.

2

3 41

Fig. 4

23

Vehicle speed indicator This function shows vehicle speed (Km/h or mph, based on the selected unit of measurement). The instrument panel receives information about the actual speed (calculated in km/h) and displays the number increased by 5%. Maximum speed displayed is 299 km/h (186 mph). Over 299 km/h (186 mph) a series of dashes will be displayed — — — (not flashing).

Note If the instrument panel does not receive any

information, a series of dashes will be displayed — — — (not flashing).

Fig. 5

24

Engine rpm indicator (RPM) This function shows engine rpm. The instrument panel receives the engine rpm information and displays it. This information is displayed progressively from the left to the right, identifying the rpms.

Fig. 6

25

Clock This function allows displaying time indication. Time is always displayed according to the following sequence:

— AM 0:00 to 11:59; — PM 12:00 to 11:59.

In case of battery off (Batt-OFF), when the voltage is restored and upon next Key-On, clock will be reset and will automatically start counting from «0:00».

Fig. 7

26

Coolant temperature This function indicates coolant indication state. The temperature unit of measurement can be selected (C or F). The reading is indicated as follows:

— if the reading is between — 39C and +39C (-38F and +102F) «LO» is shown on the instrument panel (steady);

— if the reading is between +40C and +120C (+104F and +248F) it appears on the instrument panel (steady);

— if the reading is +121C (+250F) or higher, «HI» is shown on the instrument panel (flashing).

Note If the sensor is in fault, the three flashing dashes

(«- — -«) will be displayed and, at the same time, the «Engine/Vehicle Diagnosis — EOBD» light will come on.

Fig. 8

27

Display background colour (Automatic adjustment) Instrument panel background colour is set automatically according to exterior lighting conditions. When sensor detects «poor lighting» conditions (night), it switches to black background mode; while when «significant» lighting is detected (day), it switches to white background mode. This function can be customised through the «setting» menu, using function «BACK LIGHT — DASHBOARD 1», on page 89, and possibly permanently setting either of the NIGHT or DAY modes (or go back to AUTO mode).

28

Instrument panel on fuel tank Instrument panel on tank consists of a colour TFT display housed inside tank fairing and displays trip information (set riding mode, odometer, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.) as well as the «setting» menus to be used to enable and adjust the different functions.

1) Menu 1 (TOT, TRIP1, TRIP2, RANGE). 2) Menu 2 (CONS.AVG., CONS., SPEED AVG, TRIP

TIME and AIR) if active. 3) Gear / Neutral indication. 4) Icon indicating fuel level. 5) Engine setting indication for the currently set

riding mode. 6) Currently set Riding Mode. 7) DTC (Traction Control) level indication for the

currently set riding mode. 8) Icon referring to the function indicated under

Menu 2. 9) Side stand open indication.

10355 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

SIDE STAND

4 5

9

6 7 8

21 3

Fig. 9

29

Function buttons

1) CONTROL BUTTON. Button used to display and set instrument panel parameters with the position » «.

2) CONTROL BUTTON Button used to display and set instrument panel parameters with the position » «.

3) HIGH-BEAM FLASH BUTTON (FLASH) The high-beam flash button may also be used for LAP functions.

4) DISABLE (RESET) BUTTON The turn indicators disable button may also be used for the RESET/CONFIRM function of the instrument panel and for enabling the «Riding Mode».

2

3

4

1

Fig. 10

30

TFT — Parameter setting/display

Warning Operate on instrument panel only when the

motorcycle is stopped. Do not operate on instrument panel while you are riding the motorcycle under no circumstances.

Once check routine is over, instrument panel will always display the Odometer (TOT) on the left-hand side and the Average Consumption on the right-hand side as «main» indication (unless Menu 2 has been disabled).

«Main» displaying includes the following information:

— Set Riding Mode; — Gear indication (GEAR); — Menu 1: Odometer (TOT); — Menu 2: Average Fuel Consumption (CONS.

AVG).

10355 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

1

2

Fig. 11

By pressing button (1) it is possible to toggle to the following functions of menu 1:

— TRIP1: Trip meter 1; — TRIP2: Trip meter 2; — RANGE — Indication of estimated distance that

can be run.

By pressing button (2) it is possible to toggle to the following functions of menu 2:

— CONS. — Instant fuel consumption; — SPEED AVG — Average speed;

31

— TRIP TIME — Trip time; — AIR — Air temperature.

Menu 2 displaying can be disabled through the «MENU 2» Function of the Setting menu.

32

Total distance covered indicator «Odometer This function allows displaying the indication of the total distance travelled (Km or miles according to the specific application). Upon Key-On, system will automatically access this function. The value is saved permanently and cannot be reset. If the value exceeds 199999 km (or 199999 miles) «199999» will be displayed permanently. The reading is not lost in case of a power OFF (Battery OFF).

199999 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

10355 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

0 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

TOT

TOT

TOT

Fig. 12

33

«Trip 1» meter This function allows displaying the indication of the partial distance travelled (Km or miles according to the specific application). When this function is accessed and button (1) is kept pressed for 3 seconds, trip meter will be reset. When the reading exceeds 9999.9, distance travelled is reset and the meter automatically starts again.

Note When this reading is reset, also «Average

Consumption», «Average Speed» and «Trip Time» functions are reset.

Note Whenever the system unit of measurement is

changed from the «SET UNITS» function of the Setting menu or in case of power off (Battery Off), the distance travelled is reset and the meter starts counting from zero again (considering the new set units of measurement).

9999.9 16.33TRIP1 CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC1

1

Fig. 13

34

«Trip 2» meter This function allows displaying the indication of the partial distance travelled (Km or miles according to the specific application). When this function is accessed and button (1) is kept pressed for 3 seconds, trip meter will be reset. When the reading exceeds 9999.9, distance travelled is reset and the meter automatically starts again.

Note Whenever the system unit of measurement is

changed from the «SET UNITS» function of the Setting menu or in case of power off (Battery Off), the distance travelled is reset and the meter starts counting from zero again (considering the new set units of measurement).

2

9999.9 16.33TRIP2 CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

1

Fig. 14

35

«RANGE» indicator — Estimate of the distance that can be covered This function estimates the distance that can be run depending on the quantity of fuel measured by the probe in the tank and on the average consumption measured in the last period. This indication can be a value between 0 km and 340 km (approximate value) for the EU versions, or between 0 km and 320 km (approximate value) for the US versions.

9999.9 16.33RANGE CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

Fig. 15

36

Indicator «CONS. AVG» — Average fuel consumption This function indicates vehicle average fuel consumption. The calculation is made considering the quantity of fuel used and the distance travelled since Trip 1 was last reset. When Trip 1 is reset, the value is reset and the first value available is displayed 10 seconds after the reset. During the first 10 seconds, when the value is not yet available, the display will show a string of dashes «- — -«. Value is indicated in «L / 100» (litres / 100 Km). The active calculation phase occurs when the engine is running and the motorcycle is stopped (moments when the motorcycle is not moving and the engine is OFF are not considered).

Note It is possible to change the units of

measurement for «Consumption» (both average and instantaneous together) from L/100 to km/L through the Setting menu, using the «SET UNITS» function.

10355 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

Fig. 16

37

Indicator «CONS.» — Instantaneous fuel consumption This function indicates vehicle instant fuel consumption. The calculation is made considering the quantity of fuel used and the distance travelled during the last second. Value is indicated in «L / 100» (litres / 100 Km). The active calculation phase only occurs when the engine is running and the motorcycle is moving (moments when the motorcycle is not moving when speed is equal to 0 and/or when the engine is OFF are not considered). When the calculation is not made, a string of dashes is displayed «- -.-«.

Note It is possible to change the units of

measurement for «Consumption» (both average and instantaneous together) from L/100 to km/L through the Setting menu, using the «SET UNITS» function.

10355 16.33TOT CONS.

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

Fig. 17

38

Indicator «SPEED AVG» — Average speed This function indicates vehicle average speed. The calculation considers the distance and time since Trip 1 was last reset. When Trip 1 is reset, the value is reset and the first value available is displayed 10 seconds after the reset. During the first 10 seconds, when the value is not yet available, the display will show a string of dashes «- -.-«. The active calculation phase occurs when the engine is running even if the motorcycle is stopped (moments when the motorcycle is not moving and the engine is OFF are not considered). The calculated value is then displayed increased by 5% to be aligned with vehicle speed indication.

Note It is possible to change the units of

measurement of «speed» (and «distance» travelled) from Km/h (and Km) to mph (and miles) through the Setting menu, using the «SET UNITS» Function.

10355 85.43TOT SPEED AVG

KM/h

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

Fig. 18

39

Indicator «TRIP TIME» — Trip time This function indicates vehicle trip time. The calculation considers the time since Trip 1 was last reset. When Trip 1 is reset, this value is reset as well. The calculation active phase occurs when the engine is running even if the motorcycle is stopped (the time is automatically stopped when the motorcycle is not moving and the engine is OFF and restarts when the counting active phase starts again). When the reading exceeds 511:00 (511 hours and 00 minutes), the meter is reset and automatically starts counting from 0 again.

Note If you change the unit of measurement for an

item connected to «speed» (and distance) or «consumption» using the «SET UNITS» function of the Setting menu, the trip time value will be automatically reset.

10355 11:003TOT TRIP TIME

h

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

Fig. 19

40

Indicator «AIR» — Air temperature This function allows displaying ambient temperature. Displaying range: -39 C +124 C. In case of sensor FAULT (-40C, +125C or disconnected) a string of steady dashes «- — -» will be displayed and the «Engine/Vehicle Diagnosis — EOBD» light will come on.

Note When the motorcycle is stopped, the engine

heat could influence the displayed temperature.

10355 25.33TOT AIR

C

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

Fig. 20

10355 —3TOT AIR

C

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

Fig. 21

41

When temperature reading drops until reaching 4C (39F), the ice warning will be enabled. This indication will be disabled as soon as temperature rises up to 6C (43F).

Warning This warning does not eliminate the possibility

of icy road areas even with temperatures above 4C (39F); when ambient temperature is «low», ride responsibly, especially on road areas not exposed to sunlight and/or on bridges.

Fig. 22

42

Engaged gear indicator This function allows displaying gears (A). Instrument panel receives the information and indicates the engaged gear or «N» for neutral.

Note In case of gear sensor «error», a dash «-» (not

flashing) will be displayed. 10355 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

A

Fig. 23

43

«Riding Style set» indication This function indicates the «Riding mode» set on vehicle. THREE different «Riding modes» are available: SPORT, TOURING and URBAN. Each riding mode can be changed through the «RIDING MODE» function. The «background» indicating the riding mode (SPORT, TOURING or URBAN) (A) is blue if the parameters connected to the currently-set riding mode are the default ones (set by Ducati) or yellow if one or more parameters have been changed (customised) through the Setting menu, using «RIDING MODE» function.

10355 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

A

Fig. 24

44

Indication if the «LAP» function is active/not active This function indicates if the «LAP» (Lap time) function is enabled. When «LAP» is off, function is disabled. «LAP» Function can be enabled through the «LAP» Function of the Setting menu.

10355

LAP

16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

Fig. 25

45

«SIDE STAND» indication This indication warns the rider that the side stand is open. If side stand Sensor error is present on the CAN line, the display shows a stand down/open warning «SIDE STAND», turns on the EOBD light and displays the corresponding error «Side stand sensor». If instrument panel does not receive side stand status (no frame), the indication will flash to indicate an undefined status.

10355 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

SIDE STAND

Fig. 26

46

«FUEL LEVEL» indication Suitable icons inform the rider of the quantity of fuel in the tank. This indication is only present if MENU 2 is active. With MENU 2 active, if a level sensor error is triggered, no matter the fuel level output or calculated, as well as in case of CAN no frame or BUS- Off, the display will still show the level icon in the fixed status «off» (and sensor error warning will be displayed as well).

10355 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

SIDE STAND

Fig. 27

47

Icon Icon background colour

Level Fuel quantity- EU version

Fuel quantity- US version

Green Level 5 13.6 L 12.5 L

Green Level 4 10.1 L 9.4 L

Green Level 3 6.6 L 6.3 L

Green Level 2 3.1 L 3.1 L

Yellow Level 1 (reserve) 1.1 L 1.1 L

/

Yellow / White «Refuelling necessa- ry» Night mode

(blink)

< 1.1 L < 1.1 L

48

/

Yellow / Black «Refuelling necessa- ry» Day mode (blink)

< 1.1 L < 1.1 L

Black Fuel level sensor er- ror Day mode

White Fuel level sensor er- ror Night mode

49

«Riding Mode» function (riding style change) This function allows changing vehicle riding mode. A different traction control (DTC — Ducati Traction Control) intervention level and a different engine power delivery (Engine) are associated to each riding mode. To change motorcycle riding mode, simply press reset button (4) once and the «RIDING MODE» menu will be displayed. Press the same reset button (4) several times to select the desired riding mode. To confirm the selected riding mode, keep the same button pressed for 3 seconds. If throttle twistgrip is closed (vehicle stopped) the riding mode is immediately changed; while if throttle twistgrip is open (vehicle moving) the «CLOSE THROTTLE TO ACTIVATE» message will be displayed, asking you to close the throttle. This message stays on for 5 seconds, during which you will have to close the throttle to enable the new riding mode. Once the 5 seconds have elapsed, if throttle twistgrip is not closed, the procedure will be aborted (riding mode will not be changed).

If the «RIDING MODE» menu is enabled and the reset button (4) is not pressed for 10 consecutive seconds, instrument panel will automatically quit the page, and no change will be made.

Warning Ducati recommends changing the Riding mode

when the motorcycle is stopped. If the riding mode is changed while riding, be very careful (it is recommended to change the Riding mode at a low speed).

50

SPORT TOURING

RIDING MODE URBAN

SPORT TOURING

RIDING MODE URBAN CLOSE THROTTLE TO ACTIVATE

RIDING MODE

CLOSE THROTTLE TO ACTIVATE

RIDING MODE

CLOSE THROTTLE TO ACTIVATE

RIDING MODE SPORT TOURING

RIDING MODE URBAN

10355 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

10355 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

TOURING 03 DTC

10355 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

URBAN 03 DTC

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

Fig. 28

51

Maintenance indicator This function indicates that the vehicle is about to or has travelled a distance for which an Authorised Ducati Service Centre should be contacted to have the general maintenance or oil change performed.

Maintenance table

Indicator Kilometres travelled

Miles travel- led

count down -1000 Desmo

service

count down -1000 Oil serv-

ice

Desmo serv- ice

Oil service

1 1000 621

2 11000 6835

12000 7456

3 23000 14291

24000 14912

4 35000 21748

36000 22369

5 47000 29204

48000 29826

6 59000 36661

60000 37282

7 71000 44117

52

Indicator Kilometres travelled

Miles travel- led

count down -1000 Desmo

service

count down -1000 Oil serv-

ice

Desmo serv- ice

Oil service

72000 44739

8 83000 51574

84000 52195

9 95000 59030

96000 59651

53

First warning — OIL SERVICE 1000 Km The first indication is enabled when the odometer counter reaches the first 1000 km (600 miles). The (red) indication is enabled upon each Key-On for 10 seconds in the «large» size (A), and then continues being displayed in the small size (B) until «reset».

Warning Indication can be reset only by the Ducati Dealer

or Authorised Service Centre carrying out the maintenance operations.

10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT

03 DTC

OIL

SERVICE

A

Fig. 29

10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

16.3 CONS.AVG

KM/L

OIL SERVICE

B

Fig. 30

54

Residual range indication when the SERVICE is due After having reset the «first» OIL SERVICE indication (1000 km), upon each Key-On, system will display the indication relating to the next service (OIL SERVICE «A» and «B» or DESMO SERVICE «C» and «D») and the distance left. The (A) and (C) (green) indication is enabled upon each Key-On for 2 seconds; while when 1000 km are left before threshold is reached, (B) and (D) (amber yellow) indication is enabled upon each Key-On for 5 seconds.

Warning Indication can be reset only by the Ducati Dealer

or Authorised Service Centre carrying out the maintenance operations.

55

10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT

03 DTC

— 10500

Km 10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT

03 DTC

— 1000

Km

10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT

03 DTC

— 10500

Km 10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT

03 DTC

— 1000

Km

BA

C D

Fig. 31

56

Indication of range reached for SERVICE When the distance threshold requiring a service is reached, upon every Key-On system displays the indication relating to the service required (OIL SERVICE «A» and «B» or DESMO SERVICE «C» and «D»). The (red) indication is enabled upon each Key-On for 10 seconds in the «large» size (A) and (C), and then continues being displayed in the small size (B) and (D) until «reset». After reset, system will display the next service indication and the residual distance (as described in previous paragraph).

Warning Indication can be reset only by the Ducati Dealer

or Authorised Service Centre carrying out the maintenance operations.

57

10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

16.3 CONS.AVG

KM/L

OIL SERVICE

10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT

03 DTC

OIL SERVICE

10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT

03 DTC

DESMO SERVICE 10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

16.3 CONS.AVG

KM/L

DESMO SERVICE

A

C D

B

Fig. 32

58

Warning indication (Alarms/Signals) Instrument panel activates, in real time, some warnings / malfunctions which do not nevertheless affect motorcycle correct and safe operation. Upon Key-On (once check routine is completed) one or more «warnings» are displayed, if active. As soon as one «warning» is activated, the (yellow amber) indication is clearly displayed (A) for 10 seconds, and it is then minimised (B). If several warnings are present, they are displayed in «rolling» mode every 3 seconds.

Note When one or more «warnings» are activated, no

warning light will come on.

10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT

LOW BATTERY

03 DTC

10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

LOW BATTERY

16.3 CONS.AVG

KM/L

A

B

Fig. 33

59

The following «warnings» could be displayed:

— «Low» battery level (LOW BATTERY); — «Disabled» Traction Control (DTC OFF); — Hands Free (HF) Key «not acknowledged»; — «Low» battery level of Hands Free (HF) key; — «High» Engine coolant temperature (HIGH TEMP); — Steering unlock error; — Steering still locked (Unlock error).

60

«Low» battery level This (amber yellow) «warning» indicates that vehicle battery is low. It is activated when battery voltage is equal to or lower than 11.0 V.

Note In this case, Ducati recommends charging

battery in the shortest delay using the special instrument as engine could not be started.

LOW BATTERY

Fig. 34

61

Traction Control (DTC) deactivated This (amber yellow) «warning» indicates that DTC (Ducati Traction Control) is disabled.

Note In this case, Ducati recommends paying special

attention while riding as vehicle behaves differently from when the Traction Control is active.

DTC OFF

Fig. 35

62

Hands Free key (HF) not recognised The activation of this (amber yellow) «warning» indicates that the Hands Free system does not detect the active key near the vehicle.

Note In this case, Ducati recommends making sure

that the active key is nearby (and that it was not lost) or that it works properly.

Fig. 36

63

«Low» Hands Free key (HF) battery level The activation of this (amber yellow) «warning» indicates that the Hands Free system has detected that the battery that permits the active key to communicate and turn the vehicle on is almost discharged.

Note In this case, Ducati recommends changing

battery in the shortest delay.

Replace the battery as described in the paragraph «Replacing the active key battery» page 116. Fig. 37

64

«High» engine coolant temperature The activation of this «warning» (amber yellow) indicates that engine coolant temperature is high. Warning is activated when temperature reaches 121C (250F).

Note In this case, Ducati recommends stopping

riding and turning engine immediately off; making sure that fans are working.

Fig. 38

65

Steering release error — Steering still locked This (amber yellow) «warning» indicates that the Hands Free system could not unlock the steering.

Warning In this case, Ducati recommends switching

vehicle off and on again (Key-Off / Key-On), keeping handlebar fully turned. If warning is still present (and steering does not «unlock»), contact a Ducati Dealer or Authorised Service Centre.

UNLOCK ERROR

Fig. 39

66

Instrument panel diagnosis This function allows detecting any vehicle abnormal behaviour. Instrument panel activates, in real time, any vehicle abnormal behaviour (ERRORS). Upon Key-On (once check routine is completed) one or more «ERRORS» are displayed in red (if active, only). As soon as one «error» is activated, the (red) indication is clearly displayed (A) for 10 seconds, and it is then minimised (B). If several errors are present, they are displayed in «rolling» mode every 3 seconds; when one or more errors are activated, the «Engine/Vehicle Diagnosis — EOBD» warning light comes on as well on handlebar instrument panel. Hereinafter is the table of the possible displayed errors. 10355 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

10355 FREE HANDS

GENERIC! FREE HANDS

GENERIC!

3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT

03 DTC

A

B

Fig. 40

67

Warning When one or more errors are displayed, always contact a Ducati Dealer or authorised Service Centre.

WARNING LIGHT

ERROR MESSAGE ERROR

BBS

DTC

BBS/DTC Black Box / Traction Control Control Unit

GEAR SENSOR

GEAR SENSOR Gear sensor

FUEL SENSOR

FUEL SENSOR Fuel level sensor

SPEED SENSOR

SPEED SENSOR Speed sensor

UNKNOWN

DEVICE

UNKNOWN DEVICE Unknown control unit

68

WARNING LIGHT

ERROR MESSAGE ERROR

SIDE STAND

SIDE STAND Side stand switch error

DSB SLAVE

DEVICE DSB SLAVE Handlebar instrument panel not working

DDA

DEVICE DDA DDA error

DSB MASTER

DEVICE DBS MASTER Tank instrument panel not working

FAN

FAN Fan relay

CAN

LINE

CAN LINE CAN communication line

69

WARNING LIGHT

ERROR MESSAGE ERROR

BATTERY

BATTERY Battery voltage (HIGH or LOW)

ABS

DEVICE ABS ABS control unit not working

STOP

LIGHT

STOP LIGHT Rear stop light

ECU

DEVICE ECU ECU control unit not working

ECU

ACCELER POSITION Wrong accelerator position

ECU

ETV Faulty motor relay or throttle motor

70

WARNING LIGHT

ERROR MESSAGE ERROR

ECU

PRESSURE SENSOR Barometric pressure sensor

ECU

ENGINE TEMP. Engine temperature sensor

ECU

T-AIR SENSOR Air temperature sensor

ECU

FUEL INJECT. Injection Relay

ECU

COIL Coil

ECU

INJECTOR Injector

71

WARNING LIGHT

ERROR MESSAGE ERROR

ECU

PICK UP Timing rpm sensor

ECU

LAMBDA Lambda Sensor

ECU

ECU GENERIC ECU error

ECU

KEY HF communication problem

ECU

HANDS FREE GENERIC Hands Free Control Unit error

72

«Setting» menu This menu allows enabling, disabling and setting some vehicle functions. To access the «setting menu» press the button (2) for 3 seconds.

When within this menu no other function can be displayed.

Important For safety reasons, the setting menu can be

accessed only when vehicle speed is below or equal to 20 Km/h; if this menu is accessed and vehicle speed is above 20 Km/h, instrument panel will automatically quit it and shift back to «main» screen.

The setting menu contains the following «items»:

— RIDING MODE — MENU 2 — BACK LIGHT — RPM — PIN CODE — LAP — BATTERY — CLOCK

— SET UNITS — ABS — EXIT

To quit the setting menu, use button (1) or button (2) to select «EXIT» and press the reset button (4).

73

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

MENU 2

ON

OFF EXIT

1

2

2

4

2

4

1

Fig. 41

74

«Riding Mode» customisation This function allows customising each single riding mode. To gain access to this function display the «setting» menu page 73, use buttons (1) or (2) to select the «RIDING MODE» function and press the reset button (4) to shift to next page. Once function is accessed, the three riding modes are displayed; to customise parameters, use buttons (1) or (2) to select the riding mode you want to change and press the reset button (4) to confirm. Customisable parameters are «DTC» (Ducati Traction Control) and «ENGINE». Any parameter change made is saved and remains in the memory also after a Battery-Off. To change DTC parameters, refer to «DTC (Ducati Traction Control)» page 78 paragraph. To change Engine parameters, refer to «ENGINE (Engine power control)» page 83 paragraph. The riding parameters set by Ducati can be restored for each single riding mode through the «DEFAULT» Function. To restore the parameters set by Ducati, see «DEFAULT (Restoring Ducati default parameters)» page 85 paragraph.

Note If one or more parameters have been

customised, when quitting the Setting menu, in the «main» screen, the «background» of the riding mode indication (SPORT, TOURING or URBAN) becomes yellow.

75

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

SPORT TOURING

RIDING MODE

URBAN

EXIT

SPORT TOURING

RIDING MODE

URBAN

EXIT

DTC DEFAULT

TOURING

ENGINE

EXIT

1

2

4

2

4

4

1

Fig. 42

76

Note If parameters were not changed (customised)

or if parameters are restored through the «DEFAULT» function, once Setting menu is quitted, the «background» indicating riding mode (SPORT, TOURING or URBAN) of «main» screen will turn blue.

Warning Changes should only be made to the

parameters by people who are experts in motorcycle set-up; if the parameters are changed accidentally, use the «DEFAULT» function to restore factory settings.

10355 16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

A

Fig. 43

77

DTC (Ducati Traction Control) setting function This function allows you to customise the level of DTC intervention (Ducati Traction Control) or disable it for every riding mode. To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 73, use button (1) or (2) to select the «RIDING MODE» function, and press the reset button (4) to go to next page. Use button (1) or (2) to select the riding style to change and press the reset button (4). use button (1) or (2) to select the «DTC» indication and press the reset button (4) again to confirm selection. When accessing the function, the currently set DTC level appears at the left-hand side of the display, inside a rectangle (ex.: DTC 1). Use button (1) or (2) to select the new intervention level (1 to 8) or OFF to disable the Traction Control; after selecting the new setting, press the reset button (4) to highlight «MEMORY» indication. At this point, store the new setting by pressing the reset button (4) for 3 seconds with «MEMORY» displayed. If the setting has been stored successfully, the display will show «MEMORIZED» in green for 2

seconds and the «EXIT» option will be highlighted automatically. To exit the setting function, press the reset button (4) when «EXIT» is highlighted.

78

SPORT TOURING

RIDING MODE

URBAN

EXIT

1

2

4

2 1

4

4

4

4

MEMORYDTC OFFOFF

SPORT

ENGINE 1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8 EXIT

MEMORYDTC OFFOFF

SPORT

ENGINE 1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8 EXIT

DTC DEFAULT

SPORT

ENGINE

EXIT

MEMORIZEDDTC OFFOFF

SPORT

ENGINE 1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8 EXIT

MEMORIZEDDTC OFFOFF

SPORT

ENGINE 1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8 EXIT

MEMORYDTC OFFOFF

SPORT

ENGINE 1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8 EXIT

Fig. 44

79

The DTC intervention increases, passing from level 1 to level 8. The following table indicates the most suitable level of DTC intervention for the various riding types as well as the default settings in the «RIDING MODE» that can be selected by the rider:

DTC LEVEL RIDING MODE USE DEFAULT?

1 Sport Sporty riding on a road for expert users and on track

It is the default setting of the SPORT RIDING MODE

2 Sport-Touring Riding on a road for expert users

/

3 Touring Normal riding on a road It is the default setting of the TOURING RIDING MODE

4 Touring 2 Normal riding on a road for less expert users

/

5 Urban Riding in town It is the default setting of the URBAN RIDING MODE

6 Urban 2 Riding in town for less ex- pert users

/

7 Wet Riding with damp ground /

8 Rain Riding with wet ground /

80

Tips on how to select the sensitivity level

Warning The 8 levels of the DTC system your motorcycle

is equipped with were calibrated with original equipment tyres (make, model and size). The use of tyres of different size to the original tyres may alter the operating characteristics of the system.

Motorcycle original tyres: (front 120/70-17 — rear 240/45-17).

In the case of minor differences, such as for example tyres of a different make and/or model than the OE ones, but with the same size (rear = 240/45-17; front = 120/70-17), it may be sufficient to simply select the suitable level setting from those available to restore optimal system operation. If tyres of a different size class are used or if the tyre dimensions differ significantly from the original tyres, it may be that the system operation is affected to the point where none of the 8 available level settings will give satisfactory results. In this case is it is advisable to deactivate the traction control system. If level 8 is selected, the DTC control unit will kick in at the slightest hint that the rear wheel is starting to spin.

Between level 8 and level 1 there are a further 6 intermediate levels. The level of DTC intervention decreases in equal steps from level 8 to level 1. Levels 1 and 2 are specifically designed for OFF- ROAD conditions and do not ensure a suitable control with poor grip on asphalt. When level 3 or 4 is selected the DTC control unit will allow the rear wheel to spin and also slide sideways on exiting a corner; we recommend that this setting is only used by very experienced riders on the track. The choice of the correct level depends on 3 main variables:

1) The grip (type of tyre, amount of tyre wear, the road/track surface, weather conditions, etc.);

2) The characteristics of the path/circuit (bends all taken at similar speeds or at very different speeds);

3) The riding mode (whether the rider has a «smooth» or a «rough» style).

The relation of the DTC intervention level to grip conditions: The choice of level setting depends greatly on the grip conditions of the track/circuit (see below, tips for use on the track and on the road).

81

The relation of the DTC intervention level to the circuit characteristics: If all the corners on the track/circuit can be taken at a similar speed, it will be easier to find an intervention level that is satisfactory for every bend; on the other hand, if the track has, for example, one corner that is much slower than all the others, it will be necessary to find a compromise level (on the slow corner the DTC will tend to kick in more than on the faster corners).

The relation of the DTC intervention level to riding mode: The DTC will tend to kick in more with a «smooth» riding style, where the bike is leaned over further, rather than with a «rough» style, where the bike is straightened up as quickly as possible when exiting a turn.

Tips for use on the track

We recommend that level 8 is used for a couple of full laps (to allow the tyres to warm up) in order to get used to the system. Then try levels 7, 6, etc., in succession until you identify the DTC sensitivity level that suits you best (always try each level for at least two laps to allow the tyres to warm up).

Once you have found a satisfactory setting for all the corners except one or two slow ones, where the system tends to kick in and control too much, you can try to modify your riding style slightly to a more «rough» approach to cornering i.e. straighten up more rapidly on exiting the corner, instead of immediately trying a different level setting.

Tips for use on the road

Activate the DTC, select level 8 and ride the motorcycle in your usual style; if the level of DTC sensitivity seems excessive, try reducing the setting to level 7, 6, etc., until you find the level that suits you best. If changes occur in the grip conditions and/or circuit characteristics and/or your riding style, and the level setting is no longer suitable, switch to the next level up or down and proceed to determine the best setting (e.g. if with level 7 the DTC intervention seems excessive, switch to level 6; alternatively, if on level 7 you cannot perceive any DTC intervention, switch to level 8).

82

ENGINE setting function (Engine Power Control) This function allows customising ENGINE power and delivery. To gain access to this function display the «setting» menu page 73, use buttons (1) or (2) to select the «RIDING MODE» function and press the reset button (4) to shift to next page. Select the riding mode you wish to change using button (1) or (2) and press the reset button (4) to shift to next page; now use buttons (1) or (2) to select the «ENGINE» indication and press the reset button (4) again to confirm selection. Once function is accessed, engine setting (ENGINE 162 HIGH, 162 LOW or 100 HP) will be displayed on the right side inside a rectangle.

Note In France and Japan versions, display will show

settings (ENGINE HIGH, MIDDLE or LOW).

Use buttons (1) or (2) to select one of the three engine settings; once the new setting has been selected, press the reset button (4) to highlight «MEMORY».

Now store the new setting by keeping the reset button (4) pressed for 3 seconds with «MEMORY» highlighted. If setting has been stored successfully, «MEMORIZED» will appear in green for 2 seconds, and «EXIT» will be automatically highlighted. To quit the setting function, press the reset button (4) with «EXIT» highlighted.

83

SPORT TOURING

RIDING MODE

URBAN

EXIT

DTC MEMORY

SPORT

ENGINE

162 HIGH

EXIT

162 HIGH

162 LOW

100 HP

DTC MEMORY

SPORT

ENGINE

162 HIGH

EXIT

162 HIGH

162 LOW

100 HP

DTC MEMORY

SPORT

ENGINE

162 HIGH

EXIT

162 HIGH

162 LOW

100 HP

DTC MEMORIZED

SPORT

ENGINE

162 LOW

EXIT

162 HIGH

162 LOW

100 HP

DTC MEMORIZED

SPORT

ENGINE

162 LOW

EXIT

162 HIGH

162 LOW

100 HP

ENGINE

HIGH

HIGH

MIDDLE

LOW

1

2

4

2 1

4

4

4

4

DTC DEFAULT

SPORT

ENGINE

EXIT

Fig. 45

84

DEFAULT function (Resetting Ducati default parameters) This function resets the parameters set by Ducati for each riding style. To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 73, use button (1) or (2) to select the «RIDING MODE» function, and press the reset button (4) to go to next page. Use button (1) or (2) to select the riding mode to be reset to default (initial) parameters and press button (4) to go to the next page; now use button (1) or (2) to select the «DEFAULT» indication. To restore original default parameters, keep the reset button (4) pressed for 3 seconds. To restore parameters, the system needs approximately 3 seconds; meanwhile, «PLEASE WAIT…» indication is displayed. Once procedure is completed, the display shows «DEFAULT OK» to confirm that parameters have been reset to factory settings.

DTC DEFAULT

SPORT

ENGINE

EXIT

PLEASE WAIT…

DEFAULT OK

DTC DEFAULT

SPORT

ENGINE

EXIT

SPORT TOURING

RIDING MODE

URBAN

EXIT

4

4

4

4

Fig. 46

85

Important This procedure restores the parameters of all

riding modes.

To exit the setting function, press the reset button (4) when «EXIT» is highlighted.

86

Menu 2 On/Off function This function allows disabling «OFF» Menu 2 (B) / re- enabling «ON» Menu 2 (A). When Menu 2 is disabled, the average consumption (CONS.AVG), the instant consumption (CONS.), the average speed (SPEED AVG), the trip time (TRIP TIME) and the air temperature (AIR) functions will no longer be displayed on «main screen». Meters will nevertheless continue calculating all these functions so that, once Menu 2 is activated again, all data will be updated and consistent.

3TOT

KM 50355 162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT

03 DTC

10355

LAP

16.33TOT CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

A

B

Fig. 47

87

To gain access to this function display the «setting» menu page 73, use buttons (1) or (2) to select the «MENU 2» function and press the reset button (4) to shift to next page. Function status is highlighted on the display (green if ON or yellow if OFF). Use buttons (1) or (2) to move left arrow on the new setting, and press the reset button (4) to confirm it. To quit the setting function, press the reset button (4) with «EXIT» highlighted.

4

4

1 2

4

4

1

2

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK DDA

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

MENU 2

ON

OFF EXIT

MENU 2

ON

OFF EXIT

MENU 2

ON

OFF EXIT

MENU 2

ON

OFF EXIT

Fig. 48

88

Background setting function for the instrument panel on tank — DASHBOARD 1 This function allows setting the «background» of the instrument panel on tank. To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 73, use button (1) or (2) to select the «BACK LIGHT» function and press the reset button (4) to go to next page. Use button (1) or (2) to select the «DASHBOARD 1» function and confirm by pressing the reset button (4). Once you enter the «DASHBOARD 1» function, setting is highlighted on the display (DAY, NIGHT or AUTO in green); use button (1) or (2) to shift the arrow on the left onto the new setting and confirm by pressing the reset button (4). To exit the setting function, press the reset button (4) when «EXIT» is highlighted.

«DAY» setting: instrument panel background becomes permanently «white» to improve readout view — recommended with bright exterior lighting. «NIGHT» setting: instrument panel background becomes permanently «black» for a more dimmed visibility — recommended with poor exterior lighting and/or dark.

«AUTO» setting: instrument panel background is set automatically according to exterior lighting conditions (detected by a sensor) and will be «black» for a more dimmed visibility with poor exterior lighting and «white» for an improved readout view with bright exterior lighting.

Note In case of battery off, when the voltage is

restored and upon next Key-On, back lighting will always be set on «AUTO» mode.

89

DASHBOARD 1

NIGHT

AUTO EXIT

DAYRIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK DDA

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

BACK LIGHT

DASHBOARD 1 DASHBOARD 2

EXIT

DASHBOARD 1

NIGHT

DAY

AUTO EXIT

DAY

DASHBOARD 1

NIGHT

AUTO EXIT

DASHBOARD 1

NIGHT

AUTO EXIT

DAY

1

2

4

4

4

1

4

4

2

Fig. 49

90

Backlighting setting function for the instrument panel on handlebar — DASHBOARD 2 This function allows backlighting setting of the instrument panel on handlebar. To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 73, use button (1) or (2) to select the «BACK LIGHT» and press reset button (4) to go to next page. Use button (1) or (2) to select the «DASHBOARD 2» function and confirm by pressing the reset button (4). Once you enter the «DASHBOARD 2» function, setting is highlighted on the display (MAX, MIDDLE or MIN in green); use button (1) or (2) to shift the arrow on the left onto the new setting and confirm by pressing the reset button (4). To exit the setting function, press the reset button (4) when «EXIT» is highlighted.

Select «MAX» setting and the background of the instrument panel on handlebar permanently sets backlighting to maximum power to improve readout view — recommended with bright exterior lighting. Select «MIDDLE» setting and the background of the instrument panel on handlebar permanently sets reduced backlighting to 30% of its maximum power

for dimmed visibility — recommended with poor exterior lighting. Select «MIN» setting and the background of the instrument panel on handlebar permanently sets reduced backlighting to 50% of its maximum power for dimmed visibility — recommended with very poor exterior lighting and/or dark.

91

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK DDA

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

BACK LIGHT

DASHBOARD 1 DASHBOARD 2

EXIT

1

2

4

4

4

1

4

4

2

DASHBOARD 2

MIDDLE

MAX

MIN EXIT

DASHBOARD 2

MIDDLE

MAX

MIN EXIT

DASHBOARD 2

MIDDLE

MAX

MIN EXIT

DASHBOARD 2

MIDDLE

MAX

MIN EXIT

Fig. 50

92

Digital RPM indication function This function displays the number of RPM for improved accuracy when setting idle rpm. To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 73, use button (1) or (2) to select the «RPM» function and press the reset button (4) to confirm. The display shows the numerical value of the RPM with a precision of 50 rpm. To exit the setting function, press the reset button (4) when «EXIT» is highlighted.

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK DDA

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

RPM

EXIT

4250

4

4

4

Fig. 51

93

LAP Activation/Deactivation function (lap time) This function allows enabling/disabling LAP (lap time) function. To gain access to this function display the «setting» menu page 73, use buttons (1) or (2) to select the «LAP» function and press the reset button (4) to shift to next page. Function status is highlighted on the display (green if ON or yellow if OFF); use buttons (1) or (2) to move the left arrow on the new setting, and press the reset button (4) to confirm. To quit the setting function, press the reset button (4) with «EXIT» highlighted.

If «OFF» is saved, LAP function will be disabled. If «ON» is saved, LAP function will be enabled (see «LAP Recording» page 96 paragraph).

Note When «LAP» function is active, flash button (3)

takes on the dual function of high beam «FLASH» and LAP timer Start / Stop.

94

1

2

4

4

4

1 2

4

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK DDA

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

LAP

ON

OFF

LAP DATA

EXIT

LAP

ON

OFF

LAP DATA

EXIT

LAP

ON

OFF

LAP DATA

EXIT

LAP

ON

OFF

LAP DATA

EXIT

3

Fig. 52

95

LAP registration function This function describes the «LAP» time recording procedure. If the function was Enabled (see «LAP enabling / disabling» page 94) lap time can be recorded as follows:

— the first time rider presses the flash (3) button, the «timer» of the first lap starts and «LAP START» will be displayed flashing on the instrument panel for 4 seconds, then the «previous» screen will appear again;

— from this moment onwards, every time the flash button (3) is pressed, the display automatically shows for 10 seconds the number and time of the lap, then goes back to the «previous» screen.

30 laps max. can be recorded. If memory is full, whenever the flash button (3) is pressed, the instrument panel does not record any lap time and «LAP FULL» will be displayed flashing for 4 seconds until lap times are reset. When the «LAP» function is disabled, the current «lap» is not recorded. If the LAP function is enabled and vehicle is suddenly stopped (Key-Off), function will be automatically disabled (even if timer was active, the

current «lap» will not be recorded). If the time is never «stopped», it will roll over upon reaching 9 minutes, 59 seconds and 99 hundredths; the lap timer starts counting from 0 (zero) and will keep running until the recording function is disabled. If, on the contrary, the LAP function is enabled and «memory» was not reset, but recorded laps are less than 30 (example: 18 recorded laps) the Instrument Panel records any left lap until memory is full (in this case 12 further laps can be recorded). In this function only the lap times being recorded are displayed; other data are anyway recorded (MAX speed and MAX rpm), which can be later displayed in the «LAP DATA» (recorded LAP displaying) function.

96

10355 16.33TOT

LAP

CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

10355 16.33TOT

LAP START

CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

10355 16.33TOT

LAP FULL

CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC 10355 16.33TOT

LAP

CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

10355 16.33TOT

LAP

CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

10355 16.33TOT

LAP 01 — 35722

CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

10355 16.33TOT

LAP 30 — 25532

CONS.AVG

KM/L

162 HIGH

GEAR

SPORT 03 DTC

3

3

3

3

3

Fig. 53

97

Stored LAP display function This function displays the stored LAPs. To access the function it is necessary to view the setting menu page page 73, use button (1) or (2) to select the «LAP» function and press reset button (4) to go to next page. Use button (1) or (2) to select LAP DATA indication and press the reset button again (4) to enter the page showing the previously recorded lap times. The instrument panel displays the information as follows:

— at top left, the number of the displayed lap (ex.: LAP N.01);

— at bottom left, a rectangle inside which is the lap time (TIME), top speed in that lap (SPEED MAX) and top rpm in the same lap (RPM MAX);

— on the right, use button (1) or (2) to select NEXT (so that every time the reset button (4) is pressed, the next lap is displayed) or PREV (so that every time the reset button (4) is pressed, the previous lap is displayed);

To exit, select EXIT and press the reset button (4).

Note The MAX stored speed is the one shown on the

display (increased by 5%).

If no lap times are saved in memory, NO LAP indication is displayed and lap timer will indicate -.- -.- -, MAX rpm will be = — — — — — — and MAX speed = — — — — -.

Note If the stored times are deleted while the LAP

function is active, it will be automatically deactivated.

98

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK DDA

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

LAP

ON

OFF

LAP DATA

EXIT

LAP

ON

OFF

LAP DATA

EXIT

LAP DATA

NEXT

PREVLAP N.01

TIME: 35522

SPEED MAX: 192 KM/H

RPM MAX: 6850 ERASE EXIT

LAP DATA

NEXT

PREVLAP N.30

TIME: 24338

SPEED MAX: 212 KM/H

RPM MAX: 7550 ERASE EXIT

LAP DATA

NEXT

PREVLAP N.30

TIME: 24338

SPEED MAX: 212 KM/H

RPM MAX: 7550 ERASE EXIT

LAP DATA

NEXT

PREVLAP N.30

TIME: 24338

SPEED MAX: 212 KM/H

RPM MAX: 7550 ERASE EXIT

1

2

4

4

4

1 2

1 2

4

Fig. 54

99

Stored LAP erase function This function erases the stored LAPs. To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 73, use button (1) or (2) to select the «LAP» function and press reset button (4) to go to next page. Use button (1) or (2) to select «LAP DATA» indication and press the reset button again (4) to enter the page showing the previously recorded lap times. Highlight the «ERASE» item, use button (1) or (2) to scroll through the stored LAPs to erase and press the reset button (4) for 3 seconds. Now, on the left-hand side of the display you have «PLEASE WAIT» and then, to confirm deletion, «ERASE OK» appears for 2 seconds. You will notice that no stored data will be present any more and «NO LAP» message will be displayed. To exit, select «EXIT» and press the reset button (4).

100

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK DDA

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

LAP

ON

OFF

LAP DATA

EXIT

LAP

ON

OFF

LAP DATA

EXIT

1

2

4

4

4

4

1 2

4

LAP DATA

NEXT

PREVLAP N.30

TIME: 24388

SPEED MAX: 212 KM/H

RPM MAX: 7550 ERASE EXIT

LAP DATA

NEXTPLEASE WAIT…

ERASE OK

PREV

ERASE EXIT

LAP DATA

NEXT

PREV

ERASE EXIT

LAP DATA

NEXT

PREVNO LAP

TIME: — — —

SPEED MAX: — KM/H

RPM MAX: —-

NO LAP

TIME: — — —

SPEED MAX: — KM/H

RPM MAX: —-

ERASE EXIT

LAP DATA

NEXT

PREV

ERASE EXIT

Fig. 55

101

Battery voltage indicator (BATTERY) This function describes the battery voltage indicator. To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 73, use button (1) or (2) to select the «BATTERY» function and press the reset button (4) to confirm. The information will be displayed as follows:

— if battery voltage is between 11.8 and 14.9 Volt the reading will be displayed steady;

— if battery voltage is between 11.0 and 11.7 Volt the reading will be displayed flashing;

— if battery voltage is between 15.0 and 16.0 Volt the reading will be displayed flashing;

102

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK DDA

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

BATTERY

EXIT

12.3 VOLT

4

1

2

4

4

Fig. 56

103

— if battery voltage is equal to or less than 10.9 Volt, «LOW» is shown flashing and the «Vehicle/Engine Diagnosis — EOBD» light comes on;

— if battery voltage is equal to or greater than 16.1 Volt, «HIGH» is shown flashing and the » Vehicle/ Engine Diagnosis — EOBD» light comes on.

Note If the value is not available, a string of dashes «-

— -» will be displayed.

BATTERY

EXIT

LOW

Fig. 57

104

Clock setting function This function sets the clock. To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 73, use button (1) or (2) to select the «CLOCK» function and press the reset button (4) to confirm. In the following screen the message «SETTING» is highlighted in green (A); now, press the reset button (4) for 3 seconds to edit the time displayed on the instrument panel on handlebar, and the «SETTING» indication highlighting becomes grey (B).

Clock setting

On entering this mode, the message «AM» will flash; if you press button (2) the message «PM» flashes; press button (2) again to go back to the previous step (if it is 00:00, when switching from AM to PM, 12:00 will be displayed); press button (1) to access hour setting mode, the hours start flashing; each time you press button (2), the digit will increase by one hour. If button (2) is kept pressed, the number increases cyclically in steps of one hour every second (when the button is held depressed, the hours do not flash). Pressing button (1) gives access to the minute setting mode; minutes start to flash. Each time you press the button (2), the digit will increase by 1 minute. If you

hold the button (2) down , the count increases cyclically in steps of 1 minute every second. If the button (2) is held depressed for over 5 seconds, minutes will increase by 1 minute every 100 m (while the button (2) is held depressed, the seconds will not flash). If you press button (1) setting is completed and the instrument panel on tank display «SETTING» item is again highlighted in green (C). To exit, select «EXIT» and press the reset button (4).

Note In case of battery off, when the Voltage is

restored and upon next Key-On, clock will have to be set again (it will automatically start counting from 00:00).

105

CLOCK

SETTING

EXIT

CLOCK

SETTING

EXIT

CLOCK

SETTING

EXIT

CLOCK

SETTING

EXIT

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK DDA

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

A 4

4

4

C

B

4

Fig. 58

106

Units of measurement modification function This function allows changing the units of measurement of the displayed values. To gain access to this function display the «setting» menu page 73, use buttons (1) or (2) to select the «SET UNITS» function and press the reset button (4) to shift to next page. Use buttons (1) or (2) to select the value for which you wish to change the unit of measurement and press the reset button (4) again. Instrument panel displays the values that can be changed; use buttons (1) or (2) to select the value you wish to change, and press the reset button (4) again.

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK DDA

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

SETTING UNITS

EXIT

TEMPERATURE CONSUMPTIONSPEED

4

1

2

4

Fig. 59

107

«SPEED» setting

This function allows to change the units of measurement of speed (and hence even the ones of distance travelled). The currently set unit of measurement is highlighted in green on the display; use buttons (1) or (2) to move the left arrow on the new setting, and press the reset button (4) to confirm. If setting is stored, when main screen is displayed again, the new units of measurement (if any) will be shown.

1) Km/h: if this unit is set, the following values will have the same units of measurement:

— TOT, TRIP1, TRIP2, TRIP FUEL: Km — Vehicle Speed and AVERAGE Speed (SPEED

AVG): Km/h

2) mph: if this unit is set, the following values will have the same units of measurement:

— TOT, TRIP1, TRIP2, TRIP FUEL: miles — Vehicle Speed and AVERAGE Speed (SPEED

AVG): mph.

To quit the setting function, press the reset button (4) with «EXIT» highlighted.

«TEMP» setting

This function allows you to change the units of measurement of the temperature. The currently set unit of measurement is highlighted in green on the display; use buttons (1) or (2) to move the left arrow on the new setting, and press the reset button (4) to confirm. If setting is stored, when main screen is displayed again, the new units of measurement (if any) will be shown.

3) C: if this unit is set, the following values will have the same units of measurement:

— Engine coolant temperature and T_AIR: C

4) F: if this unit is set, the following values will have the same units of measurement:

— Engine coolant temperature and T_AIR: F

To quit the setting function, press the reset button (4) with «EXIT» highlighted.

«CONS.» setting

108

This function allows changing the units of measurement of the Average and Instant Fuel Consumption. The currently set unit of measurement is highlighted in green on the display; use buttons (1) or (2) to move the left arrow on the new setting, and press the reset button (4) to confirm. If setting is stored, when main screen is displayed again, the new units of measurement (if any) will be shown.

5) Km/L: if this unit is set, the following values will have the same units of measurement:

— CONS. and CONS. AVG.: Km/L

6) L/100: if this unit is set, the following values will have the same units of measurement:

— CONS. and CONS. AVG: L/100

7) mpgal UK: if this unit is set, the following values will have the same units of measurement:

— CONS. and CONS. AVG: mpgal UK

8) mpgal USA: if this unit is set, the following values will have the same units of measurement:

— CONS. and CONS. AVG: mpgal USA

To quit the setting function, press the reset button (4) with «EXIT» highlighted.

109

SETTING UNITS

EXIT

TEMPERATURESPEED

SETTING UNITS

EXIT

TEMPERATURESPEED

SETTING UNITS

EXIT

TEMPERATURESPEED

SPEED

EXIT

Km/h

mph

TEMPERATURE

EXIT

C

F

CONSUMPTION

EXIT

L/100 Km

Km/L

mpg (UK)

mpg (USA)

EXIT

L/100 Km

Km/L

mpg (UK)

mpg (USA)

SPEED

EXIT

Km/h

mph

TEMPERATURE

EXIT

C

F

SPEED

EXIT

Km/h

mph

TEMPERATURE

EXIT

C

F

CONSUMPTION

CONSUMPTION

CONSUMPTION

CONSUMPTION

1

1

1

2

2

2 4

4

1

2

1

1

4

4

2

4

4

4

2

4

Fig. 60

110

ABS disabling function This function disables or enables the ABS. To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 73, use button (1) or (2) to select the «ABS» function and press reset button (4) to go to next page. The function setting is highlighted on the display (ON in green or OFF in yellow); use button (1) or (2) to shift the arrow on the left onto the new setting and confirm by keeping the reset button (4) pressed for 3 seconds. After these 3 seconds the system checks whether the request was actually complied with; during the check the display will show the message «PLEASE WAIT». The new condition will be displayed after check time.

Note If the disabling request was not completed

successfully, repeat the procedure. If the problem persists, contact a Ducati Dealer or Authorised Service Centre.

To exit the setting function, press the reset button (4) when «EXIT» is highlighted.

111

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK DDA

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

ABS

EXITOFF

ON

ABS

EXITOFF

ON

ABS

PLEASE WAIT… EXIT

ABS

EXITOFF

ON

ABS

EXITOFF

ON

1

2

4

4

4

1

2

Fig. 61

112

The Immobilizer system For improved anti-theft protection, the motorcycle is equipped with an IMMOBILIZER, an electronic system that inhibits engine operation whenever the ignition switch is turned off. The grip of each ignition key contains an electronic device that modulates the output signal from a special antenna located under the seat when the ignition is switched On. The modulated signal acts as a password (which is different at each start-up) and tells the ECU that an «authorised» ignition key is being used to start up the engine. When the ECU recognises the signal, it enables engine start-up.

113

Keys The Owner receives a set of keys comprising:

— no. 1 active key (1). — no. 1 passive key (2).

They contain the code used by the «Hands free» system for the Key-On, in different modes. The active key (1) is the one that is normally used: press button (A) to fully open the metal part, i.e. position (B). Hold depressed button (A) you can move the metal part and set it to the middle position (C); once in place, release button to lock. The metal part returns inside the grip by pushing it in.

2

1

Fig. 62

A1

B

C

Fig. 63

114

The key contains a battery that must be replaced when the low key battery «warning» is displayed as soon as the instrument panel is turned on.

Note In this case, replace the battery as soon as

possible.

When the charge level goes below a certain limit, the key can only work in passive mode, like the passive key: in this case, the instrument panel will not display any message.

Fig. 64

Warning Do not ride with the key (active or passive)

inserted in the lock of the tank cap or in the seat lock as it could come out and represent a potential danger. Furthermore, if bumped, the key mechanism and the integrated circuit could be damaged. Also riding in poor weather conditions with the key inserted could cause damage to its integrated circuit. Do not leave the key on the motorcycle when washing it as it could be damaged, not being watertight.

115

Replacing the battery in the active key Only use 3 Volt CR 2032 lithium ion batteries.

Note The keys do not need to be reprogrammed after

replacing the battery.

Remove the metal part of the battery. Use a large sized coin to pry open the shells of the plastic grip (2 euro coin) as shown in the figure.

Important Insert the coin only in the indicated point. Do not

other use other objects inserted in points that are different than what is shown, as it could damage the integrated circuit and/or the protective gasket.

Fig. 65

116

Once the plastic shells have been separated, remove the printed circuit board (1) prying it up GENTLY with a small flat screwdriver, as shown in the figure.

Important Insert the point of the flat screwdriver just under

the printed circuit board, being very careful not to damage it. Do not apply force on the battery or battery holder.

1

Fig. 66

117

Remove the battery (2) from the printed circuit board (1) and replace it with a new one. Pay attention to polarity: the positive pole (+) must face upward.

Important Only use the required type of battery.

Reinsert the printed circuit board (1) from the side with the battery (2) into the plastic shell.

1 2 +

Fig. 67

1

2

Fig. 68

118

Apply slight pressure on the antenna (3) of the printed circuit board until you hear a click.

Align the two shells of the grip and press on the area indicated by the arrows to reclose them. Make sure that you hear a click upon closing and that the key is well closed.

3

Fig. 69

Fig. 70

119

Duplicate keys If you need any duplicate keys, contact the Ducati Service network with all the keys you have left. The Ducati Service Centre will program all the new keys as well as any keys you already have. You may be asked to provide proof that you are the legitimate owner of the motorcycle. The codes of any keys not submitted will be wiped off from the memory to make those keys unserviceable in case they have been lost.

Immobilizer override procedure This procedure makes it possible to «temporarily» turn on the motorcycle if the HF (Hands Free) System is not working.

Note The PIN CODE function must be activated by

the user by entering your 4-digit PIN in the instrument panel, otherwise the motorcycle cannot be started temporarily in the case of a malfunction.

Warning The motorcycle owner must activate (store) the

PIN code; if there is already a stored PIN, contact an Authorised Ducati Dealer to have the function «reset». To perform this procedure, the Authorised Ducati Dealer may ask you to demonstrate that you are the owner of the motorcycle.

120

PIN CODE activation function

To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 73, use button (1) or (2) to select the «PIN CODE» function and press reset button (4) to go to next page.

Note If «MODIFY PIN CODE» appears when

accessing this function, this means that there is already a stored PIN and therefore the function is already active.

When accessing the function, if «INSERT NEW PIN CODE» and four dashes «- — — -» appear in green on the round display, it means that no PIN CODE is present; now enter a 4 digit code.

Entering the code: Press the reset button (4). each time you press the button (2) the displayed number increases from «0» to «9» and then returns to «0»; to confirm the number, press the reset button (4). Repeat the procedure until inserting the fourth digit. To highlight the «MEMORY» indication, press the reset button (4) again.

To store the entered PIN, press the reset button (4) for 3 seconds with «MEMORY» indication highlighted in green. As a confirmation of PIN storage, the display will show the message «MEMORIZED» for about 2 seconds and then automatically highlight «EXIT» option. From this moment, «MODIFY PIN CODE» will be displayed when accessing the «PIN CODE» function and the PIN can be changed again as many times as necessary (without limits). To exit the setting function, press the reset button (4) when «EXIT» is highlighted.

121

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK DDA

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

PIN CODE

INSERT NEW PIN CODE

_ _ _ _ MEMORY EXIT

PIN CODE

INSERT NEW PIN CODE

0 _ _ _ MEMORY EXIT

PIN CODE

INSERT NEW PIN CODE

2 _ _ _ MEMORY EXIT

PIN CODE

INSERT NEW PIN CODE

2 5 1 8 MEMORY EXIT

PIN CODE

INSERT NEW PIN CODE

2 5 1 8 MEMORIZED EXIT

PIN CODE

INSERT NEW PIN CODE

2 5 1 8 MEMORIZED EXIT

1

2

4

4

4 4

4

2

4

Fig. 71

122

PIN CODE change function

This function changes your four number PIN CODE. To access the function it is necessary to view the «setting» menu page 73, use button (1) or (2) to select the «PIN CODE» function and press reset button (4) to go to next page.

Note If, when accessing this function, «INSERT NEW

PIN» and a string of dashes «- — -» are displayed, function is not active as PIN CODE has never been entered. Enter your PIN code with the «PIN enabling» function.

When accessing the function, if «MODIFY PIN CODE», «OLD PIN» and four dashes «- — — -» appear in green on the round display, it means that a PIN CODE is already stored; now enter the 4 digit code.

Note To change the PIN code, you must remember

the already stored PIN.

Now you shall enter the «old» PIN code (OLD PIN).

Press button (4); each time you press the button (2) the displayed number increases from «0» to «9» and then returns to «0»; to confirm the number, press the reset button (4). Repeat the procedure until entering the fourth digit. Press the reset button (4) again to confirm. If the entered code is incorrect, the instrument panel will return to the four dashes » — — — — » in order to enter the code again. If the entered code is correct, «CORRECT» is automatically highlighted in green for about 2 seconds and then the four dashes » — — — — » next to «NEW PIN» indication are automatically highlighted; now enter the «new» 4 digit code. Press button (4); each time you press the button (2) the displayed number increases from «0» to «9» and then returns to «0»; to confirm the number, press the reset button (4). Repeat the procedure until entering the fourth digit. Press the reset button (4) again to confirm. Item «MEMORY» is automatically highlighted.

123

RIDING MODE RPM

MENU BATTERY ABS

MENU 2 PIN CODE CLOCK DDA

BACK LIGHT LAP SET UNITS EXIT

PIN CODE

MODIFY PIN CODE

NEW PIN

OLD PIN

MEMORY

CORRECT_ _ _ _

_ _ _ _ EXIT

PIN CODE

MODIFY PIN CODE

NEW PIN

OLD PIN

MEMORY

CORRECT2 5 1 8

_ _ _ _ EXIT

PIN CODE

MODIFY PIN CODE

NEW PIN

OLD PIN

MEMORY

CORRECT2 5 1 8

_ _ _ _ EXIT

PIN CODE

MODIFY PIN CODE

NEW PIN

OLD PIN

MEMORY

CORRECT2 5 1 8

_ _ _ _ EXIT

PIN CODE

MODIFY PIN CODE

NEW PIN

OLD PIN

MEMORY

CORRECT2 5 1 8

5 7 9 2 EXIT

PIN CODE

MODIFY PIN CODE

NEW PIN

OLD PIN

MEMORY

CORRECT2 5 1 8

5 7 9 2 EXIT

PIN CODE

MODIFY PIN CODE

NEW PIN

OLD PIN

MEMORIZED

CORRECT2 5 1 8

5 7 9 2 EXIT

1

2

4

4

4

4

4 4

4

4

4

Fig. 72

124

To store the entered new PIN, press the reset button (4) for 3 seconds with «MEMORY» indication highlighted in green. As a confirmation of the new PIN storage, the display will show message «MEMORIZED» for about 2 seconds and then «EXIT» is automatically highlighted. To exit the setting function, press the reset button (4) when «EXIT» is highlighted.

Note You can change your PIN CODE for an unlimited

number of times.

125

Light control Headlight control

This function allows you to reduce current consumption from the battery, by automatically managing headlight switching-off. At Key-On, the high beam and low beam lights are off. When the engine is started, the low beam lights turn on automatically; from this moment, normal operation is activated: it will be possible to switch from low beam to high beam (using button 3) or operate the «FLASH» signal (using button 3). If engine is not started upon key-on, it is anyway possible to switch the lights on by pushing the button on the LH high/low beam switch (button 3); press it once to turn on the low beam; from this moment, the same button can be used to switch on (and off) the high beam light (if the engine is not started within 60 seconds, the low beam or high beam light that was turned on will turn off).

3

Fig. 73

If the headlight was turned on before starting the engine with the procedure described above, the headlight turns off automatically when starting the vehicle and will turn on again when the engine has been completely started.

126

Turn indicators (automatic reset)

The instrument panel controls the automatic reset of the turn indicators. After activating one of the two turn indicators, they can be deactivated using the reset button (4). If the turn indicator is not reset» manually, the instrument panel will automatically switch it off after the motorcycle has travelled 500 m (0.3 miles) from when the turn indicator was activated. The counter for the distance travelled for automatic deactivation is activated at speeds below 80 Km/h (50 mph). If the calculation of the distance for automatic deactivation is activated and then the motorcycle exceeds a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph), the calculation is interrupted and will restart when the speed returns below the indicated threshold.

4

Fig. 74

127

«Parking» function

This function activates the PARKING mode. The PARKING function activates the front and rear parking lights when the vehicle is turned off so it is visible when parked. The function is activated by pressing the button (2) for 3 seconds during the first 60 seconds after the motorcycle was turned off. Once the function is activated, the indication will remain on the circular display for 5 seconds and the lights will remain on for 2 hours. After 2 hours, then will turn off automatically. To interrupt the function, turn the vehicle on and off (Key-On / Key-Off).

Note If there is a sudden interruption in the battery

while the function is active, the instrument panel will disable the function when the voltage is restored.

PARKING

Fig. 75

2

Fig. 76

128

Important The frequent use of this function can

considerably reduce the battery charge; it is recommended to use this function only when really necessary.

Ducati recommends using this function only when necessary.

129

Warning reading Press the ignition switch to lock the steering

This function indicates that it is necessary to keep button the ignition switch pressed to engage the steering lock. This indication becomes active if button (8) is pressed for 1 second.

KEEP

PRESSED

TO

LOCK

Fig. 77

8

Fig. 78

130

Steering lock on indication

This function informs that the steering lock was turned on. The steering lock can be turned on during the first 60 seconds after turning off the vehicle by pressing down on the RUN button. If the steering lock was enabled correctly, the instrument panel will show the indication in the display for 5 seconds.

Note The steering lock can only be activated when

the steering is in position. Fig. 79

131

Indication of incorrect position of the red starter button

This message indicates to the user that the button should be returned to the «top» position in order to ensure that there is not an excessive current absorption by the system.

Important This could lead to battery discharge in a short

time.

Any incorrect position is detected within the first 60 seconds after vehicle switch-off (Key-Off). If you press the starter button (8) for over 1 second to switch off (Key-Off), the system activates the warning RED SWITCH NOT RELEASED as a flashing message.

RED SWITCH NOT RELEASED

Fig. 80

8

Fig. 81

132

If the warning remains active once button (8) is no longer depressed, you shall take button (8) to top position. In this case, report the fault to Dealer or Authorised Service Centre.

8

Fig. 82

8

Fig. 83

133

Other functions This function allows enabling and adjusting the heated handgrips. To enable the «H.GRIPS» control menu for the heated handgrips, press the Start button (5) on the RH switch.

Note The Start button (12) controls the heated

handgrips only when the engine is running.

The display layout could be of two types:

— with Menu 2 enabled (Fig. 84); — with Menu 2 disabled (Fig. 85);

Once the menu is activated, press the same button several times to select the desired indication («OFF», «LOW», «MEDIUM» or «HIGH») which becomes bigger.

If «OFF» is selected and bigger, the heated handgrips are switched off. If «LOW» is selected and bigger, the heated handgrips are activated in their lowest setting. If «MEDIUM» is selected and bigger, the heated handgrips are activated in their intermediate setting. If «HIGH» is selected and bigger, the heated handgrips are activated in their highest setting.

Select the desired setting then leave button (5) undisturbed; after 3 seconds with no controls, the instrument panel automatically quits the indication and maintains the last stored condition. When quitting the handgrips setting menu, the instrument panel warns the user if heated grips have been activated by turning the specific icon yellow (at the top RH side if Menu 2 is enabled or at the top LH side if Menu 2 is disabled), and showing the setting («LOW», «MEDIUM» or «HIGH»).

134

10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

LOW MEDIUM HIGH

OFF

SPORT

03 DTC

16.3 CONS.M.

KM/L10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

MEDIUM HIGH

L O W OFF

SPORT

03 DTC

10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

L O W

SPORT

03 DTC

03 DTC

16.3 CONS.M.

KM/L10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

M E D I U M

SPORT

03 DTC

03 DTC

16.3 CONS.M.

KM/L10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

H I G H

SPORT

03 DTC

03 DTC

10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR

HIGH M E D .

OFF LOW

SPORT

03 DTC

10355 3TOT

162 HIGH

GEAR HIGH

OFF LOW MEDIUM

SPORT

03 DTC

5

5

5

5

5

5

Fig. 84

135

50355TOT

KM

162 HIGH

LOW MEDIUM HIGH

OFF

SPORT 03 DTC

50355TOT

KM

162 HIGH SPORT 03 DTC

50355TOT

KM

162 HIGH

SPORT

03 DTC MEDIUM HIGH

L O W OFF

L O W

50355TOT

KM

162 HIGH SPORT 03 DTC

3 GEAR

50355TOT

KM

162 HIGH

SPORT

03 DTC

M E D I U M

3 GEAR

50355TOT

KM

162 HIGH

SPORT

03 DTC

H I G H

3 GEAR

HIGH M E D .

OFF LOW

50355TOT

KM

162 HIGH SPORT 03 DTC

HIGH

OFF LOW MEDIUM

5

5

5

5

5

5

Fig. 85

136

Note The heated handgrips actually activate and

warm up only with engine running.

Note This means that if heated handgrips are enabled

and engine stops, the heating is «temporarily» disabled but the ON indication is still active. Heating will automatically turn on when engine is started again.

Warning Ducati recommends NOT to use the heated

handgrips when ambient temperature is above 15 20C since they might get damaged.

Note Handgrip heating requires a high current draw

which, at low engine rpm, might result in the battery getting soon flat. If the battery is not fully charged (voltage below 11.9 V) handgrip heating is disabled to ensure engine start-up ability; it will automatically activate again when battery voltage is above the specified value.

137

Controls

Position of motorcycle controls

Warning This section shows the position and function of

the controls used to ride the motorcycle. Be sure to read this information carefully before you use the controls.

1) Instrument panel on handlebar. 2) «Hands free» system. 3) Instrument panel on tank. 4) Left switch. 5) Clutch lever. 6) Rear brake pedal. 7) Right switch. 8) Throttle twistgrip. 9) Front brake lever. 10) Gear change pedal.

5

4

3

10

6

2

7

8

9

1

Fig. 86

138

«Hands free» system The Hands free system consists of:

1) Hands free lock; 2) Antenna; 3) Active key; 4) Passive key; 5) Tank filler plug.

The «Hands free» button (7, Fig. 89) is located on the tank front end.

1 2

4

3

5

Fig. 87

139

Hands free system «Key-On» and «Key-Off»

Key-On consists in turning on the hands free system and all electronic devices. Key-Off consists in turning off the hands free system and all electronic devices, and ensures engine is turned off. Key-On is done using button (6) on the right switch on the handlebar or using the emergency button (7) on the Hands free lock. Key-Off is done using button (6) on the right switch on the handlebar or using button (7) on the Hands free lock.

Note The use of one of the two buttons (6) or (7) does

not exclude the other, ex.: if you use one for switch- on, you can switch off with the other and vice versa.

6

Fig. 88

7

Fig. 89

140

Key-On can only occur in the presence of one of the two keys (3) or (4) or using the pin code. Key-Off can also occur without any key (3) or (4). Key-Off occurs when the speed of the motorcycle is equal to zero, by pressing button (6) on the handlebar or by pressing the Hands free button (7). When speed is not equal to zero, perform key-off by pressing the Hands free button (7).

The mechanical part (A) of the key (3) is used to open the fuel filler cap, the seat latch and bag locks. The metal part (A) of the key (3) remains hidden inside its housing, you can take it out by pressing button (B).

Note With the vehicle in «Key-On» and «engine off»

condition, if the presence of the active key (3) is not detected for thirty consecutive seconds, the motorcycle will turn off automatically without any action by the rider.

B3

A

Fig. 90

141

Key-On/Key-Off using the red button on the handlebar with the active key

A Key-On can be performed by pressing the red button (6) on the handlebar in the HANDS FREE ON/ OFF position and in the presence of the active key (3, Fig. 87).

Note The active key (3) has a range of approx. 1.5 m,

therefore it must be located within this range to be detected by the system.

Key-Off can be performed by pressing the red button (6) on the handlebar in the HANDS FREE ON/OFF position. It can also be performed without the key (3, Fig. 87) only if motorcycle speed is equal to zero.

6

Fig. 91

142

Key-On/Key-Off using the button on the Hands free lock

with active key. Key-On can be performed by pressing button (7) on the Hands free lock (1, Fig. 87) and with the presence of the active key (3, Fig. 87).

Note The active key (3) has a range of approx. 1.5 m,

therefore it must be located within this range to be detected by the system.

Key-Off can be performed by pressing button (7) on the Hands free lock (1, Fig. 87), also without the key (3, Fig. 87).

7

Fig. 92

143

Key-On/Key-Off using the red button on the handlebar with the passive key

A Key-On can be performed by pressing the red button (6) on the handlebar in the HANDS FREE ON/ OFF position and in the presence of the passive key (4, Fig. 87).

Note The passive key has a range of a few cm,

therefore the key must be positioned near the antenna. Remove the seat to reach the antenna.

Key-Off can be performed by pressing the red button (6) on the handlebar in the HANDS FREE ON/OFF position. It can also be performed without the key (4, Fig. 87) only if motorcycle speed is equal to zero.

6

Fig. 93

2

Fig. 94

144

Key-On/Key-Off using the button on the Hands free lock with the passive key

Key-On can be performed by pressing button (7) on the Hands free lock and with the presence of the passive key (4, Fig. 87).

Note The passive key has a range of a few cm,

therefore the key must be positioned near the antenna. Remove the seat to reach the antenna.

Key-Off can be performed by pressing button (7) on the Hands free lock (1, Fig. 87), also without the key (4, Fig. 87).

7

Fig. 95

2

Fig. 96

145

Key-On/Key-Off using the pin code (immobilizer override)

Key-On can be performed by pressing button (7) on the hands free lock (1, Fig. 87) without the presence of the keys (3, Fig. 87) and (4, Fig. 87) and entering the pin code on the instrument panel. Key-Off can be performed by pressing button (6) on the handlebar / Hands Free button (7) / engine off, no key in the range. After each Key-Off, if the key is not present upon next Key-On, the pin code must be entered. The pin code is set by the customer upon delivery of the motorcycle. The function is not enabled unless a pin code has been set. When the Hands Free button (7) is pressed, the instrument panel activates the backlighting and the round display to allow the rider to enter the four digit pin code. Entering the correct pin turns on the instrument panel and enables engine starting. The pin must be entered within 120 sec, after which a Key-Off occurs automatically.

7

Fig. 97

146

Entering PIN CODE function for overriding purposes

This function allows the rider to «temporarily» turn on the motorcycle in case of HF (Hands Free) system «malfunction». If the motorcycle cannot be turned on using the normal starter button, press the «emergency» Hands Free button (7) to activate the function.

After pressing the button, the instrument panel activates the «INSERT PIN CODE» indication on the display with four dashes » — — — -» in the bottom line, highlighted in green, for you to enter the 4 digit PIN code.

Entering the code: Press the reset button (4). Each time you press button (2), the displayed number increases from «0» to «9» and then returns to «0». Press the reset button (4) to confirm each number. Repeat the procedure until entering the fourth digit. Press the reset button (4) again to confirm. If the code is incorrect, the instrument panel will return to the four dashes «- — — -» indication to allow you to enter the code again.

Note There is no limit to the number of times the

code can be re-entered; the instrument panel will turn off automatically 120 seconds after any attempt to enter the code.

If the entered code is correct, the message «CORRECT» will flash on the display for 3 seconds. After 3 seconds, the instrument panel will return to the «normal» view (with all indications active). From this moment, the vehicle can be started using the start button (Key-On).

Note The vehicle can be started until a Key-Off is

performed. If the problem still persists upon the next starting attempt, repeat the procedure from the beginning in order to start the motorcycle «temporarily» again.

Important If this procedure is necessary in order to start

the motorcycle, contact an Authorised Ducati Service Centre as soon as possible to fix the problem.

147

PIN CODE

INSERT PIN CODE

_ _ _ _

0 _ _ _

2 _ _ _

2 _ _ _

2 5 _ _

PIN CODE

INSERT PIN CODE

2 5 1 8 CORRECT

2 5 1 _

2 5 _ _

2 5 1 _

2 5 1 8

1

2

4

4

2

4

4

4

2

2

2

4

Fig. 98

148

Left-hand switch 1) Dip switch, two-position light selector switch: (A) every time it is pressed down the light switches from low beam on to low beam and high beam on . (B) pushed to the side = high beam flasher (FLASH), «Start-Stop lap» function. 2) Switch = three-position turn indicator: centre position = off; position = left turn; position = right turn. 3) Turn indicator off, «Riding mode» activation and menu navigation button. 4) Button ( ) = warning horn. 5) Navigation menu, display scroll and TRIP1 and TRIP2 reset button. 6) Navigation menu, display scroll button.

5

64

2

1

1

A

B

3

Fig. 99

149

Clutch lever Lever (1) disengages the clutch. It features a dial adjuster (2) for lever distance from the twistgrip on handlebar. The lever distance can be adjusted through 10 clicks of the dial (2). Turn clockwise to increase lever distance from the twistgrip. Turn the adjuster counter clockwise to decrease lever distance. When the clutch lever (1) is operated, drive from the engine to the gearbox and the drive wheel is disengaged. Using the clutch properly is essential to smooth riding, especially when moving off.

Warning Set clutch lever when motorcycle is stopped.

Important Using the clutch properly will avoid damage to

transmission parts and spare the engine.

2 1

Fig. 100

Note The engine can be started with the side stand

down and the gearbox in neutral. If starting with a gear engaged, pull in the clutch lever (in this case the side stand must be up).

150

Right-hand switch 1) Red ON/OFF switch. 2) Black ENGINE START button

The switch (1) has three positions: A) centre: RUN OFF. In this position, the engine cannot be started and all electronic devices are off. B) pushed down: ON/OFF. In this position, the system can be turned on (Key-On) and off (Key-Off). C) pushed up: RUN ON. The engine can only be started in this position, pushing the black button (2).

1

2

Fig. 101

A B

2

1

C

Fig. 102

151

Throttle twistgrip The twistgrip (1) on the right handlebar opens the throttles. When released, it will spring back to the initial position (idling speed).

1

Fig. 103

152

Front brake lever Pull in the lever (1) towards the twistgrip to operate the front brake. The system is hydraulically operated and you just need to pull the lever gently. The brake lever (1) has a dial (2) for adjusting the distance between lever and twistgrip on the handlebar. The lever distance can be adjusted through 10 clicks of the dial (2). Turn clockwise to increase lever distance from the twistgrip. Turn the adjuster counter clockwise to decrease lever distance. 2

1

Fig. 104

153

Rear brake pedal Push down on the pedal (1) to apply the rear brake. The system is hydraulically operated.

1

Fig. 105

154

Gear change pedal When released, the gear change pedal (1) automatically returns to rest position N in the centre. This is indicated by the instrument panel light N (2, Fig. 3) coming on. The pedal can be moved:

— down = press down the pedal to engage the 1st

gear and to shift down. The N light will go out; — upwards= lift the pedal to engage 2nd gear and

then 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gears.

Each time you move the pedal you will engage the next gear.

N

2

1

3

4

5

6

Fig. 106

155

Adjusting the position of the gearchange and rear brake pedals The position of the gearchange and rear brake pedals in relation to the footrests can be adjusted to suit the requirements of the rider. Adjust the pedals as follows:

Gear change pedal

hold the linkage (1) and slacken the lock nuts (2) and (3).

Note Nut (2) has a left-hand thread.

Fit an open-end wrench to hexagonal element of linkage (1) and rotate until setting pedal in the desired position. Tighten both check nuts onto linkage.

312

Fig. 107

156

Rear brake pedal.

Loosen counter nut (7). Turn pedal stroke adjusting screw (6) until pedal is in the desired position. Tighten the counter nut (7). Operate the pedal by hand to check that there is a free play of 3 to 6 mm before the brake bites. If not, adjust the length of the master cylinder pushrod as follows. Slacken off the counter nut (10) on the pushrod. Screw the pushrod (8) into the fork (9) to increase the free play, or screw it out to reduce it. Tighten the counter nut (10) and recheck the pedal freeplay.

6

910

8

7

Fig. 108

157

Main components and devices

Position on the vehicle 1) Tank filler plug. 2) Seat lock. 3) Side stand. 4) Rear-view mirrors. 5) Front fork adjusters. 6) Rear shock absorber adjusters. 7) Catalytic converter. 8) Exhaust silencer.

4

4 7 8

1 2

36

6

5

5

Fig. 109

158

Tank filler plug

Note To open or close the tank filler plug using the

active key, set the metal part in the middle position.

Opening

Lift the cover (1) and insert the active or passive key into the lock. Turn the key clockwise 1/4 turn to unlock. Lift the plug (2).

Closing

Close the cap (2) with the key inserted and press it into its seat. Remove the key and replace the lock cover (1).

1

Fig. 110

2

Fig. 111

159

Note Plug can only be closed when key is inserted.

Warning After refuelling, always make sure that the plug

is perfectly in place and closed.

160

Seat lock Work latch (1) to remove the seat and access the underseat compartment and reach any other device under it.

Removing the seat

Insert the active or passive key in the lock (1), turn it clockwise and simultaneously press down in the area of the catch to help release the pin. Pull the seat back to release it from the front catches.

1

CLOSE

OPEN

Fig. 112

Fig. 113

161

Helmet cable

Note Helmet cable can be found inside the tool kit.

Route cable through helmet and engage cable end into pin (3). Leave the helmet hanging and refit the seat to hold it in place.

Warning This device protects the helmet against theft

when the motorcycle is parked. Do not leave the helmet attached when riding the motorcycle; it could interfere with your movements and cause loss of control of the motorcycle.

3

2

Fig. 114

162

Refitting the seat

Make sure all parts are correctly laid out and secured in the underseat compartment. Insert the mounts (4) of the seat base in the projecting parts (5) of the frame, then push the rear end of the seat until you hear the bolt in the lock click into place. Make sure the seat is safely secured to the frame and remove the key from the lock.

5

4

Fig. 115

163

Side stand

Important Place the motorcycle on the side stand only

when you are not going to use it for short periods of time. Before lowering the side stand, make sure that the bearing surface is hard and flat.

Do not park on soft or pebbled ground or on asphalt melt by the sun heat and similar or the motorcycle may fall over. When parking in downhill road tracts, always park the motorcycle with its rear wheel facing downhill. To pull down the side stand, hold the motorcycle handlebars with both hands and push down on the side stand (1) with your foot until it is fully extended. Tilt the motorcycle until the side stand is resting on the ground. To move the side stand to its rest position (horizontal position), lean the motorcycle to the right while lifting the thrust arm (1) with your foot.

1

2

Fig. 116

Warning Do not sit on the motorcycle when it is

supported on the side stand.

Note Check for proper operation of the stand

mechanism (two springs, one into the other) and the safety sensor (2) at regular intervals.

164

Note The engine can be started with the side stand

down and the gearbox in neutral. If starting with a gear engaged, pull in the clutch lever (in this case the side stand must be up).

165

Passenger grabhandle Passenger grab handle (1, Fig. 117) is located inside the tail guard; to take it out, remove the seat (see «Removing the seat» on page page 161), pull knob (2, Fig. 117) while taking out the grab handle (1, Fig. 117) from its housing until it is fully extended.

Warning Before use, pull grab handle back and forth to

ensure that it is locked in the correct position.

To put it back, pull knob (2, Fig. 117), push grab handle (1, Fig. 117) in its housing until it is completely flush with the tail guard (1, Fig. 118) and refit the seat (see «Refitting the seat» on page page 161).

1 2

Fig. 117

1

Fig. 118

166

Adjusting the front fork The front fork used on this motorcycle has rebound (return), compression and spring preload adjustment. Adjustment is done by external screw adjusters:

1) for rebound damping (Fig. 119); 2) for inner spring preload (Fig. 119); 3) for compression damping (Fig. 120).

Put the motorcycle on the side stand and make sure it is stable. Turn knob (1) at the top of each fork leg to adjust rebound damping. Turn adjuster (3) at the bottom of each fork leg with a flat-blade screwdriver to adjust compression damping. Turn knob (1) and the adjusting screws (3) to adjust damping. The stiffest damping setting is obtained with the adjuster turned fully clockwise to the «0» position. Starting from this position, turning counter clockwise, you can count the turns.

1 A

2

Fig. 119

— +

3

Fig. 120

167

To change preload of the spring inside each fork leg, turn the hex. adjuster (2, Fig. 119) with a 22 mm hexagon wrench, starting from the fully open (clockwise) position. From reference (A, Fig. 119), every full turn clockwise corresponds to 1 mm of preload of the spring, up to a maximum of 15 mm, corresponding to 15 full turns.

STANDARD settings from completely closed are as follows:

— compression: 1 and a half turns; — rebound: 1 and a half turns; — Spring preload: FULLY OPEN.

Warning Adjust both fork legs to same settings.

168

Adjusting the rear shock absorber The rear shock absorber has external controls that enable you to adjust the setting in order to suit the load on the motorcycle. The adjuster (1, Fig. 121), located on the lower mount which fastens the shock absorber to the swinging arm, adjusts the damping during the rebound phase (return). The knob (2, Fig. 122) located on the left side of the motorcycle, adjusts the preload of the shock absorber external spring.

1

Fig. 121

2

Fig. 122

169

The knob (3, Fig. 123), located on the expansion reservoir of the shock absorber, adjusts the damping during the compression phase. Turn the adjusters (1) with a screwdriver or the knobs (2) and (3) clockwise to obtain a harder setting or increase preload. Turn them counter-clockwise to obtain the opposite setting. STANDARD setting: from the fully closed position (clockwise), loosen as follows:

— rebound: open adjuster (1) by 12 clicks from fully closed position;

— preload: knob (2) FULLY OPEN; — compression: open knob (3) by 25 clicks from

fully closed position.

When carrying full load, set the rear shock absorber spring to maximum preload to improve motorcycle handling and keep safe clearance from the ground.

Note When carrying full load, set the rear shock

absorber spring to maximum preload to improve motorcycle handling and keep safe clearance from the ground.

3

Fig. 123

Warning The shock absorber is filled with gas under

pressure and may cause severe damage if taken apart by unskilled persons.

170

SETTING THE SUSPENSIONS The values in the table are indicative. They have been calculated considering a dressed rider weighing 80-90kg and a dressed passenger weighing 70-80kg.

Front fork

Range Standard Sport use Comfort use Rider + Passen- ger

Compression 0 3 turns 1.5 turns 1 turn 2 turns 1.5 turns

Rebound 0 3 turns 1.5 turns 1 turn 2 turns 1.5 turns

Preload 0 15 turns 0 turns 7 turns 0 turns 10 turns

Rear shock absorber

Range Standard Sport use Comfort use Rider + Passen- ger

Compression 0 40 clicks 25 clicks 6 clicks 35 clicks 20 clicks

Rebound 0 24 clicks 12 clicks 2 clicks 12 clicks 12 clicks

Preload 0 54 clicks 0 clicks 25 clicks 0 clicks 40 clicks

171

Riding the motorcycle

Running-in recommendations Maximum rpm

Rotation speed for running-in period and during standard use (rpm): 1) up to 1000 km; 2) from 1000 to 2500 km.

Up to 1000 km

During the first 1000 km, keep an eye on the rev counter. It should never exceed: 5,5006,000 rpm. During the first hours of riding, it is advisable to run the engine at varying load and rpm, though still within recommended limit. To this end, roads with plenty of bends and even slightly hilly areas are ideal for a most efficient running-in of engine, brakes and suspensions. For the first 100 km use the brakes gently. Avoid sudden or prolonged braking. This will allow the friction material on the brake pads to bed in against the brake discs. For all mechanical parts of the

motorcycle to adapt to one another and above all not to adversely affect the life of basic engine parts, it is advisable to avoid harsh accelerations and not to run the engine at high rpm for too long, especially uphill. Furthermore, the drive chain should be inspected frequently. Lubricate as required.

172

From 1000 to 2500 km

At this point, you can squeeze some more power out of your engine. However never exceed 7,000 rpm.

Important During the whole running-in period, the

maintenance and service rules recommended in the Warranty Card should be observed carefully. Failure to follow these instructions releases Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. from any liability whatsoever for any engine damage or shorter engine life.

Strict observance of running-in recommendations will ensure longer engine life and reduce the likelihood of overhauls and tune-ups.

01000 Km 1000 2500 Km

Fig. 124

173

Pre-ride checks

Warning Failure to carry out these checks before riding,

may lead to motorcycle damage and injury to rider and passenger.

Before riding, perform a thorough check-up on your motorcycle as follows:

— FUEL LEVEL IN THE TANK Check the fuel level in the tank. Fill tank if needed (page 186).

— ENGINE OIL LEVEL Check oil level in the sump through the sight glass. Top up if needed (page 214).

— BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID Check fluid level in the relevant reservoirs (page 188).

— COOLANT Check coolant level in the expansion reservoir. Top up if needed (page 188).

— TYRE CONDITION Check tyre pressure and condition (page 212).

— CONTROLS Work the brake, clutch, throttle and gear change controls (levers, pedals and twistgrip) and check for proper operation.

— LIGHTS AND INDICATORS Make sure lights, indicators and horn work properly. In case of light malfunction, contact a Ducati Dealer or Authorised Service Centre.

— KEY LOCKS Ensure that tank filler plug (page 159) and seat (page 161) are properly locked.

— STAND Make sure side stand operates smoothly and is in the correct position (page 164).

174

ABS light

After Key-ON, the ABS light (9) stays ON. When the motorcycle speed exceeds 5 km/h, the warning light switches OFF to indicate the correct operation of the ABS system.

Warning In case of malfunction, do not ride the

motorcycle and contact a Ducati Dealer or authorised Service Centre.

9

Fig. 125

175

ABS device

Check that the front (1) and rear (2) phonic wheels are clean.

Warning Clogged reading slots would compromise

system proper operation. It is recommended to disable ABS system in case of muddy road surface because under this condition the system might be subject to sudden failure.

Warning Prolonged rearing could deactivate the ABS

system.

1

Fig. 126

2

Fig. 127

176

Engine on / off

Warning Before starting the engine, become familiar

with the controls you will need to use when riding.

Warning Never start or run the engine indoors. Exhaust

gases are poisonous and may lead to loss of consciousness or even death within a short time.

In the presence of the active or passive key, perform a Key-On (turning on the «Hands free system and all on-board electronic devices) by pushing the red switch (1), on the right side of the handlebar, downward. The instrument panel on handlebar will perform the initialisation and will control the on-board systems, turning on all lights in sequence, from outside to inside, for a few seconds. After this control, only the green light (2) and the red light (3) must remain on.

1

1

Fig. 128

2 3

Fig. 129

177

Warning The side stand must be fully up (in a horizontal

position) as its safety sensor prevents engine start when down.

After Key-On, but with the engine not yet started, the system will perform a Key-Off automatically if the presence of the active key is not detected within 10 seconds.

Note It is possible to start the engine with side stand

down and the gearbox in neutral. When starting the motorcycle with a gear engaged, pull the clutch lever (in this case the side stand must be up).

Move the red switch (1) up to uncover the black button (4). Push the button (4) to start the engine.

1

4

4

1

Fig. 130

Important Do not rev up the engine when it is cold. Allow

some time for oil to be heated and reach all points that need lubricating.

The red oil pressure warning light should go out a few seconds after the engine has started. The engine will shut off by turning the red key (1) on the handlebar to RUN OFF.

178

Note To turn on the Hands free system and all

electronic on-board systems, refer to Hands Free System.

179

Moving off 1) Disengage the clutch by squeezing the clutch

lever. 2) Push down the gear change lever firmly with the

tip of your foot to engage first gear. 3) Raise the engine revs by turning the throttle

twistgrip while gradually releasing the clutch lever. The motorcycle will start moving off.

4) Release the clutch lever completely and accelerate.

5) To shift up, close the throttle to slow down engine, disengage the clutch, lift the gear change lever and let go of clutch lever. To shift down, proceed as follows: release the twistgrip, pull the clutch lever, shortly speed up to help gears synchronise, shift down (engage next lower gear) and release the clutch.

The controls should be used correctly and timely: when riding uphill do not hesitate to shift down as soon as the motorcycle tends to slow down, so you will avoid stressing the engine and the motorcycle abnormally.

Warning Avoid harsh accelerations, as this may lead to

misfiring and transmission snatching. The clutch lever should not be held in longer than necessary after a gear is engaged, otherwise friction parts may overheat and wear out.

Warning Prolonged rearing could deactivate the ABS

system.

Braking Slow down in time, shift down to engine-brake first and then brake applying both brakes. Pull the clutch lever before stopping the motorcycle, to avoid sudden engine stop.

180

ABS system Using the brakes correctly under adverse conditions is the hardest and yet the most critical — skill to master for a rider. Braking is one of the most difficult and dangerous moments when riding a two wheeled vehicle: the possibility of falling or having an accident during this difficult moment is statistically higher than any other moment. A locked front wheel leads to loss of traction and stability, resulting in loss of control. The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) has been developed to enable riders to use the vehicles braking force to the fullest possible amount in emergency braking or under poor pavement or adverse weather conditions. ABS uses hydraulics and electronics to limit pressure in the brake circuit when a special sensor mounted to the wheel signals the electronic control unit that the wheel is about to lock up. This avoids wheel lockup and preserves traction. Pressure is raised back up immediately and the control unit keeps controlling the brake until the risk of a lockup disappears. Normally, the rider will perceive ABS operation as a harder feel or a pulsation of the brake lever and pedal. The front and rear brakes use separate control systems, meaning that they operate independently. Likewise, the ABS is not an integral braking system

and does not control both the front and rear brake at the same time. If desired, the system can be deactivated from the instrument panel, using the «ABS disabling function» page 111.

Warning Use both brake lever and pedal for effective

braking. Never use the brake controls harshly or suddenly as you may lock the wheels and lose control of the motorcycle. When riding in the rain or on slippery surfaces, braking will become less effective. Always use the brakes very gently and carefully when riding under these conditions. Any sudden manoeuvres may lead to loss of control. When tackling long, high-gradient downhill road tracts, shift down gears to use engine braking. Apply one brake at a time and use brakes sparingly. Keeping the brakes applied all the time would cause the friction material to overheat and reduce braking power dangerously. Underinflated or overinflated tyres reduce braking efficiency, handling accuracy and stability in a bend.

181

Stopping the motorcycle Reduce speed, shift down and release the throttle twistgrip. Shift down to engage first gear and then neutral. Apply the brakes and bring the motorcycle to a complete stop. Turn off the engine moving the red switch downward (1).

1

1

Fig. 131

182

Parking Park the stopped motorcycle on the side stand. Turn the handle completely to the left or right. The steering lock can be engaged if this is done within 60 seconds from engine stop. If you wish to lock the steering during this period of time, move down the red switch (1) again and hold it pressed for 3 seconds with the steering fully turned to the left or right. After one second, the instrument panel reads «KEEP PRESSED FOR LOCK», this message will stay displayed for 2 seconds and the steering lock engages after this time. If the steering lock is correctly engaged, the instrument panel displays the message: «STEERING LOCKED». While if it fails to engage, after 5 seconds the instrument panel displays the message: «RED SWITCH NOT RELEASED». If this is the case, release the switch and try locking the steering again within 60 seconds from Key-off. In case of failed locking, contact a Ducati authorised Service Centre.

1

1

Fig. 132

183

Press (2, Fig. 133) for at least 3 seconds: the indication of the activated function (Fig. 134) will appear on the display of the instrument panel on tank for 5 seconds and the lights will remain on for 2 hours. After this period of time, they will turn off automatically.

Note If there is a sudden interruption in the battery

voltage during the «Parking» function, the instrument panel will disable this function when the voltage is restored.

Important The frequent use of this function can

considerably reduce the battery charge; it is recommended to use this function only when really necessary.

2

Fig. 133

PARKING

Fig. 134

184

Warning The exhaust system might be hot, even after

engine is switched OFF; pay particular attention not to touch exhaust system with any body part and do not park the motorcycle next to inflammable material (wood, leaves etc.).

Warning Using padlocks or other locks designed to

prevent motorcycle motion, such as brake disc locks, rear sprocket locks, and so on is dangerous and may impair motorcycle operation and affect the safety of rider and passenger.

185

Refuelling Never overfill the tank when refuelling. Fuel should never be touching the rim of filler recess.

Use low-lead fuel with min. RON 95 octane rating at origin minimum. Be sure there is no fuel trapped in the filler recess.

Warning The motorcycle is only compatible with fuel

having a maximum content of ethanol of 10% (E10). Using fuel with ethanol content over 10% is forbidden. Using it could result in severe damage of the engine and motorcycle components. Using fuel with ethanol content over 10% will make the warranty null and void.

Max level

Fig. 135

186

Tool kit and accessories The tool kit (2) is located under the seat (1) while the Owners manual is housed in the compartment under the seat.

The tool kit includes:

— fuse pliers; — two helmet anti-theft cables; — screwdriver; — screwdriver handle; — 14/16 mm box wrench; — 8/10 mm wrench; — 6 mm rod; — 3 mm Allen wrench; — 4 mm Allen wrench; — 5 mm Allen wrench. — 6 mm Allen wrench.

To access the underseat compartment, remove the seat (see «Removal of the seat» on page page 161).

2

1

Fig. 136

187

Main maintenance operations

Change the air filter

Important Have the air filter maintenance performed at a

Ducati Dealer or authorised Service Centre.

Check and top up the coolant level Check coolant level in the expansion tank on the right side of the vehicle. Steer the handlebar completely to the left and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the expansion reservoir. Top up if the level is below the MIN mark. Unscrew the filler plug (1) and add ENI Agip Permanent Spezial antifreeze, which is not to be diluted, up to MAX level. Refit the plug (1). This type of mixture ensures the best operating conditions (the coolant starts to freeze at -20 C/-4 F).

Cooling circuit capacity: 2.5 cu. dm (litres).

MAX

MIN

1

Fig. 137

Check brake and clutch fluid level The levels should not fall below the MIN marks on the respective reservoirs. If level drops below the limit, air might get into the circuit and affect the operation of the system involved. Brake and clutch fluid must be topped up and changed at the intervals specified in the scheduled

188

Warning Place the motorcycle upright on a flat surface

and make sure the engine is cold before proceeding.

maintenance table reported in the Warranty Booklet; please contact a Ducati Dealer or authorised Service Centre.

Important It is recommended all brake and clutch lines be

changed every four years. MIN

MIN

Fig. 138

MAX

MIN

Fig. 139

189

Brake system

If you find exceeding play on brake lever or pedal and brake pads are still in good condition, contact your Ducati Dealer or authorised Service Centre to have the system inspected and any air drained out of the circuit.

Warning Brake and clutch fluid can damage paintwork

and plastic parts, so avoid contact. Hydraulic oil is corrosive; it may cause damage and lead to severe injuries. Never mix fluids of different qualities. Check seals for proper sealing.

Warning Hydraulic oil is corrosive; it may cause damage

and lead to severe injuries. Never mix fluids of different qualities. Check seals for proper sealing.

Clutch system

If the control lever has exceeding play and the transmission snatches or jams as you try to engage a gear, it means that there might be air in the circuit. Contact your Ducati Dealer or authorised Service

Centre to have the system inspected and air drained out.

Warning Clutch fluid level will increase as clutch plate

friction material wears down. Do not exceed the specified level (3 mm above the minimum level).

190

Check brake pads for wear Check brake pads wear through the inspection hole in the callipers. Change both pads if friction material thickness of even just one pad is about 1 mm.

Warning Friction material wear beyond this limit would

lead to metal support contact with the brake disc thus compromising braking efficiency, disc integrity and rider safety.

Important Have the brake pads replaced at a Ducati Dealer

or authorised Service Centre.

MIN

Fig. 140

MIN

Fig. 141

191

Lubricate cables and joints Check the outer sheath of the throttle control cables for damage at regular intervals. The outer plastic cover should not be flattened or cracked. Operate the controls to make sure the inner cables slide smoothly inside the outer sheath: if you feel any friction or catching, have the cable replaced by a Ducati Dealer or Authorised Service Centre. To avoid this kind of problem with the throttle cable, unscrew the two retaining screws (1) to open the case and then the grease cable ends and pulley (2) with SHELL Advance Grease or Retinax LX2 grease.

Warning Carefully close the control after engaging the

cable in the pulley.

Refit the housing and tighten the screws (1) to 10 Nm.

1

Fig. 142

2

Fig. 143

192

To ensure smooth operation of the side stand pivot, remove dirt and apply SHELL Alvania R3 grease to all friction points.

193

Adjust throttle control free play In all steering positions, the throttle twistgrip should have about 1.5 to 2.0 mm of free travel, measured at the outer edge of the twistgrip housing. If necessary, adjust it using the adjusters (1 and 2) located on the steering tube on the right-hand side of the vehicle. Adjuster (1) is for throttle opening, and adjuster (2) is for throttle closing. Slip the rubber gaiters off the adjusters and loosen the counter nuts (3). Adjust both adjusters by the same amount: turn clockwise to increase free play and anticlockwise to reduce free play. When finished, tighten the counter nuts (3) and refit the rubber gaiters to the adjusters.

1,52 mm

Fig. 144

21

3

Fig. 145

194

Charge the battery Before charging the battery, it is best to remove it from the motorcycle.

Important The battery is housed in the cowling, ALWAYS

contact a Ducati Dealer or an authorised Service Centre for its removal.

Remove the left cowling (1) loosening:

— side screw (2) retaining the electrical parts box; — top screw (3) retaining the electrical parts box; — bottom screw (4) retaining the central cowling;

1 2

3

4

Fig. 146

195

— screw (5) retaining the central cowling to left cowling.

— Unscrew the screws (6) and remove the battery mounting cover (7).

5

Fig. 147

6

7

Fig. 148

196

Slide out the battery (8) from its housing and, always starting from the negative terminal (-), loosen the screws (9). Remove the positive cable (10), the ABS positive cable (11) from the positive terminal and the negative cable (12) from the negative terminal.

Warning The battery produces explosive gases: keep it

away from heat sources

Warning Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

Charge the battery at 0.9 A for 510 hours.

Charge the battery in a ventilated room. Connect the battery charger leads to the battery terminals: the red one to the positive terminal (+), the black one to the negative terminal (-).

9 12

108 11

Fig. 149

Important Make sure the charger is OFF when you

connect the battery to it, or you might get sparks at the battery terminals that could ignite the gases inside the cells. Always connect the red positive (+) terminal first.

197

Lay down the ABS positive cable (11), onto positive cable (10) and start screw (9) on these cables.

10

9

11

Fig. 150

198

Connect the positive cable (10), previously assembled to ABS cable (11), to battery positive terminal, and negative cable (12) to battery negative terminal, by starting the other screw (9). Tighten the terminal screws (9) to a torque of 5 Nm 10% and apply grease onto the battery terminals to prevent oxidation. Reinstall the battery (8) in the support, positioning cables (10) and (11) as shown in (Fig. 152).

9 12

108 11

Fig. 151

11 8

10

Fig. 152

199

Refit battery mounting cover (7) and fasten by tightening the screws (6) to a torque of 10 Nm 10%. 6

7

Fig. 153

200

Refit the left cowling (1) as follows:

— start the side screw (2) retaining the electrical parts box in its thread;

— start the top screw (3) retaining the electrical parts box in its thread;

— start the bottom screw (4) retaining the central cowling in its thread;

1 2

3

4

Fig. 154

201

— start the screw (5) retaining the central cowling to left cowling in its thread.

Tighten the screws (2, Fig. 154) , (3, Fig. 154) , (4, Fig. 154) and (5, Fig. 155) to a torque of 10 Nm 10%.

5

Fig. 155

202

Charge and maintenance of the battery during winter storage Your motorcycle is equipped with a connector (1) to which you can connect a special battery charger (2) (Battery maintainer kit part no. 69924601A — various countries; Battery maintainer kit part no. 69924601AX — for Japan, China and Australia only) available from our sales network.

Note The electric system of this model is designed so

as to ensure there is a very low power drain when the motorcycle is OFF. Nevertheless, the battery features a certain self-discharge rate that is normal and depends on ambient conditions as well as on «non-use» time.

1

Fig. 156

2

Fig. 157

203

Important If battery is not kept at a minimum charge level

by a suitable battery charge maintainer, sulphation may occur and this is an irreversible phenomenon causing decreasing battery performance.

Note When the motorcycle is left unused

(approximately for more than 30 days) we recommend owners to use the Ducati battery charge maintainer (Battery maintainer kit part no. 69924601A — various countries; Battery maintainer kit part no. 69924601AX — for Japan, China and Australia only); since its electronics monitors the battery voltage and features a maximum charge current of 1.5 Ah. Connect the maintainer to the diagnostics socket located in the tail of the bike.

Note Using charge maintainers not approved by

Ducati could damage the electric system; motorcycle warranty does not cover the battery if damaged due to failure to comply with the above indications, since it is considered as wrong maintenance.

204

Check drive chain tension

Important Have chain tension adjusted by a Ducati Dealer

or authorised Service Centre.

Make the rear wheel turn until you find the position where chain is tightest. Set the vehicle on the side stand. Push down the chain at the point of measurement and release. Measure the distance between the aperture upper profile and pin centre. The read distance must be: 9 11 mm.

Important If drive chain is too tight or slack, adjust tension

so as to bring values back to the specified range. 9 11 mm

Fig. 158

205

Warning Correct tightening of swinging arm screws (1) is

critical to rider and passenger safety.

Important Improper chain tension will lead to early wear of

transmission parts.

1

Fig. 159

206

Chain lubrication The chain fitted on your motorcycle has O-rings to protect its moving parts from dirt, and to hold the lubricant inside. The seals might be irreparably damaged if the chain is cleaned using any solvent other than those specific for O-ring chains or washed using steam or water cleaners. After cleaning, blow the chain dry or dry it using absorbent material and apply SHELL Advance Chain or Advance Teflon Chain on each link.

Important Using non-specific lubricants may cause severe

damage to the chain and the front and rear sprocket.

207

Replace the high and low beam bulbs Before replacing a burnt-out light, make sure that the new one matches the voltage and wattage specifications in paragraph «Electric System» page 234. Always ensure that the new bulb you have installed operates properly before refitting any parts you have removed. Figure shows the locations of the low beam (LO), high beam (HI) and parking lights (1).

Headlight

The headlight is a full LED unit.

Important Have the headlight lights replaced by a Ducati

Dealer or an Authorised Service Centre.

1 1

LO

HI

Fig. 160

Warning The headlight might fog up if the motorcycle is

used under the rain or after washing. Switch headlight on for a short time to dry up any condensate.

208

Beam setting Check correct headlight aiming. Position the motorcycle 10 metres from a wall or a screen, the motorcycle must be perfectly upright with the tires inflated to the correct pressure and with a rider seated, perfectly perpendicular to the longitudinal axis. On the wall or surface, draw a horizontal line at the same height from the ground as the centre of the headlight and a vertical line aligned with the longitudinal axis of the motorcycle. If possible, perform this check in dim light. Switch on the low beam. The height of the upper limit between the dark area and the lit area must not be more than 9/10 of the height from the ground of the headlight centre.

Note This is the procedure specified by Italian

regulations for checking the maximum height of the light beam. Please adapt said procedure to the provisions in force in your own country.

10 m

9

10 x x

Fig. 161

209

To vertically align the low beam, turn the screws (1). To vertically align the high beam, turn the screw (2). 1

2

Fig. 162

210

Adjust rear-view mirrors The rear-view mirror can be adjusted manually by pressing points (A).

A

Fig. 163

211

Tubeless tyres Front tyre pressure: 2.50 bar (rider only) — 2.6 bar (with passenger and/or bags). Rear tyre pressure: 2.50 bar (rider only) — 2.9 bar (with passenger and/or bags). As tyre pressure is affected by ambient temperature and altitude variations, you are advised to check and adjust it whenever you are riding in areas where ample variations in temperature or altitude occur.

Important Check and adjust the pressures with the tyres

cold. To avoid front wheel box distortion, when riding on bumpy roads, increase tyre pressure by 0.2 0.3 bar.

Tyre repair or change (Tubeless tyres)

In the event of a tiny puncture, tubeless tyres will take a long time to deflate, as they tend to keep air inside. If you find low pressure on one tyre, check the tyre for punctures.

Warning Punctured tyres must be replaced. Replace

tyres with recommended standard tyres only. Be sure to tighten the valve caps securely to avoid leaks when riding. Never use tube type tyres. Failure to heed this warning may lead to sudden tyre bursting and to serious danger to rider and passenger.

After replacing a tyre, the wheel must be balanced.

Warning Do not remove or shift the wheel balancing

weights.

Note Have the tyres replaced at a Ducati Dealer or

authorised Service Centre. Correct removal and installation of the wheels is essential. Some parts of the ABS (such as sensors and phonic wheels) are mounted to the wheels and require specific adjustment.

212

Minimum tread depth

Measure tread depth (S, Fig. 164) at the point where tread is most worn down: it should not be less than 2 mm, and in any case not less than the legal limit.

Important Visually inspect the tyres at regular intervals for

detecting cracks and cuts, especially on the side walls, bulges or large spots that are indicative of internal damage. Replace them if badly damaged. Remove any stones or other foreign bodies caught in the tread.

S

Fig. 164

213

Check engine oil level Check the engine oil level through the sight glass (1) on the clutch cover. Oil level must be checked with the motorcycle perfectly upright and the engine cold. Oil level should be between the marks on the sight glass. If the level is low, top up with SHELL Advance 4T Ultra engine oil. Remove the oil filler cap (2) and top up until the oil reaches the required level. Refit the plug.

Important Engine oil and oil filters must be changed by a

Ducati Dealer or authorised Service Centre at the intervals specified in the scheduled maintenance chart reported in the Warranty Card.

2

1

Fig. 165

214

Viscosity

SAE 15W-50 The other viscosity degrees indicated in the table can be used if the local average temperature is within the limits specified for that oil viscosity.

10

U n ig

ra d e

M u lt ig

ra d e

0 10 20 30 40 C

40

20W40 20W50

15W40 15W50

10W40

10W30

10W

20W

20

30

Fig. 166

215

Clean and replace the spark plugs Spark plugs are essential to smooth engine running and should be checked at regular intervals. The condition of the spark plugs provides a good indication of how well the engine is running. Have the spark plug checked and replaced at a Ducati Dealer or authorised Service Centre.

Fig. 167

216

Clean the motorcycle

Note To preserve the finish of metal parts and

paintwork, wash and clean your motorcycle at regular intervals, anyway according to the road conditions you ride in. Use specific products only. Prefer biodegradable products. Avoid aggressive detergents or solvents. Only use water and neutral soap to clean the Plexiglas and the seat. Periodically manually clean all aluminium components. Use special detergents, suitable for aluminium parts FREE of abrasives or caustic soda.

Note Do not use sponges with abrasive parts or steel

wool: only use soft cloths.

However, the warranty does not apply to motorcycles whenever poor maintenance status is ascertained.

Important Do not wash your motorcycle right after use.

When the motorcycle is still hot, water drops will evaporate faster and spot hot surfaces. Never clean the motorcycle using hot or high- pressure water jets. Cleaning the motorcycle with a high pressure water jet may lead to seizure or serious faults in forks, wheel hubs, electric system, headlight (fogging), fork seals, air inlets or exhaust silencers, with consequent loss of compliance with the safety requirements. Clean off stubborn dirt or exceeding grease from engine parts using a degreasing agent. Be sure to avoid contact with drive parts (chain, sprockets, etc.).

Rinse with warm water and dry all surfaces with chamois leather.

Warning Braking performance may be impaired

immediately after washing the motorcycle. Never grease or lubricate the brake discs to avoid losing braking power. Clean the discs with an oil-free solvent.

217

Warning The headlight might fog up due to washing, rain

or moisture. Switch headlight on for a short time to dry up any condensate.

Carefully clean the phonic wheels of the ABS so to ensure system efficiency. Do not use aggressive products so to avoid damaging the phonic wheels and the sensors.

Note Do not use alcohol or alcohol-derived products

to clean the instrument panel.

Pay special attention to regularly clean the wheel rims since they feature some machined aluminium parts; clean and dry them any time you use the motorcycle.

Warning To clean side panniers, use warm water, neutral

soap and a soft cloth. Soap and a soft brush may be used to clean zips; rinse with clean water. Do not use aggressive detergents and hard cleaning utensils. Zips that are hard to open may be loosened with a small quantity of talcum powder.

218

Storing the motorcycle If the motorcycle is to be left unridden over long periods, it is advisable to carry out the following operations before storing it away:

— clean the motorcycle; — empty the fuel tank; — pour a few drops of engine oil into the cylinders

through the spark plug bores, then turn the engine over by hand a few times to form a protective film of oil on the inner walls of the cylinder;

— place the motorcycle on a service stand; — disconnect and remove the battery.

If the motorcycle has been left unused for more than a month, the battery should be checked and recharged if necessary. Protect the motorcycle with a specific motorcycle cover that will not damage the paintwork or retain moisture. The canvas is available from Ducati Performance.

Important notes Some countries, such as France, Germany, Great Britain, Switzerland, etc. have compulsory emission

and noise standards that include mandatory inspections at regular intervals. Periodically carry out the required checks and replace parts as necessary, using Ducati original spare parts, in compliance with the regulations in the country concerned.

219

Scheduled maintenance chart Scheduled maintenance chart: operations to be performed by the Dealer

List of operations and type of interven- tion (set mileage (km/mi) or time interval *)

Km. x1,000 1 15 30 45 60 Time

(months)mi. x1,000 0.6 9 18 27 36

Reading of the error memory with DDS and check of software version update on control units 12

Check whether there are technical updates and recall campaigns 12

Change engine oil and filter 12

Clean the engine oil mesh filter assembly —

Check and/or adjust valve clearance —

Change timing belts 60

Replace the spark plugs —

Clean the air filter —

Change the air filter —

Check brake and clutch fluid level 12

Change brake and clutch fluid 36

Check brake disc and pad wear. Replace, if necessary 12

220

List of operations and type of interven- tion (set mileage (km/mi) or time interval *)

Km. x1,000 1 15 30 45 60 Time

(months)mi. x1,000 0.6 9 18 27 36

Check the proper tightening of brake calliper bolts and brake disc carrier bolts 12

Check front and rear wheel nuts tightening 12

Check tightening of frame to engine fasteners —

Check wheel hub bearings —

Check and lubricate the rear wheel shaft —

Check the cush drive damper on rear sprocket —

Check the proper tightening of secondary drive front and rear sprocket nuts 12

Check final drive (chain, front and rear sprocket) and slid- ing shoes wear 12

Check final drive chain tension and lubrication 12

Check steering bearings and lubricate, if necessary —

Change the front fork fluid —

Visual check of front fork and rear shock absorber seals 12

Check the freedom of movement and tightening of the side and central stand (if any) 12

221

List of operations and type of interven- tion (set mileage (km/mi) or time interval *)

Km. x1,000 1 15 30 45 60 Time

(months)mi. x1,000 0.6 9 18 27 36

Visual check of the fuel lines 12

Check rubbing points, clearance, freedom of movement and positioning of hoses and electric wiring in view 12

Lubricate the levers at the handlebar and pedal controls 12

Change coolant 48

Check the coolant level and check circuit for damage 12

Check tyre pressure and wear 12

Check the battery charge level 12

Check the operation of the safety electrical devices (side stand switch, front and rear brake switches, engine stop switch, gear/neutral sensor)

12

Check lighting, turn indicators, horn and controls 12

Reset the Service indication through the DDS —

Road test of the motorcycle, testing safety devices (ex. ABS and DTC), electric fans and idling 12

Softly clean the motorcycle 12

Fill out that the service was performed in on-board doc- umentation (Service Booklet) 12

222

Scheduled maintenance chart: operations to be performed by the customer

List of operations and type of intervention [set mileage (km/mi) or time interval *]

Km. x1000 1

mi. x1000 0.6

Months 6

Check engine oil level

Check brake and clutch fluid level

Check tyre pressure and wear

Check the drive chain tension and lubrication

Check brake pads. If necessary, contact your dealer to change pads

223

Technical data

Weights Weight in running order without fluids and battery: 210 kg (Diavel ABS); 205 kg (Diavel Carbon ABS). Carrying full load: 400 kg.

Warning Failure to observe weight limits could result in

poor handling and impair the performance of your motorcycle, and you may lose control of the motorcycle.

224

Overall dimensions

130 mm

1580 mm

2235 mm

7 7

0 m

m

1 0

9 6

m m 1 1 9 2

m m

1 1 1 5

m m

306 mm

516 mm

860 mm

Fig. 168

225

Top-ups

TOP-UPS TYPE

Fuel tank, including a reserve of 4 cu. dm (litres)

Unleaded fuel with a minimum octane rat- ing of RON 95.

17 cu. dm (litres)

Sump and filter SHELL — Advance 4T Ultra 4 cu. dm (litres)

Front/rear brake and clutch circuits SHELL Advance Brake DOT 4 —

Protectant for electric contacts Spray for electric systems SHELL Advance Contact Cleaner

Front fork SHELL Advance Fork 7.5 or Donax TA 720 cc (per leg)

Cooling circuit ENI Agip Permanent Spezial antifreeze (do not dilute, use pure)

2.5 cu. dm (litres)

Important Do not use any additives in fuel or lubricants. Using them could result in severe damage of the engine

and motorcycle components.

Warning The motorcycle is only compatible with fuel having a maximum content of ethanol of 10% (E10).

Using fuel with ethanol content over 10% is forbidden. Using it could result in severe damage of the engine and motorcycle components. Using fuel with ethanol content over 10% will make the warranty null and void.

226

Engine Testastretta 11, longitudinal 90 «L» twin cylinder, with 4 valves per cylinder, liquid-cooled with deep sump die-cast crankcase. Bore: 106 mm Stroke: 67.9 mm Total displacement, cu. cm: 1198.4 Compression ratio: 11.50.5:1 Max crankshaft power (95/1/EC), kW/HP: 119 kW/162 HP at 9,500 rpm Max torque at crankshaft (95/1/EC): 13 kgm/128 Nm at 8,000 rpm Maximum rpm: 10,800

Important Do not exceed the specified rpm limits in any

running conditions.

227

Timing system DESMODROMIC with four valves per cylinder, operated by eight rocker arms (four opening rockers and four closing rockers) and two overhead camshafts. It is operated by the crankshaft through spur gears, belt rollers and toothed belts.

Desmodromic timing system

1) Opening (or upper) rocker; 2) Opening rocker shim; 3) Closing (or lower) rocker shim; 4) Return spring for lower rocker; 5) Closing (or lower) rocker; 6) Camshaft; 7) Valve.

6

1

2

2

2 1

5

3

5

4

7

Fig. 169

228

Performance data Maximum speed in any gear should be reached only after a correct running-in period with the motorcycle properly serviced at the recommended intervals.

Important Failure to follow these instructions will release

Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. from any liability for any engine damage or shortened engine life.

Spark plugs Make: NGK Type: MAR9A-J

Fuel system MITSUBISHI indirect electronic injection. Oval throttle body (corresponding diameter): 56 mm Injectors per cylinder: 1 Firing points per injector: 12 Fuel specifications: 95-98 RON.

Warning The motorcycle is only compatible with fuel

having a maximum content of ethanol of 10% (E10). Using fuel with ethanol content over 10% is forbidden. Using it could result in severe damage of the engine and motorcycle components. Using fuel with ethanol content over 10% will make the warranty null and void.

229

Brakes Sistema antibloccaggio dei freni con azione separata, controllato da sensori ad effetto hall con lettura su ruote foniche montati su entrambe le ruote: possibilit di disattivazione ABS.

Front

Semi-floating drilled twin-disc. Braking material: steel. Carrier material: aluminium Disc diameter: 320 mm. Hydraulically operated by a control lever on handlebar right-hand side. Brake calliper make: BREMBO. Tipo: M4.34a (pinza a 4 pistoni 34) Materiale attrito: TT 2182 FF Master cylinder type: PR18/19.

Rear

With fixed drilled steel disc. Disc diameter: 265 mm. Hydraulically operated by a pedal on RH side. Make: BREMBO Tipo: PF 30/32a (pinza flottante a 2 pistoni 30 / 32). Materiale attrito: Toshiba TT2182 FF.

Tipo pompa: PS 13.

Warning The brake fluid used in the brake system is

corrosive. In the event of accidental contact with eyes or skin, wash the affected area with abundant running water.

230

Transmission Wet clutch controlled by the lever on left-hand side of the handlebar. Drive is transmitted from engine to gearbox main shaft via spur gears. Engine sprocket/clutch gearwheel ratio: 33/61 6-speed gearbox with constant mesh gears, gear change pedal on left side of motorcycle. Gearbox output sprocket/rear chain sprocket ratio: 15/43 Total gear ratios: 1st gear 15/37 2nd gear 17/30 3rd gear 20/27 4th gear 22/24 5th gear 24/23 6th gear 25/22

Drive chain from gearbox to rear wheel: Make: DID Type: HV2 525 Size: 5/8×1/16 Links: 118

Important The above gear ratios are the homologated ones

and under no circumstances must they be modified.

However, if you wish to tune up your motorcycle for competitions or special tracks, Ducati Motor Holding S.p.A. will be pleased to provide information about the special ratios available. Contact a Ducati Dealer or Authorised Service Centre.

Warning If the rear sprocket needs replacing, contact a

Ducati Dealer or authorised Service Centre. If improperly replaced, this component could seriously endanger your safety, as well as the passenger one, and cause irreparable damage to your motorcycle.

Frame ALS450 steel tube trellis frame. Telaietto posteriore fuso in alluminio. Inclinazione cannotto: 28. Angolo di sterzo: 34 lato sinistro / 34 lato destro. Avancorsa: 130 mm

231

Wheels Fourteen-spoke, light-alloy rims (Diavel ABS). Nine-spoke, light-alloy rims (Diavel Carbon).

Front

Size: MT 3.50×17″.

Rear

Size: MT 8.00×17″.

Tyres Front

Tubeless, radial tyre. Size: 120/70-ZR17

Rear

Tubeless, radial tyre. Size: 240/45-ZR17

Suspensions Front

Hydraulic upside-down fork with external adjustment of rebound and compression damping and of fork leg inner spring preload. Diametro tubi portanti: 50 mm.

Wheel travel: 120 mm.

Rear

The shock absorber is adjustable for rebound and compression, with remote control for spring preload and is adjustable. Its upper section is pivot connected to the frame and the lower section is pivot connected to a light alloy swingarm. The swinging arm rotates around a pivot shaft that passes through frame and engine. The whole system gives the bike excellent stability. Shock absorber stroke: 59.5 mm. Wheel travel: 120 mm.

Exhaust system Silenziatore in acciaio inossidabile con terminali a fondello in alluminio. Catalizzatore integrato e con due sonde lambda.

Available colours Diavel ABS

Dark Stealth Primer 2 K Black code 873.A002 (Palinal). Primer, Black Stealth (Black 94) code 929.R223 (Palinal). Matt Clear Coat 2 K code 929.R223 (Palinal).

232

Frame, Racing Black code 43805 (Inver). Rear subframe, Graphite Grey code 36345 (Inver). Rims, Black.

Diavel ABS Carbon

Red and Matt Carbon Primer code L0040652 (Lechler). Varnish code LM06017 (Lechler). Frame, Ducati Red code 81784 (Inver). Rear subframe, Graphite Grey code 36345 (Inver). Rims, Black.

Diavel ABS Carbon

Star White & Matt Carbon Primer code 873.AL001 (Palinal). Varnish, Star White code 907T948 (Palinal). Frame, Star White code 34246 (Inver). Rear subframe, Graphite Grey code 36345 (Inver). Rims, Black.

233

Electrical system Basic electric items are: Headlight: LED low beam light type: No. 4 leds (13.5V — 24.3W); LED high beam light type: No. 5 leds (13.5V — 18.9W); LED parking light type: No. 5 leds (13.5V — 6.2W). Electrical controls on handlebars. Turn indicators: front ones: LED (13.5V — 4.7W). Horn. Stop light switches. Sealed battery, 12V-10 Ah. GENERATOR 14V-490W — 35A. MASTER FUSE, protected by a 30A fuse, of the Automotive type, not including ABS which has two specific ones, located on solenoid starter, behind the battery (C, Fig. 172). Starter motor: 12V-0.7 kW. Tail light, stop light and rear turn indicators: parking light: (13.5V-0.3W); stop light: LED (13.5V-1.4W); rear turn indicators: LED (13.5V-2.06W). Number plate light: LED (13.5V-0.7W).

Note For bulb replacement instructions, please see

the paragraph «Replacing the high and low beam bulbs».

234

Fuses

There are twelve fuses that protect the electric components, located inside the front and rear fuse boxes, and one on the solenoid starter. There are three spare fuses (S) in every box. Refer to the table below to identify the circuits protected by the various fuses and their ratings. The rear left fuse box (A, Fig. 170) and the rear right one (B, Fig. 171) are located under the seat, inside the underseat compartment. To access the fuses, remove the seat (see «Removing the seat» on page page 161). To expose the fuses, lift the box protective cover. Mounting position and ampere capacity are marked on box cover.

A

1

S

2 3 4 5 6 7

Fig. 170

B

1

S

2 3 4 5 6 7

Fig. 171

235

Rear left fuse box (A) key

Pos El. item Rat.

1 Throttle opening relay (ETV) 15 A

2 Injection relay 20 A

3 Key-sense 15 A

4 ECU 10 A

5 Instrument panel 10 A

6 — —

7 — —

Rear right fuse box key (B)

Pos El. item Rat.

1 Diagnosis/Recharge 7.5 A

2 Navigator/Alarm 7.5 A

3 Black Box System (BBS) 15 A

4 Black Box System (BBS) KEY 10 A

5 Heated handgrips 5 A

6 — —

7 — —

236

Note To access the main fuse, remove the left

cowling.

The main fuse (C, Fig. 172), is located near the battery on solenoid starter (D, Fig. 172). Remove the fuse cap (E, Fig. 172)to reach it. A blown fuse can be identified by breakage of the inner filament (F, Fig. 173).

Important Switch the ignition key to OFF before replacing

the fuse to avoid possible short-circuits.

Warning Never use a fuse with a rating other than the

specified value. Failure to observe this rule may damage the electric system or even cause fire.

DC

E

Fig. 172

F F

Fig. 173

237

Injection /electric system diagram key

1) Right-hand switch 2) Immobilizer 3) Hands Free Relay 4) Hands free 5) LH fuse box 6) RH fan 7) LH fan 8) Fuel pump relay 9) Ride-by-wire relay (ETV) 10) Injection control unit (EMS) 11) RH fuse box 12) Data Acquisition / Diagnosis 13) Starter motor 14) Fused solenoid 15) Battery 16) Wiring ground 17) Regulator 18) Generator 19) Fuel pump 20) Fuel level 21) Rear right turn indicator 22) Rear light 23) Rear left turn indicator 24) Vehicle control unit (BBS)

25) Anti-theft system alarm 26) Exhaust valve motor 27) Gear sensor 28) Rear speed sensor 29) ABS control unit 30) Accelerator position sensor (APS) 31) Potentiometer motor / ride-by-wire (TPS/ETV) 32) Timing rpm sensor 33) Vertical MAP sensor 34) Horizontal MAP sensor 35) Engine temperature 36) Air temperature sensor 37) Vertical lambda sensor 38) Horizontal lambda sensor 39) Oil pressure switch 40) Rear stop light 41) Side stand switch 42) Clutch switch 43) Front stop light 44) Main vertical injector 45) Main horizontal injector 46) Horizontal coil 47) Vertical coil 48) Secondary air actuator 49) Left-hand switch 50) Horn

238

51) Front speed sensor 52) Front left turn indicator 53) Instrument panel on handlebar 54) Instrument panel on tank 55) Front right turn indicator 56) Heated handgrip control unit (optional) 57) Low / high beam 58) Parking light 59) Heated handgrip (optional)

Wire colour coding

B Blue W White V Violet BK Black Y Yellow R Red LB Light blue GR Grey G Green BN Brown O Orange P Pink

Note The electric system wiring diagram is at the end

of this manual.

239

Routine maintenance record Routine maintenance record

KM NAME DUCATI SERVICE

MILEAGE DATE

1000

15000

30000

45000

60000

240

C od. 913.7.208.1H

C od. 913.7.208.1G

C od. 913.7.208.1F

C od. 913.7.208.1E

C od. 913.7.208.1D

C od. 913.7.208.1C

C od. 913.7.208.1B

C od. 913.7.254.1A

S tam

pato 03/2014

BW Bk

FREE

PUSH

RW

OFF

RUN

STARTER ENGINE STOP

RBk RW

OFF

RUN

RBk

UNLOCK

3 4 521 8

21 21 1234567

1 2 1 2

RR

1234567

R R

1 2 3 4

30A

30A

25A

+ —

4 3

1 2

1 2

14

15

18

1

34

10

26

12

19

11

2

3

25

20

32

30

28

27

8

2 7

3

1

6 4

5

HALL

21

1 2 3 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

4 5

HG F CBA D E

3124 5 6

— +

FE R

R IT

E

++

321 4

12 12

RB OFF

PUSH

OFF

PUSH

TURN HORN PASSING

8 4 2 1 3 5 6

RB BY R

SET UPSET DOWN

PUSH FREE

Bk R

PUSH FREE

RB OFF

PUSH

HI BEAM

RB BW B OBk Gr

N

L

R

RB

C

Br

7

HALL

2 1

4 3 12 12

dx sx

1212

Le d

1

2

3

4

5

6

10

11

26

15

16

17

19

21

2

3

20

13

23

12

8

1

18

22

25

9 24

4

5

6

7

14

Le d

1-34 35-68

321 4

1 co

il H

o ri

zo n

ta l

2 In

je ct

o r

H o

ri zo

n ta

l m ai

n 3

In je

ct o

r H

o ri

zo n

ta l t

o p

5 E

T V

G n

d 6

E T

V S

o u

rc e

7 E

T V

M o

to r

+ 8

E T

V M

o to

r —

9 E

T V

R el

ay

11 12 13 14 16 C

lu th

S w

17

R ad

ia to

r Fa

n R

el ay

10 P

o w

er G

n d

18 P

o w

er G

n d

19 20 21 22 23 Q

u ic

k S

h if

t

25 S

ta rt

er s

w 24

B ra

ke sw

27 In

je ct

o r

V er

ti ca

l M ai

n 28

O 2

h ea

te r

H o

ri zo

n ta

l 29

O 2

h ea

te r

V er

ti ca

l 30

S ta

rt er

R el

ay 31

F u

el P

u m

p R

el ay

33 S

T o

p S

w 34

C o

n tr

o l G

n d

35 B

at te

ry M

o n

it o

r

45 60 S

el f

S h

u t-

d o

w n

62 C

o m

m u

n ic

at io

n L

in e

A

36 A

ir T

em p

S en

s.

38 C

ra n

K A

n g

le S

en s

+ 39

S ig

n al

S p

ee d

s en

s re

ar 40

S ig

n al

S p

ee d

s en

s Fr

o n

t 41

O

il P

re ss

s w

42 43 V

s u

p p

ly A

P S

( S

u b

) 44

B at

te ry

46 S

ig n

al M

ap S

en so

r H

o ri

zo n

ta l

47 C

ra n

K A

n g

le S

en s

— 48

S en

so r

S u

p p

ly 5

V 49

V s

u p

p ly

T P

S 50

S ig

n al

A P

S (

su b

) 51

C an

L o

w 52 53

E n

g in

e T

em p

. S en

s. 54

S ig

n al

O 2

S en

so r

H 55

S en

so r

G n

d

56 T

P S

G n

d

57 S

ig n

al T

p s

(s u

b )

58 A

P S

( su

b )

g n

d 59

C an

H ig

h

61 C

o m

m u

n ic

at io

n L

in e

B

63 S

ig n

al O

2 S

en s

( ve

rt ic

al )

64

65 G

n d

A P

S (

m ai

n )

66 S

ig n

al A

P S

( m

ai n

) 67

V s

u p

p ly

A P

S (

m ai

n )

68 S

ig n

al T

p s

M ai

n

Bn/W Bn/W

Gr/G

3

H V

R/Y

Bk

R/Bk

BkBk

B/Bk

YY Y

Bk

BkR

R

B/BkR/Y R R/Y

W/Bk Bk

W/Bk Bk

4 In

je ct

o r

V er

ti ca

l t o

p

Can Low Can HI

In Left/Right indicator Menu Input

Passing_Start_stop_lap HI Beam input

Claxon Out

SnS Gnd

Claxon Input

Key_sense VBatt1 Vbatt2

Gnd1 Gnd2

Can Low Can Hi

Out Stop Light

M+ M-

Key sense Gnd

Vbatt

26 c

o il

V er

ti ca

l

37 S

ig n

al M

ap S

en so

r V

er ti

ca l

Out Left Rear Indicator Out Right Rear Indicator

In Sign exup Out Sns Gnd

5V Sns Vcc

In Fuel Sensor

In Gear Sensor

Menu confirm_Off indicator

Front left ind out Front right ind out

SnS 5V

Front Speed

n .c

n .c

brake sw

Pilot light out Position light

Gr/Bk

Gr

B/Y

Br

O

B

B/W

Gr Br OB

B/W

B/Y

V/Bk

W/Bk

G/Bk

Y/Gr

Gr/R

Bk

Gr/G

Gr/Bk Gr/G

P/Bk

LbW/B

Bk

Bk

Gr/B

P/Y n .c

Bk

Gr/G

G/Y Bn/W R/Bk

R/Bn

Lb/R

Lb/Bk Bk

Lb/G W/O

Bk Lb/Y B/Bk Bn/Bk

P/Bk

BkW/B

G/B

G/O

Bn/B

Bn/RBn/YW/Y G/W Bn/V O/BK OG/W

G/Y

G/V

Bk/Y Bk/OBk/W

Bk/V O/G

R/Y

O/BW

Y

Gr/Bk

Gr/G

R/Y

R/Y

R/Bk

R

Bn Bn R/V R/VR/G

Bn/Bk Lb/G

R/GR/G

Bk Bk

Bn/W R/Bn

Y/W

Y

Bk

BkBk

Bn/W Bn/W

P/Y G/Y

G/Y

Bk/V

Bk/VBk/VBk/VBk/V

Bk/VBk/V

G/B G/W Bn/V Bn/V

G/W G/O

Bk/Y Bn/Y

O/G

O/B Lb/R

Lb/Bk

Bk/W

Bn/B

G/BK

Bk/O

Bn/R O

Gr/Bk

Gr/Bk

Gr/G

W /G

W /B

k

Gr/R

Y

Bn /R

Y/ B

Bk /B

Bk /O

Bk /W

Y/ G

R/Bk

R/Y

Bn/W

Bk

R/Y

Bk

Bk /W

Bk /O

Y/ B

Bn /R

Y/ G

Bn /R

Bk /B

Bk

V/Bk

BA

R/W

12 SC

Bn/R

G Bn/R

B

B

Bk /B

Gr/R

Gr/R

W

W

Bk

W/O W/Y

R/W

R/Y

Bk

R

Gr/G

diretto Key Gnd

Out-pilot light

Led

R/B

Y

Lb

Bk

In Unlock hands free Out unlock hands free

R/Bk

P/Bk R Lb

IN-pilot light

R/B

N.C.

Bk

Hi Beam Low Beam

Immo light out

Ntc fuel sensor

Can Hi

Key Sense

nc

Gnd Can Low

Immo Input alarm Tair Input

Gr/G

Gr/Bk

R/Bk

Bk

Bk

Y/Gr

Bk Bk

G r/B

k G r/G

R/ Bk

Bn /R

Bn /R

G n. c.

R/ Y

R/ Y

Y

R/B

R/B

R/Y

R/Y

n. c.

n. c. n. c.

nc

3 1 2

n. c.n.

c.

B/V

B/V G/V

Lb/Y

R/Bk R/Bk

G/V

R/W BnR/V

R/Y

Etv

Inj Ecu

Dash

R R/Bk

R R R/B

R/Y R/Y

R/Y

Grip heather

Ais

Out FansR/G

R

Gr/R Bk Y

W/G

Gr/R Bk Y

W/Bk

n.c.

R

R/Y

R/Y

R/B

R/B

V/O

Bk Bk

V/W

V/O

R/B

n.c.

W/B

W/B

Bk/B

Gr/B

W

Bk

W/V

W/V

32 S

id e

S ta

n d

S u

b

15 S

id e

S ta

n d

M ai

n

01 02 03

04

05

06 07

0908 10

11 12

13

14

DIAVEL ABS / DIAVEL CARBON ABS

15

16

17 18

19

22

21

20

23

24

25

2627282930313233343536

3738

3941 404243444546474849

50

51

59

52

56

53

54

55

57

58

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Diavel Ducati works, you can view and download the Ducati Diavel 2014 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner’s Manual for Ducati Diavel as well as other Ducati manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner’s Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Ducati Diavel. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Ducati Diavel 2014 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Ducati Diavel 2014 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Ducati Diavel 2014 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Ducati Diavel 2014 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Ducati Diavel 2014 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Хайлефлокс 500 мг инструкция по применению цена отзывы
  • Хлебопечка синтек 1406 инструкция по применению
  • Катена таблетки 300 инструкция цена по применению взрослым
  • Лего ев3 инструкции по сборке сумо
  • Руководство пользователя по документообороту в 1с